Home

Maytag CWE5800ACS Oven User Manual

1. 2 z m E w m N CONTROLLING SCOREBOARDS 1 2 3 4 ALL FROM ONE CONTROL CONSOLE SOINOMLMVG INTERMEDIATE SETUP MULTIPLE SCOREBOARDS EACH RUN INDEPENDENTLY OR ALL RUN FROM ONE CONTROLLER SOINOMDIVO 1 35 02 Q3SS3NdX3 1203480 8 EACH SCOREBOARD RADIO RECEIVER WILL NEED TO BE SETUP SCOREBOARD 1 J5 BCAST1 CHANNEL 1 S1 1 SCOREBOARD 2 J5 BCAST1 CHANNEL 2 S1 2 SCOREBOARD 3 J5 BCAST1 CHANNEL 3 S1 3 UP TO 8 SCOREBOARDS CAN BE SETUP IN THIS METHOD S1 ON THE SCOREBOARD RADIO RECEIVER CAN BE SET TO 1 THRU 8 FOR INDIVIDUAL CONTROL SET THE CONTROL CONSOLE TO BCAST 1 AND THE CHANNEL TO THE CHANNEL NUMBER OF THE SCOREBOARD YOU WOULD LIKE TO CONTROL EX TO CONTROL JUST SCOREBOARD 3 SET THE CONSOLE TO BCAST 1 CHANNEL O3 90046 QS SONIMOONS SOINOMDIVO 2002 1H9lMAdOO 3HL ATIVOINOM10313 SNV3A A9 LON OQ AMVI3IMdOMd 33V SIHL NO 5 19139 Q3SS3NdX3 SLd39NOO FOR CONTROL OF ALL SCOREBOARDS AT ONCE SET
2. UC CE DAKTRONICS INC BROOKINGS SD 57006 CHANGED TO BE FOR A S 5010 CONSOLES ONLY ALL SPORT 5000 SERIES CONSOLES fi OUS REAR VIEW A S 5010 CONNECTOR ASSIGNMENTS 13 APR 99 ADDED ws 5010 LAYOUT bes BY EBRAVEK DRAWN BY EBRAVEK DATE 27APR98 DATE DESCRIPTION m s 1 1 9 6 RO4A E 1 02 1 42 05 OCT 01 ar 0000 45900 DRIVER FRONT VIEW WITH COVER REMOVE TWO WING NUTS TO REMOVE COVER AND GAIN ACCESS TO FUSES J25 FUNCTION FUNCTION DS1 RX Ji J8 GND 7 GND FUNCTION ADDR O 8 ADDR 4 SEG C ADDR 1 9 ADDR 5 DS3 STATUS SEG B GND GND SEG A ADDR 2 11 ADDR 6 J17 SEG F ADDR 3 12 CLMN SWAP FUNCT SEG E SIC IN SEG D SIC IN COMMON SIG OUT SEG H SIG OUT SEG O1 S CALI ND J26 FUNCTION GND J25 J1 J J18 PROT 0 ddd FUNCTION PROT 1 H 0000 45000 LAMP NEUT SU LAMP NEUT TOD N Dor ag z z LAMP HOT 1 3 5 7 oad Dr z LAMP HOT 2 4 6 8
3. CND PRO PRI PR2 D 4 NOTES 85 100 WITH NO ADDRESS SELECTED DRIVER WILL DEFAULT TO A S 4000 PROTOCOL J18 HORN GREEN LED 051 INDICATES THAT THE DRIVER HAS POWER FUNCTION RED LED DS2 WILL FLICKER WHEN THE DRIVER RECEIVES SIGNAL C AMBER LED 053 WILL BLINK WHEN THE DRIVER IS RUNNING 120SW P IF DS3 IS ON OR OFF CONTINUOUSLY THE MICROCONTROLLER IS NOT WORKING 1205W N REFER TO DRAWING 128429 FOR CURRENT LOOP REDRIVE SPECIFICATIONS REFER TO DRAWING 115081 FOR J20 PROTOCOL SETTINGS TO DRAWINGS 115078 115079 FOR J19 ADDRESS SETTINGS THE CONCEPTS EXPRESSED DETAILS SHOWN ON THIS DRAWING ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY DO NOT REPRODUCE BY ANY MEANS INCLUDING ELECTRONICALLY WITHOUT THE EXPRESSED WRITTEN CONSENT OF DAKTRONICS INC COPYRIGHT 2006 DAKTRONICS INC DAKTRONICS INC BROOKINGS SD 57006 ADDED ADDRESS SWITCH S1 TO DRAWING PROJ SPECIFICATIONS LED DRIVER 16 COL RESIZED TEXT SO THAT IT WAS EASIER TO READ AND CLARIFIED FUNCTIONS OF EACH JACK DRAWN BY DULSCHM 09 OCT 06 REVISION APPR BY DESCRIPTION 02 scar 1 1 9 2 R 2 8 8 1 3 Appendix D Quick Reference Sport 5000 Standard Keys Note Refer
4. F17 F18 DRIVER FRONT VIEW WITH COVER REMOVED 425 FUNCTION FAN SW HOT NEUT FAN HOT NEUT J19 J22 FUNCTION FUNCTI NEUTRAL 1 0 NEUTRAL 2 COMMON 120V HOT 120V HOT PLUG FROM FAN IN COVER CONNECTS TO 925 A CHANGED J25 amp J26 TEXT 2 OCT OO 5 V TO GND BIN So Ta s DAKTRONICS INC BROOKINGS SD 57006 CORRECTED J26 PINOUT TABLE PROJ 2 JUNE 00 LAYOUT 8 COLUMN DRIVER III REMOVED DIMMING HEADER AND TABLE pEs EB DRAWN BY EB pate 11 NOV 99 30 NOV 99 DATE DESCRIPTION m 1 5 RO 4A 7 1 2 5 9 4 1 F1 THRU F8 ARE TYPE 10 DAKTRONICS PART NUMBER F 1006 F17 THRU F18 ARE TYPE AGC 1 2 DAKTRONICS PART NUMBER 1000 29 SEP 00 SCOREBOARD J BOX NOT TYPICAL INSTALLATION SHOWN PROVIDED BY DAKTRONICS 1 4 PHONE JUMPER CABLE PROVIDED BY DAKTRONICS OSN lt 120V AC 120V AC AUXILIARY MAIN SCOREBOARD SCOREBOARD RECOMMENDED SIGNAL CABLE 1 PAIR 22 AWG CABLE WIT
5. Block Diagram A S 5000 BB VB WR 2 All Sport 5000 25 Pin J Box Wiring sss Block Diagram A S 3000 or 5000 BB VB 8 WR 4 Channel Selection Single Control Console Gen Channel Selection Single Broadcast Group Gen Channel Selection Multiple Broadcast Group Gen Speed Adjust Calculations Radar Reference Drawings 313 LYNX COMPUTER NOT BY DAKTRONICS Q39NVH2 0 1065 0160 V1 5 ALL SPORT 4000 ore PRESS BOX gt 1010 0026 NOlLdl42S3Q S9NILLSS LAdLNO 0805 1 0300 LM 120 VAC POWER 15 AMP BREAKER SEE SCOREBOARD SPECIFICATIONS STANDS COMMON FINISH LINE WvuSvia 83519 W31SAS SMO NOISIA33 XVLIHMP 8 SOINOMLXVQ 02 000 046 TIV XNA1 HSINI3 HLIM 0995 100 M 0895 TIVB81OOJ OVMHl 661 FOOTBALL SCOREBOARD LYNX SCBD OUTPUT SETTINGS SCRIPT ALLSPORT LSS
6. ONE CONSOLE SET TO BC CHANNE CONTROLL SCOREBOARDS AT ONCE MULTIPLE SCOREBOARDS WITH ONE CONTROLLER AT LL TIMES COREBOARD RADIO RECEIVERS WILL COME FACTORY SET CORRECTLY ALL SCOREBOARD RADIO ECEIVERS SHOULD BE SET THE SAME ET CONTROL CONSOLE TO BCAST 1 CHANNEL Ol IF ANY SCOREBOARD FAILS TO OPERATE PROPERLY OPEN S T COREBARD RADIO RECEIVER IN FAULTY SCOREBOARD S AND VERIFY HAT J5 BCAST1 AND CHANNEL 1 S1 1 SCOREBOARD SCOREBOARD SCOREBOARD SCOREBOARD WITH RADIO SET WITH RADIO SET WITH RADIO SET WITH RADIO SET TO J5 5 1 TO J5 SET J5 BCAST1 J5 5 1 CHANNEL 1 CHANNEL 42 CHANNEL 5 CHANNEL 4 SCOREBOARD 1 SCOREBOARD 2 SCOREBOARD 3 SCOREBOARD 4 NOlLdl3OS3Q CONTROLLING CONTROLLING CONTROLLING CONTROLLING SCOREBOARD 1 SCOREBOARD 2 SCOREBOARD 3 SCOREBOARD 4 INDEPENDENTLY INDEPENDENTLY INDEPENDENTLY INDEPENDENTLY LE WITH RADIO ONE CONSOLE WITH RADIO ONE CONSO H RADIO ONE CONSOLE WITH RADIO BCA SET TO BCAST SET TO B 1 SET TO BCAST 1 NEL CHANNEL CHA CHANNEL 04 ROL CONTROL CONTROL CONTROLLING SCOREBOARD 2 SCOREBOARD 3 SCOREBOARD 4
7. inti 122 poko nep aret aptam aetema deponit 123 sodes eset degustar fes 124 Main Glocke so beoe CLIE MED eR tM E 124 Play Clock te aree e RO ra ety edi tee cds 125 Tite OUTS iret lec reU e rh HER EU RR ERIS DE E UE ee ee 126 Center of Field Yard Tine Ea p nare 127 Auto Calculate ete eee ed qe S e 127 Select is esce 128 by Quarter c eter D e aae e er reete eius 128 Switch Qutput 3 oor abe b ar ERA mp e re REED III 128 Default Settings EDI ERR ES 130 Hockey Operations 9 1 9 2 9 3 9 4 9 5 Shots on Goal Console Operation 131 Hockey eben eire d re 131 Time Out On Oft deb amete n e 131 Enable Penalty Clocks crei gere pet e ge e ers 132 Disable Penalty Clocks 2 2 00 9 mra tb nte ab ob ed n ee 132 Minor Major Penalty ERRORI i ER RERO GEEHRTE RENS 132 EN 133 Penalty ite e eme a p ae eit aeta 133 Ee 133 Player Penalty i ora ai amt es 135 Clock uen eene pon ce deter
8. Drawing A 180566 Channel Selection Single Broadcast Group Gen Drawing A 180922 Channel Selection Multiple Broadcast Group Gen IV Drawing A 180923 The radio receiver units used in the scoreboards have a channel setting switch that can be set from 1 through 8 channels 0 and 9 15 are not used A radio receiver will accept data from a console transmitter with the same channel and broadcast group setting The drawings listed above show how to install the Sport 1600 in order to operate one scoreboard or multiple scoreboards at a time The receivers also have a jumper that can be used to select broadcast group 1 2 3 or 4 A Broadcast Group defines a group of radio receivers that in addition to listening to the channel selected on the channel switch will also listen for data broadcast on their broadcast channel There are four broadcast groups available In this type of system the receiver unit at the scoreboard must have the channel switch set to a specific channel The operator must know which channel the board is set on The operator must then enter the specific channel during console startup when prompted to do so 24 Basic Operations Each radio receiver will accept data sent from the broadcast channel of its respective broadcast group This is selected by setting the transmitter radio from the console to the respective broadcast group e
9. RESET 71155 10 55 current setting This setting is used by the RESET button on the remote shot clock control console Note The current setting for the RESET time displays on the LCD until the first number key is pressed Enter the correct amount of reset time in minutes and seconds on the number pad and press lt ENTER gt For example 00 45 Continued on next page Water Polo Operations 307 Continued from previous page LCD Display Action SHOT CLOCK MODE Press YES to synchronize the shot clock with the main clock SYNC If lt STOP gt for the main clock is pressed while the main and shot clocks are running the shot clock stops The shot clock restarts when lt gt is pressed for the main clock Press to allow the shot clock to run independently of the main clock The shot clock starts and stops only with the switch on the remote shot clock control console SHOT CLOCK AODE Press YES to blank the shot clock time when the shot clock time is greater than or equal to the main 1 CN AUTO BLANK clock time The shot clock is reset and stopped when the display is blanked to eliminate inadvertent sounding of shot clock horn Press to display the shot clock time at all times Penalty Time Default times can be set for the minor and major penalty keys The minor penalty time is used as the default when first enter
10. current setting Extras 1 Press the appropriate EXTRA 1 gt key to increment the total number of extra runs for the Home or Guest team The LCD shows which key was pressed and the new value for the game EXTRAS 1 gt is used to make corrections if an entry error has occurred LCD Display EXTRA RUNS 1 NN current setting Wickets 1 LCD Display WICKETS NN NN current setting Wickets 1 Action Press the appropriate lt EXTRA 1 gt key to increment the total number of extra runs for the Home or Guest team The LCD shows which key was pressed and the new value for the game Press the appropriate lt EXTRA 1 gt key to decrement the wicket number for the game The LCD shows which key was pressed and the new value for the game lt WICKETS 1 gt is used to make corrections if an entry error has occurred LCD Display WICKETS 1 NN Y current setting Press the appropriate WICKETS 1 gt key to increment the wicket number for the game The LCD shows which key was pressed and the new value for the game Cricket Operations 285 Overs 1 LCD Display DVERS 4 Press the appropriate OvERS 1 gt key to AN increment the number of overs for the game nn Y current setting The LCD shows which key was pressed and the new value for the game Overs 1 OVERS 1 gt is used to make corrections if an entry error has
11. Drawing 124686 Block Diagrams 55000 3000 BB VB amp WR 3 Drawing A 124688 Inserts inta rectae Drawing A 125290 Block Diagrams A S5000 3000 BB VB amp WR 2 Drawing A 125415 Refer to the information in Section 2 to start up the console and use the sport insert Read Section 2 carefully to fully understand the following operation instructions If an insert is lost or damaged a copy of the insert drawing located at the end of this section can be used until a replacement can be ordered Use the labels provided in Appendix B to attach the correct code number label to the sport insert in the appropriate location Write the code number in the space provided below Write the correct code number here If you do not know the code number to enter for your scoreboard refer to Appendix B in this manual If you do not know the model number of your scoreboard refer to the Installation and Maintenance manual provided with the scoreboard Basketball Operations 77 1 1 Basketball Keys Set Shot Time LCD Display SHOT CLOCH EDIT LURRENT 17 55 minutes seconds SHOT CLOCH EDIT RESET 1155 17 55 minutes seconds Press SET SHOT TIME to display the configured shot clock time length To accept the shot clock time length press lt YES gt
12. ESS PLUG ADDED BOTTOM VIEW WIRE SIDE 10000001 10000010 10000011 10000100 10000101 10000110 10000111 10001000 10001001 10001010 10001011 10001100 10001101 10001110 10001111 10010000 10010001 10010010 10010011 10011011010 10010101 10010111 10011000 10011001 10011010 10011100 10011101 10011110 10011111 10100000 ADDR O 0 N e 08 MAR 05 553400 vWIO3G 553400 vWIO3G 156 157 158 159 160 129 130 131 132 133 134 135 136 137 138 139 140 141 142 143 144 145 146 147 148 149 150 152 153 154 01 PROTOCOL ADDRESS TABLE KEY WIRE NOT CONNECTED 1 WIRE IS CONNECTED olololo ololol PIN5 2a 2l2 2 o o o PINA 2 2 0 O 2 2 O OI2 PIN2 BINARY ADDRESS DECIMAL ADDRESS PROTOCOL PLUG TIME OF DAY WIRE SIDE SIDE VIEW ENABLE WIRING DIAGRAM PROTOCOL PLUG WITH ALL WIRES CONNECTED
13. TOD N WITH NO ADDRESS PINS SELECTED THE DRIVER WILL DEFAULT TO A S 4000 PROTOCOL GREEN LED INDICATES THE DRIVER HAS POWER RED LED WILL BE ON OR BLINKING WHEN THE DRIVER IS RECEIVING SIGNAL AMBER LED INDICATES LED DRIVER STATUS LED WILL BE BLINKING TO INDICATE THAT THE DRIVER IS RUNNING IF THE LED IS OFF OR ON SOLID ALL OF THE TIME THEN THE DRIVERS CPU 15 NOT FUNCTIONING AND MAY NEED TO BE RESET OR REPLACED REFER TO DRAWINGS 115078 amp 115079 FOR 919 ADDRESS SETTINGS FOR THIS DRIVER REFER TO DRAWING 115081 FOR J20 PROTOCOL SETTINGS FOR THIS DRIVER REDRIVE CIRCUIT 15 PROCESSOR REFRESHED REFER TO DWG A 128429 FOR FURTHER INFORMATION ON THE CURRENT LOOP REDRIVE CIRCUIT SPECIFICATIONS PROJ DAKTRONICS INC BROOKINGS SD 57006 TITLE 16 COLUMN LED DRIVER SPECIFICATIONS 2 OCT 00 UPDATED NOTES SECTION DES BY EB DRAWN BY EBRAVEK pate 11 JAN 00 REVISION DATE DESCRIPTION APPR BY 01 SCALE 122 1150 126174 WIRE NOT CONNECTED 1 WIRE IS CONNECTED TO ANY GROUND PIN 1 4 7 10 J19 ADDRESS AND COLUMN SELECT JACK PIN 11 DECIMAL ADDRESS DECIMAL ADDRESS DECIMAL ADDRESS DECIMAL ADDRESS PROTOCOL SELECT
14. al 5 A ___ 2105 BB2119 Jaz 11011102 1 21012111 31013102 BB 2121 1105 2105 3105 4105 6105 BB 2122 BB2125 i17 11041002 210121112 310131025 2126 17 11011102 210121112 310131025 Al BB2197 ma 11101 1102 21012111 310131025 J BB4413 12 nomoz 2101 31013102 BB7213 i2 1101102 1 21012111 310131025 2 4242224 __ Feas 222 ___ 257 2324252 1011102 38100 maT 22 4 11 y 4404402 592122 H1013 7 72 ot gon 1 142 1 49014402 318 Sports Code Numbers Model Address Basketball Volleyball Wrestling Hockey Football 7723121 0 2 2 Ha022 70731212 aot gon H 2028 7723 12402 70723 2 12402 205 nz 121 2 H2000 121 2 0 7723 121 tot gon 7 723 121 7 1401 1402 24012402 4042 2102 ___ 720773 ______ 1401 1402 24012402 14401 44 H21085 ma 2 2 H2104 7723 11402 2400 ___ 71 72 73 _____ 1402 2400 7723 11400 gt 440442 H2107 ____ 71 72 73 1402 12402 7t7a79 ___ aot gon
15. 02 N current setting entered In count up mode the relay closes when the main clock reaches the proper period break or overtime length and opens when any other value is entered Karate Operations 245 2 CLOCK STOP The relay closes when the main clock is stopped and opens SWITCH DUTPLUT N when the main clock is running External devices are disabled when the main clock is running e LLULA 5 current setting 3 MAIN HORN The relay closes when the main horn sounds This could be CH OUTPUT when Auto Horn is enabled and the main clock reaches zero or when lt HORNs is pressed 34 NAIN HORNA N current setting Default Settings Write the settings for this installation in the space Custom provided wen omm mmm emm Main Clock Period 5 00 Length 246 Karate Operations Section 17 Tae Kwon Do Operations Sport Insert 06 96889 Red White Code 283 0G 98375 White Red Code 286 The Sport Insert drawing is located at the end of this section The Team Name insert and Block Diagram drawings are located in Appendix A Reference Drawings Insert Tae Kwon Do Code 283 Drawing A 96889 Insert Tae Kwon Do Code 286 Drawing A 98375 Refer to the information in Section 2 to start up the console and use the sport insert Read
16. Address Sport Code CR 2001 5599 Pitch amp Speed eS aman 372 374 376 372 374 376 372 374 376 372 374 376 372 374 376 552 MS 2007 Rugby 7701 BB 2014 Columns 5 8 Multi Purpose 99 43 t Columns 1 4 Multi Purpose 9 Trig t Columns 1 4 Multi Purpose Timer 99 T 2000 t Columns 1 4 Multi Purpose Timer 99 2003 2 Multi Purpose 99 Multi Purpose Timer 99 TI 2006 2 1 TI 2007 Columns 1 4 Multi Purpose Timer 99 TI 2009 2 Multi Purpose Timer 199 TI 2010 2 4 Columns 1 4 Multi Purpose Timer 199 TI 2011 1 Columns 1 4 Multi Purpose Timer 99 324 Sports Code Numbers Model Address Sport Code T 2013 1 Columns 1 4 Mul PuposeTimer 99 Ti 2014 2 Columns 1 4 Multi Purpose Timer 99 Thais 2 1 4 Multi Purpose Timer 99 gt ipe RO 2006 Rodeo 8000 oem we Ro 8000 ENT HE ee BB 2015 Segment Timer FB 2340 Segment Timer TI 2010 2 Columns 1 4 Segment Timer TI 2012 I1 Segment Timer 100 TI 2015 2 Columns 1 4 Segment Timer 220 BB 2046 220 220 220 C GNE IRR 220 220 Bar HE _ Tennis BB 2124 _ O BB 2124 17 14 Tennis T Tennis 1 220 O 220 TN 2604 Tems TN 2605 WR 2021 281 or 284 W
17. KICKS SHOTS ON GOAL si CORNER KICKS 1 PENALTY KICKS 1 CORNER KICKS PENALTY KICKS E DATE TEAM NAME JOELA on pu p p DESCRIPTION DAKTRONICS INC BROOKINGS SD 57006 EN pro ALL SPORT 5000 SERIES CONSOLE Time INSERT TEAM NAME DRAWN BY BRAVEK REVISION APPR BY pate 13 DEC 99 66 SEGMENT TIMER ACCESS THROUGH MENU FROM WITHIN SPORT CODE CURRENT RESET PRESS SEGMENT CURRENT 1 SEGMENT PRESS 7 DISPLAY MENU NOlLdl32OS3Q 1N3A93S 031 001 3009 Pss FIRST LAST SEGMENT SEGMENT SEGMENT TI 9 PRESS ENTER 2 z LL 2475 REV 01 DEDICATED MES SEGMENT TIMER CODE 100 DISPLAY INTERVAL M3AIL IN3A93S IM3SNI 3105 02 531435 0005 14045 90046 QS SO9NDIOO38 M3AVHB8 3 28 00 YYW 12 LO AVW e NAF oz 4 405 OL SNNN109 3WOH 15309 JHL 40 NOILISOd Q3HOIIMS NOlLdl32S3Q SA34 3WOH AVIdSIQ ONY 1009 lS3n9 AVIdSIQ Q3QQv OSIY SAJA 2 PITCH amp SP CODE 5500 SNNN109 15319 3WOH SPUT FINGERED MSN BR
18. PROTOCOL ADDRESS NUMBER PROTOL FUNCTION DAKTRONICS OMEGA MULTILINE SWIM CTS MULTILINE SWIM NOT DEFINED STAND ALONE TIME OF DAY ENABLE DAKTRONICS INC BROOKINGS SD 57006 PROJ me PROTOCOL TABLE 1 THROUGH 15 ADDED TOD ENABLE ADDRESS 8 pes BY AVB DRAWN BY VANBEMMEL oate 28 APR 99 DATE DESCRIPTION jou m NONE 1 1 50 4 1 1 508 1 WIRE NOT CONNECTED 1 WIRE IS CONNECTED TO ANY GROUND PIN 1 4 7 10 J19 ADDRESS AND COLUMN SELECT JACK TIME OF DAY SELECT DISABLE ENABLE O PIN 9 09 WIRE SIDE COLUMN SELECT COLUMNS 5 8 COLUMNS 1 4 COLUMNS 9 12 COLUMNS 13 16 DECIMAL ADDRESS DECIMAL ADDRESS 2 2 O O PIN 12 11 A 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 8 PIN 6 2 2 2 2 O O O O 22 2 2 O O O 5 2 2 0 0 2 2 O O 2 PIN 3 2 O0 2 0 2j O 2 O 2 2 PIN 2 2 O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O PIN 8 PING O 2 2 2 2 O O O O 2 2 2 2 O O O PIN 5 0 0 2 2 0 O 2 2j O O 2 2 O PINS oO 2 0 2 0 2j 0 2 O 2 O 2 O 2 O 2 2
19. GREEN LED INDICATES THE DRIVER HAS POWER DAKTRONICS INC BROOKINGS SD 57006 AMBER LED INDICATES DRIVER STATUS LED WILL BE BLINKING IF DRIVER 15 RUNNING PROJ DRIVER CL 16 DIGIT W CHARGER m CHANGED ADD1 0 ADD1 N ON J 19 pou DRAWN BY NWRIEDT DX 09 MAR 01 DATE DESCRIPTION nom NONE 1 6 6 RO 4A 7 1 45 9 1 LED DRIVER 0P 1192 0383 16 COL 0 1192 0384 16 COL AC REFER TO DWGS REFER DWCS A 115078 amp A 115079 A 290261 amp 290689 FOR ADDRESS SETTINCS S1 ADDRESS J17 PWR SIG J19 ADDRESS DIP SWITCH PACKAGE CTION 922 RC 100 RADIO PIN FUNCTION SW FUNCTION PIN FUNCTION J23 PROGRAM N UNREG P EN T ON DDO AD 2 P 232 GND 2 0ND 001 3 RESET D AD 4 RX INPUT P C D2 AD D3 AD D AD D4 AD D5 D D6 0 1 16 DIGIT JACKS PIN FUNCTION J21 2 4GHz RADIO PIN FUNCTION GND GND RX_INPUT P 11 SJ CO CO SI GY Rho gt 2 2 gt 2 gt 2 gt CAE
20. VALUE DAYS e SOINOMLYVG TEWWSENVA V 08 80 99 90025 05 SONDIOONG 86 833 8l zva 8 gw lt LA3H 68896 90 DAKTRONICS INC BROOKINGS SD 57006 PROJ Time INSERT TAE KWON DO CODE 283 01 o JUL 99 CHANGED PART NUMBER TO 06 96889 AVB AVB DATE DESCRIPTION DES BY AVB DRAWN BY _ 26 SEP 97 REVISION 1166 96889 N co N LLI 06896 90 DAKTRONICS INC BROOKINGS SD 57006 PROJ INSERT KARATE CODE 282 mos CHANGED PART NUMBER TO FROM LL 2345 iM ava 065 AVB DRAWN BY VANBEMMEL 26 SEP 97 DATE DESCRIPTION 1 1 6 6 R 8A E 9 6 8 9 66 d3S Hd 3078 OL Q3M 1 31 OHO NOlLdl32S3Q JUDO BLUE CODE 281 MEDICAL BLUE MEDICAL WAZA ARI BE WAZA ARI KEIKOKU SONO WAZA ARI 8 WAZA ni KEIKOKU 1 H1 ON OFF MAMA 1 1 ON OFF CHUI YUKO YUKO CHUI SHIDO KOKA SHIDO ON OFF CLEAR ON OFF 16896 90 OL 9 043 ON LYVd 2 z m 9 15 gt lt m 2 9 m 2 D e eO 0G 96891 REV 1 SOINOMLYVG TEWWSENVA V 90045 GS SO9NIMO
21. WIRING DIAGRAM ADDRESS PLUG WITH ALL WIRES CONNECTED PIN 12 PIN 11 PIN 8 PIN 6 PIN 5 PIN 3 PIN 2 J17 MAIN J19 ADDRESS PIN FUNCTION PIN FUNCTION J6 RELAY GND N N FUNCTION G 41 4 DIGIT ADDO N HORNOUT N ND N PIN FUNCTION ADD1 AUXOUT N LOUT P SEGC N GND N 120SW P LOUT N SEGB N ADD2 1205 6VAC N SECA N ADD3 N GND N J7 RELAY SEGE ADD4 N N FUNCTION SECD ADDS N C TVCC GND N AUXOUT N H C z Tz D zr N D SWIN P SWIN N 0 SEC COLS1 N 120SW P COLS2 N 120SW N olo WIN NI NI SEG 0 1150 0130 UNCOATED OR 0 1150 0131 COATED 4 COLUMN LED DRIVER NOTE 19 WITH NO ADDRESS PINS SELECTED THE DRIVER WILL DEFAULT TO A S 4000 PROTOCOL lt cu COLUMN SELECT PINS WORK FOR EITHER A S 4000 OR A S 5000 PROTOCOL 1500 DRIVER WILL DEFAULT TO COLUMNS 5 8 GREEN LED INDICATES THE DRIV
22. 201 Display M l sencon eoe oir e eie Sia ae te De e E EE EE E eee 203 Edit Settings s o e ER mtem ih etd 204 uai in aeta butt preme eden 205 13 4 eet Dto e te b ttal ree did a Hed 206 Clocks nitent ottenuta bia 206 207 Team 208 UPDATERE PLEAYER d Dn 208 User eee ete ice eec vues 208 Select Captions ede eO les 210 Switch Output sco ope et edu et eise rd 211 Default ore HEU PD BP 212 Section 14 Wrestling Operations 141 Wrestling 214 Match Number st T eer t ar TRE AI RUE 214 ea RUN 214 Set Main Clock Period Times EE 215 Home Advantage Guest Advantage Stop Advantage 216 Team Score tree petras dette eite aon ipee 217 Match Score T 2 3 T uie e 217 Start Stop Injury 25 23 tei he Oo ROSEO E RR 218 Reset MIR 218 Start Stop Blood gend e UR re RH eed 219 Start Stop Recovery Time assii oe rh Buc e RT eei p eive 220 14 2 ET e RESI diti Rame NE 220 Home Advan
23. Cemerofried fso vs Switch Output tCock 0 Custom 3 130 Football Options Section 9 Hockey Operations Sport Insert LL 2436 The Sport Insert drawing is located at the end of this section The Team Name insert and Block Diagram drawings are located in Appendix A The Quick Reference is located in Appendix D Reference Drawings Insert Hockey od d Mittal t Drawing A 124218 Block Diagrams A S5000 3000 Drawing A 124689 Insert Team ctn eret tee Fere cs excea Ete Pe Drawing A 125290 Refer to the information in Section 2 to start up the console and use the sport insert Read Section 2 carefully to fully understand the following operation instructions If an insert is lost or damaged a copy of the insert drawing located at the end of this section can be used until a replacement can be ordered Use the labels provided in Appendix B to attach the correct code number label to the sport insert in the appropriate location Write the code number in the space provided below Write the correct code number here If you do not know the code number to enter for your scoreboard refer to Appendix B in this manual If you do not know the model number of your scoreboard refer to the Installation and Maintenance manual provided with the scoreboard
24. eene 289 Home Roster Guest 290 Innis Settings Meri ied e e rU e ERR Re e re 290 Time of Day AU Ane aa D A s 291 Section 22 Water Polo Operations 221 Water Polo Keys ettet e RE 293 Time Out On Oft ene eina EROR 293 Enable a rire eed iia o d o Rh ens 294 Disable Penalty Clocks Aiea a A Ae ait Rs eie 294 295 Time nod ate eese att IUE boc eo MeL More 295 Player Penalty OR re rie obe ee 297 Set Main Clock Go e RE E 297 DCOLC ad et EL ERG Les 298 Clear All ere ee REG eR eere REP ete 298 Delete Penalty oS TRU ms 208 222 eden eiit AR ERU 299 THM ketal cto eens ren bete aig 299 cM 299 ett at tto dans bait n ceti ce tbt eas 300 Time Out dense e Wag ete deed eit ome deese 300 22 3 ET E 301 oat Eam EAm 301 haue M 301 Home Roster Guest Roster icit ee e iet aves 302 Displ y Mer teet emet ete dde ted 303 304
25. lt gt gt to select the intensity for the digits on the scoreboard Press lt NO gt to resume the game in progress using the current data and exit the Menu Press the down arrow key lt gt to scroll to the next selection Note Dim levels pertain to outdoor LED products Indoor LED and incandescent products only support one level of dimming at 50 Cricket Operations 289 Home Roster Guest Roster Home Roster and Guest Roster are entered in the same way Home Roster is used as an example LCD Display RENU RDOSTER Press YES or the right or left arrow key to select T the Home or Guest Roster submenu and show the LER T SELELT first prompt on the LCD Press lt NO gt to resume the game in progress using the current data and exit the Menu Press the down arrow key to scroll to the next selection HORE TEAN NAME The TEAM NAME LL 2441 insert must be inserted to enter the Team Name Message RRRRRRRRRRRRRRT Center TNMC settings RRRRRRRRRRRRRR Team name The TNMC is updated after each selection is completed Use the COLUMNS ROWS and STROKE keys to select the WIDTH HEIGHT and FONT of the TNMC The defaults are 48 columns 8 rows and single stroke Enter up to fifteen 15 characters for the team name and press ENTER Reinsert the Cricket OG 164973 insert to continue Inning Settings Menu The INNING SETTINGS MENU allows the user to set the default number of ove
26. E E E E T 423 FUNCTION FAN SW HOT NEUT FAN HOT NEUT Jot folate E INO 920 922 5 FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCT NEUTRAL LAMP NEUT 1 NEUTRAL LAMP NEUT 2 COMMON 120V HOT LAMP HOT 9 11 13 15 PLUG FROM FAN IN COVE 120V MOJ LAMP 10 12 1416 CONNECTS 925 1 CHANGED ADD 7 TO CLMN SWAP ON 925 F1 THRU F16 ARE TYPE 10 DAKTRONICS PART NUMBER F 1006 F17 ARE TYPE AGC 1 2 DAKTRONICS PART NUMBER 1000 17 JAN 02 ee DAKTRONICS INC BROOKINGS SD 57006 O GND 5 CORRECTED 925 TABLE CHANGED 426 TABLE PROJ 29 SEP 00 5 FROM PROT S 19 00 LAYOUT 16 COLUMN DRIVER III CORRECTED J26 PINOUT TABLE DES BY EB DRAWN BY EB pate 11 NOV 99 2 JUNE 00 DATE DESCRIPTION 1 5 5 R 4A 1 2 5 9 4 ar 0000 45900 DRIVER FRONT VIEW WITH COVER REMOVE TWO WING NUTS TO REMOVE COVER AND GAIN ACCES
27. J7 1 41 91 03 OUTPUT 41 425 J6 MAIN PORT 7 SHOT PLAY CONTACT FUNCTION FUNCTION FUNCTION TIP CURRENT LOOP OUTPUT 1 EARTH SWITCH INPUT RING CURRENT LOOP OUTPUT 1 RS232 RECEIVE SWITCH INPUT SHAFT GND RS232 TRANSMIT SWITCH INPUT NOT USED SWITCH INPUT NOT USED SWITCH INPUT NOT USED SWITCH INPUT J4 START STOP HORN PIN FUNCTION OUTPUT 4 85232 SWITCH INPUT 2 SWITCH INPUT 1 FOR STANDARD CODES THESE SWITCH INPUT 1 CURRENT LOOP INPUT FUNCTIONS ARE USUALLY ASSIGNED RELAY TPUT ELAY GUTPU CURRENT LOOP INPUT TO THE FOLLOWING TASKS RELAY OUTPUT RELAY OUTPUT SWITCH INPUT 1 NOT USED FUNCTION USUAL TASK SWITCH INPUT 2 NOT USED SW IN 1 MAIN CLOCK STOP START CURRENT LOOP OUTPUT SW IN 2 MAIN CLOCK HORN CURRENT LOOP OUTPUT SW IN NOT USED CURRENT LOOP OUTPUT SW IN 4 SHOT PLAY CLOCK STOP CURRENT LOOP OUTPUT SW IN 5 SHOT PLAY CLOCK RESET CURRENT LOOP OUTPUT SW OUT CLOCK STOP OUT CURRENT LOOP OUTPUT CL OUT 1 SCOREBOARD OUTPUT NOT USED CL OUT 2 SCOREBOARD OUTPUT SWITCH INPUT 1 CL OUT 3 SCOREBOARD OUTPUT CURRENT LOOP OUTPUT CL OUT 4 DATA STREAM RELAY OUTPUT 10V AC DC INPUT P ALL SPORT 5000 SERIES MODELS 10V AC DC INPUT N MODEL FUNCTION 5010 120V STANDARD PROGRAMMING 5020 230V STANDARD PROGRAMMING
28. Time j J Blank Time ozo 1412 Display Mode Ao Jj Jf Pitch and Speed RTD Item Numbers The Pitch and speed program uses unique item numbers to display speed and pitch information Items 23 25 display either MPH or KPH depending on cycle and display settings MPH x100 MPH x10 MPH x1 Pitch type text 16 characters KPH x100 KPH x10 1 2 3 1 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 Pitch and Speed 71 Frame Number and Pitch Types The frame number sent with each RTD frame also represents the pitch type for manual mode The pitch types for each frame number are shown below Standard RTD Port configuration 1 200 Baud Rate 8 Data Bits and No Parity for the Jugs or Stalker Sport gun type Use a Baud Rate of 9600 for the Stalker Pro gun Fames 4 Change Up 5 ______ O 02020 Screw Ball 9 _____ BeakngBal O Use2 0 0 14 User 2 17 72 Pitch and Speed Section 6 Clock Console Operation Sport Insert 0G 136301 The Sport Insert drawing is located at the end of this section The Quick Reference is located in Appendix D Reference Drawings Insert Clock Drawing 136301 Refer to the information in Section 2 to start up the console and use the
29. 10 4 Settings The following settings can be edited by the user when EDIT SETTINGS has been selected from the Main Menu Main Clock Note 1 The settings entered for Main Clock are used with the SET MAIN CLOCK key Note 2 The period break and overtime lengths are used differently depending on the direction of the main clock For count down the main clock is set to the selected length decrements towards zero and stops at zero For count up the main clock is set to zero increments towards the selected length and stops when the selected length is reached LCD Display CLOCK TIME Enter the correct amount of time per period in minutes and seconds on the number pad and press PERIOD 95 ENTER 11 55 current setting For example 20 00 per period Note Pressing ENTER to select the period time as the main clock setting will increment the current period number if the clock value was previously zero Continued on next page 160 Soccer Options Continued from previous page LCD Display ELBEE TIRE Set the amount of time between periods BREAK 17 55 fif 55 current setting Enter the correct amount of time for break length in minutes and seconds on the number pad and press ENTER For example 1 00 Corner Kicks Saves or Fouls Select whether to display corner kicks saves or fouls on the scoreboard LCD Display Action CORNER SAVE FOUL Press lt 1
30. Press TIME OUT ON OFF gt a second time or the down arrow key to display the configured time for partial time out length Enter the correct time on the number pad and press lt gt 90 Basketball Operations 7 2 Menu The MENU key allows the user to select from a list of options specific for each sport The up and down arrow keys allow the user to scroll through the menu list Pressing a key other than YES the arrow keys and other allowed keys exit the Menu function The MENU function should be used at the beginning of each new game to edit the Home and Guest Rosters New Game LCD Display GALE New Code LCD Display MENU MAIN Press lt YES gt to clear all of the program data for the last game played or the game in progress and begin running the selected sport Press to resume the game in progress using the current data and exit the Menu Press the down arrow key to scroll to the next selection Press lt YES gt to begin selection of a new code from the ENTER CODE prompt Press to resume the game in progress using the current data and exit the Menu Press the down arrow key to scroll to the next selection Basketball Operations 91 Home Roster Guest Roster Home Roster and Guest Roster are entered in the same way Home Roster is used as an example LCD Display l ENU RUSTER SELEC
31. eet 62 Switch Outputs 2 medie beste aia da am obe Ap Eme 62 Default DOE RECUERDE e e rs 63 ii Table of Contents 52 5 3 Section 6 Speed Keys iren htec ee tete eiue 65 Pitch Keys icu 65 5 EDD nee ER tn HEP tb 65 Blank ei Ai e dep es es Asides bete e spe p dane 66 Speed 66 Show MPH and Show 66 Cycle MPH KPH and Cycle 66 Cycle 66 Pitch Count Keys Guest oe ERE eee eoe 67 Clear Pitch Countess a a pe dpa e meteo a RS 67 Display Home Guest Count 67 67 ie e ero ih e irre Qe e o EI ee eie its 67 New Code it e URDU one eiit meae 68 Dimming Menu eee ie eie He er eed 68 Radar Gun Types iR eet ed sod enia e dise 68 Speed Adjust Coefficient edente He edet ee 69 Sel ct Speed sanae eco sheds ed ate e e ite eie et eoe eit 69 Speed Indicator 70 Display EDGE Se Otro 70 Default EDU Ra n rH 70 RED Item Numbers ie eq e 71 Frame Number and Pitch 72 6 1 6 2 Section 7 7 1 Clock Console Operation Clock Console Codes Ra eese
32. FOOTBALL CODE 6103 SERIES 3000 TIME 6104 SERIES 2500 OUT ots 6105 PLYR FL PTS ON OFF 6402 3 6501 FB gt BA 6601 STANDARD YARDS RECALL ARTER RE YARDS 6604 GAME TOD RUSHING je RUSHING 6611 SERIES 2000 DOWN e 6612 SERIES 20008 YARDS YARDS PASSING PASSING e e LABEL HERE ENTER THIS PENALTY SCORE 6 NI 3909 mv LO 833 40 2 5 z Dig 24 gt 2 2 D o w gt Gr 2 gt VU o m D m z m LL 2437 REV 05 CODE NUMBER FLAG SOINOMLYVG V 659614 034 961 1 90026 05 SONDIOONG 66 120 0 A38 L 8 6 silva 435 AWW 9 NOlLdl32S3Q 20 7 10 2097 1097 53002 068 81 Yad 3015 IN3A93S 40 ONILNINd 3015 MOVE Zoly 3009 70 06 1017 3009 A8 say 60 NOISIA3Y 31 25 251010 saa TEWWSENVA V 66 81 wa 3550 0 1 11 9 0 1 1H3SNI xui 3105 02 531435 0005 14045 TIV 90046 QS
33. Segment Timer 43 Current Segment Press CURRENT SEGMENT 1 gt to increment the segment number Default Settings Write the settings for this installation in the space Custom provided cda 4 First First Segment Display Interval Interval Ee Segment FA I NU UE Segment Edit Current Segment CURRENT SEGMENT Press lt EDIT gt lt CURRENT SEGMENT 1 gt to n NAN display the current segment for editing EDIT NN current setting Enter the new value for the current segment number and press ENTER Menu The MENU key allows the user to select from a list of options specific for each sport The up and down arrow keys allow the user to scroll through the menu list Pressing a key other than YES the arrow keys and other allowed keys exit the Menu function Baseball Operations New Code NENU NAIN NEW CODE Warning Time Press YES to begin selection of a new code from the ENTER CODE prompt Press NO to resume the game in progress using the current data and exit the Menu Press the down arrow key to scroll to the next selection WARNING TINE 00 00 00 00 default Dim Bright Enter the warning time in minutes and seconds and press lt ENTER gt Enter 00 00 for no warning time When the warning time is reached the segment number flashes until the main cloc
34. To decline the selection of the shot clock time length press To change the shot clock time length and set the shot clock enter the new time in minutes and seconds on the number pad and press lt ENTER gt Press CLEAR twice to clear changes and return to the game Press SET SHOT TIME gt a second time to display the configured time for shot clock Reset 1 length To accept the shot clock Reset 1 length press YES To decline the selection of the shot clock Reset 1 length press To change the shot clock Reset 1 length and set the shot clock enter the new time in minutes and seconds on the number pad and press lt ENTER gt Press CLEAR twice to clear changes and return to the game Note The configured time of shot clock is set using the EDIT SETTINGS function when a new code is selected Continued on next page 78 Basketball Operations Continued on previous page LCD Display Action SHOT CLOCK EDIT Press lt SET SHOT TIME gt a second time to display the configured time for shot clock Reset 2 length RESET 2 1 55 18 55 minutes seconds To accept the shot clock Reset 2 length press YES To decline the selection of the shot clock Reset 2 length press To change the shot clock Reset 2 length and set the shot clock enter the new time in minutes and seconds on the number pad and press lt ENTER gt Press CLEAR twice to clear changes
35. coe caves m inae testate idee 167 REPE Bem ES 167 M oT 168 vi Table of Contents 11 3 11 4 12 2 12 3 12 4 Section 13 Ad HS 168 Match Number eese hen En 168 Matches ene o e a re arte rta a eds 169 EANDEM EM Mp 169 New Game eiae EB OR 169 ien 169 Home Roster Guest 170 Display Memi eee tenet t ee te e Rr I CER Cle E QC Ue PURI ced e rtr 171 Edit Settings pr top pn RR LR hei 172 ime Of Dayna hii need epit pe Ri er ERES 173 SeIU gs cun tie nhe ert ete ter a aout 174 Main Glock avers atc aceite aeta Sov ee 174 Switch OUtpUt et e tee p e R bte at UI eo ied ee 174 Default Settings need ee ilies Dialed ae 175 Guest 2 and Guest 3 Score 2 180 181 aide H 181 d e 181 oe ettet e s pL LUE A ots te cde 181 New Game un ee IR GR EINGEHEN REIR ES 182 New Code i oce rete riis eerie rte 182 Roster Guest Rosters aate rea Rsk veda qi ae E 182 Display eon e quee peste oot rie 183 Edit Settings nhe tei elu
36. 341 Sport 5000 lip oo cb dpt a 343 Table of Contents Xiii Section 1 Introduction This manual is designed to explain the operation of the AII Sport 5000 Series console For questions regarding the safety installation operation or service of this system please refer to the telephone numbers listed on the cover page of this manual To fully understand this manual and the operation of the Sport 5000 Series console Daktronics recommends that all general sections be read in conjunction with specific sport s Important Safeguards 1 Read and understand all instructions 2 not drop the control console or allow it to get wet 3 Do not let any power cord touch hot surfaces or hang over the edge of a table that would damage or cut the cord 4 Ifan extension cord is necessary a three pronged polarized cord should be used Arrange the cord with care so that it will not be tripped over or pulled out 5 Always turn off and or unplug the control equipment when it is not in use Never yank the power cord to pull the plug from the outlet Grasp the plug and pull to disconnect 6 Toavoid electrical shock do not disassemble the control equipment or the driver modules Incorrect reassembly can cause electric shock and faulty operation or permanent damage to the circuits The box below is an illustration of Daktronics drawing numbering system The drawing number 7087 P08A 69945 is how Daktroni
37. 69 jeee bS qe 6 996 69 c 9 EM lt dee Cog Laas pn n rn pn n rn Cog Xl 1 Cog 1 1 56190 Cod 1 oog 1 c gt c e NOTE J17 MAIN 41 16 DIGIT J19 ADDRESS J18 RELAY J20 PROTOCOL PIN FUNCTION PIN FUNCTION PIN FUNCT ON PIN FUNCTION PIN FUNCTION SiG P 5 GND HORNOUT N SIG N SECB N ADDO AUXOUT N 1 GND N 2__ SIG2 P SECA N ADD1 120SW P 1 CLOUT P SEGF N GND 120SW N PR2 N CLOUT N SEGE N ADD2 16 SECD N ADD3 GND N VCC P GND EARTH N SEGH N ADD4 16VAC P 00 5 SEGC N O0 CA N2 ADD5 oleo 22 o GND N VDD P N GND ADD6 ADD
38. BLANK PLAYER FOUL gt blanks the displayed player foul digits console may ask for a player number depending on the setting of Team Score Update Player in the Menu under Edit Settings Time Out TIME displays the number of full 1 press or partial 274 press timeouts if applicable Press enter to take a time out for the selected team lt TIME OUT ON OFF gt selects a full 1st press or partial 274 press time out and starts the time out clock e The timeout clock may be displayed on the main scoreboard depending on the Time Outs Show on Main setting in the Menu under Edit Settings Possession POSS turns the possession indicators on or off for the respective team Bonus BONUS turns the 1 on 1 bonus indicators 2 shot bonus indicators on or off Period lt PERIOD 1 gt increments the period value Shot Clock Time Quick Reference 331 SET SHOT TIME changes the current value of the shot clock timer Pressing SET SHOT TIME a second time allows the reset value of the shot clock timer to be edited Player Roster Keys PLAYER selects the player number for statistics edit Pressing IN GAME or OUT OF GAME within the player statistics edit screen changes the status of the player selected Press the arrow keys to edit the foul or points values for the chosen player Press the up or down arrow keys to move to a different player DELETE PLAYER deletes
39. Block Diagrams A S5000 3000 Drawing A 124689 lIrisert T am pet Drawing A 125290 Insert Water iniit cios ces Drawing A 178439 Refer to the information in Section 2 of ED 11976 to start up the console and use the sport insert Read Section 2 Basic Operation of ED 11976 carefully to fully understand the following operation instructions If an insert is lost or damaged a copy of the insert drawing located at the end of this section can be used until a replacement can be ordered Use the labels provided in Appendix B to attach the correct code number label to the sport insert in the appropriate location Write the code number in the space provided below Write the correct code number here If you do not know the code number to enter for your scoreboard refer to Appendix B in this manual If you do not know the model number of your scoreboard refer to the Installation and Maintenance manual provided with the scoreboard 22 1 Water Polo Keys Time Out On Off TIME OUT ON OFF stops and starts the time out clock The length of both the full and partial time outs can also be changed when the time out clock is stopped Note 1 Only the time outs configured in the EDIT SETTINGS function are displayed on the LCD and available for selection Note 2
40. Continued from previous page Press 0 through or use the arrow keys lt gt lt gt gt to select the intensity for the digits on the scoreboard Press to resume the game in progress using the current data and exit the Menu Press the down arrow key lt gt to scroll to the next selection Note Dim levels pertain to outdoor LED products Indoor LED and incandescent products only support one level of dimming at 5096 Press YES or the right or left arrow key to select the Settings submenu and show the first prompt on the LCD Refer to Section 8 4 Press NO to resume the game in progress using the current data and exit the Menu Press the down arrow key to scroll to the next selection 122 Football Options Time of Day LCD Display SELECT TOD GF DAS Pie 2 24 HOUR nENU TInE GF DAS 55 55 current setting GF DAS 0 current setting GF DAS BLANA GAME DATAS Press lt YES gt or the right arrow key to select the Time of Day submenu and show the first prompt on the LCD Press NO to resume the game in progress using the current data and exit the Menu Press 1 or 2 to display the time of day in 12 hour default or 24 hour format Press ENTER the down arrow key to scroll to the next selection Enter the time of day in hours min
41. Press NO to resume the game in progress using the current data and exit the Menu Press the down arrow key to scroll to the next selection Hockey Options 139 New Code LCD Display RENU PRIN Press YES to begin selection of a new code from the ENTER CODE prompt Press NO to resume the game in progress using the current data and exit the Menu Press the down arrow key to scroll to the next selection Home Roster Guest Roster Home Roster and Guest Roster are entered in the same way Home Roster is used as an example LCD Display 9 05720 Press YES or the right or left arrow key to select Home or Guest Roster submenu and show the I sm SELELT first prompt on the LCD Press NO to resume the game in progress using the current data and exit the Menu Press the down arrow key to scroll to the next selection The TEAM NAME LL 2441 insert must be A inserted to enter the Team Name Message AARRARRARAAAA Center settings The TNMC is updated after each selection is completed Use the COLUMNS ROWS and STROKE keys to select the WIDTH HEIGHT and FONT of the TNMC The defaults are 48 columns 8 rows and single stroke Enter up to fifteen 15 characters for the team name and press lt ENTER gt Reinsert the HOCKEY LL 2436 insert to continue Continued on next page 140 Hoc
42. Scores and current game score will be cleared and the set number will be set to 1 NNN current setting Reset Game Score Press RESET GAME SCORE to reset the player points values for the current game Match Number 1 LCD Display FIBTEH Press MATCH NUMBER 415 to increment the NNNN current match number HELM NNNN current setting Set 1 Press lt SET 1 gt to increment the current set number The new set number and new set games won values will be displayed on the LCD 11 2 Edit The lt EDIT gt key allows the user to select and edit the following scoreboard fields Press lt EDIT gt and the key for the home or guest field to be edited Tennis Operations 167 Games Won LCD Display GATES WON EDIT SET 1 nn current setting Points LCD Display TUP NN EDIT Y current setting Set 1 LCD Display SET EDIT N current setting Match Number 1 LCD Display MATCH EDIT NAAN NAAN current setting Press lt EDIT gt lt GAMES WON 1 gt to edit the number of games won in the current set for the respective player Press the up or down arrow keys to move through the games won for sets other than the current set Press the number keys to edit any of these games won values Action Press lt EDIT gt POINT to set the point value for the respective player The current editing score is shown by th
43. Sport 5000 Control Console Operations Manual ED 11976 Rev 16 10 September 2007 DAK TRONICS 331 32nd Avenue PO Box 5128 Brookings SD 57006 5128 19 tel 800 325 8766 605 697 4300 fax 605 697 4700 www daktronics com email sales daktronics com DAKTRON 5 ED 11976 Product 1196 Rev 16 10 September 2007 DAKTRONICS INC Copyright 2003 07 All rights reserved While every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this manual the publisher assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions No part of this book covered by the copyrights hereon may be reproduced or copied any form or by any means graphic electronic or mechanical including photocopying taping or information storage and retrieval systems without written permission of the publisher All Sporf DakStats OmniSport Tuff Sport and Venus are trademarks of Daktronics Inc Table of Contents Section 1 11 1 2 Section 2 Introduction Important Safeguards chee E OU ERR 1 Console Overview Roo RUE 2 REVISION HIStory I 2 Basic Operation 21 2 2 2 3 2 4 2 5 2 6 2 7 2 8 Console Operation dla e D 21 Sport rete p T UG ER te uae E 21 Sport Insert Operation Concepts 22 Start eeu ne P RR EU RI NR LM ER ER ERES 23 Setting Radio Channels i inet inter tet
44. The Home and Guest 1 Score keys are used to modify the value of home or guest team score When the LCD Display is as shown the following actions may be selected LCD Display TEAM SLURE EDIT NNN current setting Enter the new value of score for the particular team and press ENTER The LCD shows which key was pressed and the new value for the team score of the corresponding team Track Operations 179 Guest 2 and Guest 3 Score Event Heat The function of the Guest 2 and Guest 3 score keys depends on the GUEST 2 3 VALUE in EDIT SETTINGS Refer to Section 12 4 LCD Display EVENT EDIT If the value of Guest 2 and 3 in the settings menu is set to event heat and the manual timing code is eee selected the LCD will display the current event or heat number NI NNN current setting Enter the new value and press ENTER The Event Value is modified by the Guest 2 key and the Heat Value is modified by the Guest 3 key ELENT NNN This message is displayed on the LCD if an wm external timer code is selected and the value of EXTERNAL TIMER Guest 2 and 3 in the settings menu is set to NNN current setting Note event or heat value will be automatically updated to correspond with the external timer value if an external timer code is selected Use the external timer to modify these values To enter event heat information on the scoreboard
45. 2 88 ONE CONSOLE ONE CONSOLE WITH RADIO SET TO BCA SET TO BCAST 2 CHANNEL CHANNEL 00 CONTROLL CONTROLLING SCOREBOARD 1 amp 2 SCOREBOARD 3 amp 4 2 3 m E w m N CONTROLLING SCOREBOARDS 1 2 3 4 ALL FROM ONE CONTROL CONSOLE LE WITH RADIO SET BCAST 0 CHANNEL 00 CONTROLLING ALL SCOREBOARDS SCOREBOARD IN THE OTHER GROUP SET 95 BCAST2 THEN SET THE CHANNEL OF EACH SCOREBOARD TO A DIFFERENT CHANNEL NUMBER FROM UP TO 4 THIS WILL BE BROADCAST GROUP 2 BCAST 2 DVANCED SETUP MULTIPLE SCOREBOARDS EACH RUN INDEPENDENTLY PLIT INTO GROUPS OR ALL RUN FROM ONE CONTROLLER SOINOMDIVO 1 35 02 Q3SS3NdX3 1203480 8 TYPICAL SCENARIO FOR THIS SETUP IS A BASKETBALL COURT THAT CAN BE UN IN FULL COURT HALF COURT OR QUARTER COURT SETUP THE INFORMATION BELOW WILL APPLY TO ANY SPORT OR SET OF SCOREBOARDS gt THAT NEED TO HAVE MULTIPLE CONTROL OPTIONS TO RUN ALL SCOREBOARDS AT ONCE SET THE CONTROL CONSOLE TO BCAST O CHANNEL OO TO RUN ALL SCOREBOARDS IN BROADCAST GROUP 1 AT ONCE SET THE CONTROL CONSOLE TO BCAST 1 CHANNEL 00 TO RUN ALL SCOREBOARD IN BROADCAST GROUP 2 AT ONC
46. 91 Shots on Goal Console Operation Enter code 4000 to use the Sport 5000 console as a shots on goal console keys other than Home and Guest Shots on Goal 1 Goal 1 will be disabled 9 2 Hockey Keys Time Out On Off lt TIME OUT ON OFF gt stops and starts the time out clock The length of both the full and partial time outs can also be changed when the time out clock is stopped Note 1 Only the time outs configured in the EDIT SETTINGS function are displayed on the LCD and available for selection please refer to the table on the following page Note 2 The up and down arrow keys can also be used to select the full and partial time outs Hockey Options 131 LCD Display DUT SELECT FULL MASS 17 55 minutes seconds ThE OUT SELECT PARTIAL 17 55 17 55 minutes seconds Enable Penalty Clocks Press TIME OUT gt to display the configured time for full time out length To accept the full time out length press YES To decline the selection of the full time out length press NO To change the full time out length enter the new length in minutes and seconds on the number pad and press ENTER Press lt gt twice to clear changes and return to the game Press TIME OUT ON OFF gt a second time to display the configured time for partial time out length To accept the partial time out length press YES To decline the selection of the partial time out
47. For more exact calculations refer to Drawing A 243741 This setting allows the user to select a minimum speed that will be accepted from the radar gun The default speed setting is zero mph and will allow all speeds Pitch and Speed 69 Speed Indicator LCD Display SELECT INDICATOR 157 MPH NN current setting SELECT INDICATOR D NI N n N current setting Display Mode LCD Display DISPLAY BuTt l IRNURL current setting Default Settings This setting allows the user to select the speed at which the three speed indicators should light Speeds below the 1st setting will light the 1st indicator Speeds equal to or greater than the 1st and less than the 2nd setting will light the second indicator Speeds greater than this will logout the 3rd indicator Enter the desired value and press lt gt This setting determines when the pitch information received will be updated to fixed digit scoreboards and RTD In Auto mode scoreboards and RTD is updated as soon as speed information is received from the radar gun In Manual mode the console waits for one of the pitch keys to be pressed before updating with the new pitch speed Note In Auto mode the pitch keys are not used Write the settings for this installation in the space Custom provided Seting Custom 1 custom 2 customs Radar Gun Type JUGS Speed Adjust Coefficiont
48. LCD Display BALL DN NN If Auto Calculate is on SIDE OF FIELD must be selected first Y current setting Enter the field position yard line of the ball and press lt gt If Auto Calculate is off DOWN and TO GO must also be manually updated Press lt gt twice to clear changes and return to the game Press CLEAR and ENTER to blank the Ball On Down and To Go sections of the scoreboard IDE DE FIELD Selects the current side of field for ball placement hoe mira Press 1 or the left arrow to set side of field to left Press 2 or the right arrow to set side of field to right BALL BN NN Enter the field position yard line of the ball and press lt ENTER gt current setting Press CLEAR twice to clear changes and return to the game Press CLEAR and ENTER to blank the Ball On Down and To Go sections of the scoreboard First amp 10 The FIRST amp 10 key is used to set the down to 1 and yards to go to 10 If Auto Calculate is on this key is used with the BALL ON key Time Out The home and guest TIME OUT keys are used to decrement the number of time outs remaining and start the time out clock The scoreboard indicator is turned on when the type of time out is selected full or partial The scoreboard indicator is turned off when the time out clock expires or is stopped 110 Football Options Note 1 Only the types full or partial of tim
49. PIN 12 PIN 12 PIN 11 5 5 5 5 2 4 4 4 4 PIN 9 5 5 55155155 olo _ 5 o o o PIN 2 9 PINS PIN 6 5 90 S 0 2 0 PINS 6 _ 5 0 2 0 2 5 5 9 PINS 6 ojos _ 5 0040040 s 2 PIN 9 PIN 8 PIN 6 PIN 5 PIN 3 PIN 2 PIN 9 PIN 8 PIN 6 PIN 5 PIN 3 PIN 2 PIN 9 PIN 8 PIN 6 PIN
50. or the time of day clock on the scoreboard Press the down arrow key to exit the Menu and return to the game 244 Karate Operations 16 4 Settings The following settings can be edited by the user when EDIT SETTINGS has been selected from the Main Menu Main Clock LCD Displa Action Enter the correct amount of time per period in minutes and seconds on the number pad and press ENTER 1 55 current setting For example 5 00 Note Pressing ENTER to select the period time as the main clock setting will increment the current period number if the clock value was previously zero Switch Output The Sport 5000 series console has a relay that can be used to drive a number of different devices The relay can be configured to operate under different settings The default setting is 1 CLOCK 0 To display the relay settings that you want to select Press the number 0 1 2 3 key as a shortcut or use the left and right arrow keys to scroll to the desired setting Press YES to select the new setting Press NO or the down arrow key to leave the relay setting and display the next prompt The possible settings for relay output are as follows The relay remains open at all times and any external devices are disabled N current setting 1 CLOCK 0 In count down mode the relay closes when the main clock SWITCH reaches zero and remains closed until a nonzero value is L
51. CG Ro 9 WC CO Ro gt DID 1921 621 21 nnn J26 FIBER RX FUNCTION 20 2 N C 5V P GND N C N C RX_INPUT P GND N C n 78 CO NI OD CA Ro gt I uw J24 LIGHT SENSOR J21 J22 x RADIO 33 PIN FUNCTION PROCRAM J24 LIGHT_IN P LIGHT SENSOR LIGHT IN N PWR RX STATUS Oo WU 5V P CND I d35000b ER q J25 LIGHT OUT NEXT DRIVER PI FUNCTIO 1 LICHT OUT P 2 GHT_OUT N REFER TO DWG 115081 FOR PROTOCAL SETTINGS J20 PROTOCOL FUNCTIO
52. LCD Display DUT HORE FUL N current setting DUT HORE PARTIAL N N current setting Press EDIT TIME OUT gt for the home or guest team to display the current setting of full time outs remaining Enter the correct number of full time outs on the number pad and press lt ENTER gt Press EDIT TIME OUT gt for the home or guest team a second time or the down arrow key to display the current setting of full time outs remaining Enter the correct number of partial time outs on the number pad and press lt ENTER gt 154 Soccer Options Score 1 1 LCD Display SCORE EDIT Press lt EDIT gt and either of the SCORE keys for the HORE NNN home or guest team to display the current team 1 HIT Score setting NNN current setting Enter the correct team score on the number pad and press ENTER Other Increment and Decrement Keys The home and guest SHOTS ON GOAL 1 1 gt lt SAVES 1 1 gt CORNER KICKS 1 1 gt lt FOULS 1 1 gt and PENALTY KICKS 1 1 gt keys are all edited in the same way Saves is used as an example LCD Display HEC IT Press lt EDIT gt and the appropriate statistic key to SAVES EDIT HORE NN display the current setting For example lt SAVES 1 1 1 gt NNN current setting Enter the correct number on the number pad and press ENTER 10 3 Menu The MENU key allows the user to select fro
53. N Y current setting MAIN CLOCA PERIOOD 11 55 fifi 5S current setting When the main clock is set to count down and tenths of a second is selected the main clock displays in tenths of a second remaining when the time is below one minute Press YES to set the main clock to display tenths of a second Press NO to display whole seconds Enter the correct amount of time per period in minutes and seconds on the number pad and press lt ENTER gt For example 20 00 per period Note Pressing ENTER to select the period time as the main clock setting will increment the current period number if the clock value was previously zero Continued on next page 144 Hockey Options Continued from previous page LCD Display CLOCA THE BRENK lint55 17 56 current setting MAIN CLOCA THE OVERTIME 11 55 ffi sS current setting Penalty Times Action Set the amount of time between periods Enter the correct amount of time for break length in minutes and seconds on the number pad and press lt ENTER gt For example 1 00 Set the amount of time for the overtime periods Enter the correct amount of time for overtime periods in minutes and seconds on the number pad and press lt ENTER gt For example 5 00 Default times can be set for the minor and major penalty keys The minor penalty time is used as the default when first entering the player pena
54. Pitch Keys Note In Auto mode the pitch keys are not used The keys on the left side of the keypad are used to select the type of pitch for manual display mode In manual display mode the console waits to send the received pitch speed until a pitch type key is pressed Once a pitch type is selected the pitch data is updated on the display and sent as Real Time Data RTD Display Speed lt DISPLAY SPEED gt is used in manual mode to send the speed to the display as speed only blank frame Pitch and Speed 65 Blank Time LCD Display TIRE This setting determines the length of time before mm CC speed and pitch data is blanked on the display Set EAE Blank Time to 00 00 to display speed and pitch fif 55 current blank time data continuously Speed LCD Display EDIT SPEED The SPEED key edits the value of speed that is displayed on the scoreboard The value is edited as miles per hour or kilometers per hour depending on NNN current speed the current display setting Show MPH and Show KPH The SHOW gt key displays the current pitch speed in miles per hour The SHOW key displays the current pitch speed in kilometers per hour Cycle MPH KPH and Cycle KPH MPH Sets the order of cycle on a fixed digit speed display The CYCLE gt key sets the console to display miles per hour 1 followed by kilometers per hour when a new pitch speed is received Th
55. Press YES to exit the sport code and run the segment timer program Press NO or the down arrow key to scroll to the next selection EXIT GARE This prompt confirms that the user wants to exit the BRE YOU SURE S N sport code and enter the segment timer The SEGMENT TIMER LL 2475 insert must be installed to enter the Segment Timer settings Refer to Section 3 for extra information on the segment timer Press YES to exit the sport code and run the segment timer program Press NO or the down arrow key to scroll to the next selection Continued on nest page Volleyball Operations 203 Continued from previous page LCD Display Action PENU Press 0 through 9 or use arrow keys lt gt lt gt gt to select the intensity for the digits on the LEVEL 0 9 NN d scoreboard NN current level Press to resume the game in progress using the current data and exit the Menu Press the down arrow key lt gt to scroll to the next selection Note Dim levels pertain to outdoor LED products Indoor LED and incandescent products only support one level of dimming at 5096 Edit Settings LCD Display PENU PRIN Press YES or the right or left arrow key to select the Settings and show the first prompt on 1 IN EDIT SETTINGS Refer to Section 13 4 Press NO to resume the game in progress using the current data and exit the
56. Wrestling Operations Blood Injury Time The maximum allowed blood and injury times are set for each competitor at the beginning of a match and reset to these times when the Reset Match function is performed When enabled the blood and injury times are displayed in the main clock digits and the corresponding home or guest match score digits flash LCD Display BLUDD TINE RESET 71 55 17 56 current setting INJURS TINE RESET 71 55 fif 55 current setting BL OD TIUURS ON N N current setting Weight Class LCD Display WEIGHT CLASS GN S Ne GN Enter the cumulative time for blood time outs in minutes and seconds on the number pad and press lt ENTER gt For example 5 00 Enter the cumulative time for injury time outs in minutes and seconds on the number pad and press lt ENTER gt For example 2 00 Press YES to display the blood injury times on the LCD and the main clock digits of the scoreboard while the blood injury clock is active Press to display the time out time on the LCD only This setting allows you to use weight classes Press YES to use weight classes or press NO to select not to use weight classes Wrestling Operations 229 Select Captions LCD Display SELECT CAPTIONS This menu option allows for the controlled backlit 1 lt gt 2 captions to be turned ON OFF 1 Press the 1 key to select ON and OFF for c
57. lt m O c o 4 2 9 m c c e o E 0G 98376 REV 1 SOINOMLYVG MN3357350 9 86 V8Os 99Ll 90025 05 SONDIOONG L6 LL 40 vO O 10 NOlLdl32S3Q A33 1004 70 834 61 O3dS HOLWN OL 1X3L NOIS 33 70 833 90 3dISIVA 102 3009 qaaav nra NOISIA33 66 ONV m lt gt lt 2 JE gt 2 E O Ui T3 gt gt ni 8 ez m TEWWSENVA V SOINOMLYVG 90046 QS S9NDIOO38 LL 2433 REV 07 BASKETBALL CODE 1101 PLAYER FOUL 1102 FOUL PLAYER 1103 SERIES 3000 1104 SERIES 2500 1105 PLYR FL PTS 1301 MATSIDE 1401 HKY W 0 506 1402 HKY W S0G LABEL HERE ENTER THIS CODE NUMBER PLAYER e RECALL SHOT TIME e DELETE PLAYER TIME OUT ON OFF BLANK PLAYER FOUL PERIOD 1 PLAYER e S 00 95 v 21 90 2199 3009 A33 ALIWN3d Q3QQv lt 83 2079 3000 NMOG 1539 OL A3 OL 15844 GAONVHO 0538 514 14 5019 3009
58. A S 5000 Baseball Iniser A S 5000 nei cete herr deret Fo cr P Insert A S 5000 S0606 Ee pe En Ent eoa Eee Eo d ava Ca Entrer dd agi Insert TeamiNamoe z uote Tay Aver Insert A S 5000 Segment Insert A S 5000 Pitch amp Insert A S 5000 Tennis nnn nnn Insert A S 5000 Smart Clock Codes 1000 amp 6000 Insert A S 5000 StrikK Out Cricket Insert A S 5000 Water Polo Sport Inserts 315 86 100 66 nr 4 086 50 OL 415 3009 69 WONJ YSEGWNN 1 Q39NVHO NOlLdl32S3Q EVENT COUNTER CODE FUNCTION 371 DAY AND TIME VENUS 1500 372 DAY AND TIME STANDARD RTD 373 TIME BASED VENUS 1500 374 TIME BASED STANDARD RTD 375 EXTERNAL INPUT VENUS 1500 376 EXTERNAL INPUT STANDARD RTD 377 CUSTOM 2 3 u o z o m 9 lt gt lt m 2 9 m 2 D m lt m 2 4 c 2 o m O m CA M CA M 0G 58047 REV 2
59. Address Baseball Football Soccer Track Lacrosse 50 824 Ju 60 77001 4701 6601 7701 4701 7701 4701 7701 4701 501480 1516 fo 6601 7701 4701 50 18300 1516 6601 7701 4701 50 1930 __ 1516 660 17701 8601 4701 7601 4701 7701 4701 6601 7701 4701 90 2011 1 17 _____ tt 7701 4701 7701 4701 6601 7701 4701 7701 4701 7701 8601 4701 7701 8601 4701 80240 156 7 16601 7701 8601 4701 So201 iaz ___ _____ 7711 a 7601 4601 7601 4601 7601 4601 7601 4601 2004 7715 4601 7601 4601 MS200 7172 6 7601 4601 7601 4601 MS20 2 7475 _____ __ 2 4601 MS2014 71773 6601 7601 4601 MS20055 6601 760 4601 TBD TBD TBD TBD TBD MS2008 71773 1 6601 7601 4601 7727 6601 7601 4601 7727 7601 4601 pup mas Je All All All All All All ___ All T0100 __ 2 _____ ___ All All All All All All All 214 2 Coumnst 4 T0055 2 _____ All Sports Code Numbers 323 Model Address Baseball Football Soccer Lacrosse 2019 T 2101 All Notes 1 Code 5601 is With Clock and code 5602 is With Out Clock 2 To receive data from an external timer substitute code 8602 for the Omega PowerTime and code 8603 for the Daktronics Omni Sport 1000 6000 3 Requires two 2 consoles to operate scoreboard C 3 Miscellaneous Model Numbers
60. EXPRESSED WRITTEN CONSENT OF DAKTRONICS INC COPYRIGHT 2005 DAKTRONICS INC DAKTRONICS INC BROOKINGS SD 57006 PROJ SPEED ADJUST CALCULATIONS RADAR GUN UPDATED ANGLE 1 18 JUL O5 MODIFIED TEXT DATE DESCRIPTION DES BY DRAWN BY AHOWARD DATE 31 MAY 05 REVISION APPR BY 01 SCALE NONE 1196 245 741 Appendix B Sport Inserts Sport Insert Drawings Insert Event Counter Codes 371 376 Insert Tae Kwan Do Code 293 Insert Karate Gode 282 eed ata edere PV De PT Irnisert Judo Gode 281 Insert Boxing Code 291 nennen Custom Insert Karate Code 285 Custom Insert Karate Code 286 Custom Insert Judo Code 284 Insert Basketball E2439 Cet a E Eva PE E ted Insert A S 5000 Ce ha Ven bn Ed Lua Insert LL 2436 Hockey Hanaball Lacrosse Insert A S 5000 Wrestling ii rere mined urna tena Insert t bk esta eth ding Insert
61. Press YES or the right arrow key to select the Time of Day submenu and show the first prompt on the LCD Press NO to resume the game in progress using the current data and exit the menu Press 1 or 2 to display the time of day in 12 hour default or 24 hour format Press ENTER or the down arrow key to scroll to the next selection Enter the time of day in hours minutes and seconds using the selected format on the number pad and press lt ENTER gt Press lt gt or the down arrow key to scroll to the next selection Continued on next page Basketball Operations 95 Continued from previous page LCD Display Action RENU TIRE GE Press 1 or 2 to display the game clock GARE 2 current setting default or the time of day clock on the scoreboard Press the down arrow key to exit the Menu and return to the game OF DAY If 2 TOD is selected this message will be BLANK GANE DATA 48084 Press ENTER to blank all game data on the scoreboard except for the Time of Day digits 7 3 Settings The user can edit the following settings when EDIT SETTINGS has been selected from the Main Menu Number of Periods LCD Display DF PERIDDS I The No of Periods indicates whether the game consists of two halves or four quarters e UR 42 N current setting Press 2 or 4 on the number pad to choose the desired number o
62. The up and down arrow keys can also be used to select the full and partial time outs please refer to the table on the following page Water Polo Operations 293 LCD Display TIME DUT SELECT Press TIME OUT gt to display the configured time for full time out length FULL _ 18 55 3 11 55 minutes seconds To accept the full time out length press YES To decline the selection of the full time out length press To change the full time out length enter the new length in minutes and seconds on the number pad and press ENTER Press CLEAR twice to clear changes and return to the game TIME DUT SELECT Press TIME OUT ON OFF gt a second time to display the configured time for partial time out length PARTIAL 17 55 11 55 minutes seconds To accept the partial time out length press lt YES gt To decline the selection of the partial time out length press lt NO gt To change the partial time out length enter the new length in minutes and seconds on the number pad and press lt ENTER gt Press CLEAR twice to clear changes and return to the game Enable Penalty Clocks Press ENABLE PENALTY CLOCKS to allow the penalty clocks to count when the main clock is on Disable Penalty Clocks Press DISABLE PENALTY CLOCKS to disable the penalty clocks from counting when the main clock is on 294 Water Polo Operations Period 1 LCD Display PERIDD 4 1 Pr
63. Time Out On Off TIME OUT gt stops and starts the time out clock The length of both the full and partial time outs can also be changed when the time out clock is stopped LCD Display TIRE DLITS5 SELEET Press TIME OUT gt to display the FULL mm CG configured time for full time out length LL 1 55 minutes seconds To accept the full time out length press YES To decline the selection of the full time out length press NO To change the full time out length enter the new length in minutes and seconds on the number pad and press ENTER Press lt gt twice to clear changes and return to the game Notes Only the time outs configured in the EDIT SETTINGS function are displayed on the LCD and available for selection The up and down arrow keys can also be used to select the full and partial time outs Time Out The home and guest TIME OUT keys are used to decrement the number of time outs remaining and start the time out clock The scoreboard indicator is turned on when the type of time out is selected full or partial The scoreboard indicator is turned off when the time out clock expires or is stopped Note 1 Only the types full or partial of time outs that were configured in the EDIT SETTINGS function are displayed on the LCD and available for selection Note 2 The up and down arrow keys can also be used to select the full and partial time outs please re
64. and one of the WICKETS keys to display the wickets setting Enter the correct wickets number on the number pad and press lt ENTER gt Press lt EDIT gt and one of the OVERS keys to display the overs setting Enter the correct overs on the number pad and press lt ENTER gt The lt MENU gt key allows the user to select from a list of options specific for each sport The up and down arrow keys allow the user to scroll through the menu list Pressing a key other than lt YES gt lt NO gt the arrow keys and other allowed keys exits the Menu function New Game LCD Display AENU FIAIN GANEP Press YES to clear all of the program data for the last game played or the game in progress and begin running the selected sport Press to resume the game in progress using the current data and exit the Menu Press the down arrow key to scroll to the next selection 288 Cricket Operations New Code LCD Display NEW CODE Dimming LCD Display DING LEVEL 0 8 NN current level bright 096 096 096 6096 5096 40 096 2096 10 Press lt YES gt to begin selection of a new code from the ENTER CODE prompt Press lt NO gt to resume the game in progress using the current data and exit the Menu Press the down arrow key to scroll to the next selection Press lt 0 gt through or use the arrow keys
65. gt sets the length of the round current setting Rest Length LCD Display REST LENGTH REST LENGTH gt sets the length of the rest NN NN period The rest length is automatically counted down after the round time expires current setting Round Number LCD Display SOUND NUMBER ROUND gt sets the current round number NN current setting The round number will be automatically incremented at the end of each rest period 17 2 Menu The MENU key allows the user to select from a list of options specific for each sport The up and down arrow keys allow the user to scroll through the menu list Pressing a key other than lt YES gt lt NO gt the arrow keys and other allowed keys exits the Menu function Tae Kwon Do Operations 249 New Game LCD Display RENU PBRIN Press lt YES gt to clear all of the program data for the last game played or the game in progress and begin running the selected sport GALE Press to resume the game in progress using the current data and exit the Menu Press the down arrow key to scroll to the next selection LCD Display Press lt YES gt to begin selection of a new code from the ENTER CODE prompt NEW CODE P o Press to resume the game in progress using the current data and exit the Menu Press the down arrow key to scroll to the next selection Reset Round LCD Displa
66. hour default or 24 hour format Press ENTER or the down arrow key to scroll to the next selection Enter the time of day in hours minutes and seconds using the selected format on the number pad and press lt ENTER gt Press lt gt or the down arrow key to scroll to the next selection Press 1 or 2 to display the game clock default or the time of day clock on the scoreboard Press the down arrow key to exit the Menu and return to the game Judo Operations 267 18 5 Settings The user can edit the following settings when EDIT SETTINGS has been selected from the Main Menu Main Clock LCD Display MAIN CEOCH TIPIE 11 55 10 55 current setting Wazaari Time LCD Display LIT WAZAARI TIE NN current value Ippon Time LCD Display BUSRERUPI LITT IPPON THME NN nn Current value Enter the correct amount of time per period in minutes and seconds on the number pad and press lt ENTER gt For example 4 00 Note Pressing ENTER to select the period time as the main clock setting will increment the current period number if the clock value was previously zero This function sets the configured Wazaari limit for the Osaekomi Timer This is the value at which the Osaekomi Timer will stop if the selected opponents Wazaari is 1 or greater This function sets the configured time for the Osaekomi Timer The Osaeko
67. lt BATTER gt edits the current batter number Batter Average AVERAGE edits the current batter average Inning Number lt INNING 1 gt increments the current inning number Outs OUTS 1 increments the out number for the current team at bat Ball and Strike Count lt lt BALL COUNT 1 gt and STRIKE 1 gt increment the count for the current batter CLEAR COUNT clears the count To increment the ball and strike count for the pitcher automatically with BALL COUNT 1 gt and STRIKE COUNT 1 gt use the Auto Increment Pitches setting in the Menu under Edit Settings Pitch Count Balls Pitch Count Strikes Foul Balls Inplay PITCH COUNT STRIKES 1 gt PITCH COUNT BALLS 1 gt lt FOUL BALLS 1 gt and lt INPLAY 1 gt keys increment the total of each type of pitch for the respective team pitcher e These keys DO NOT increment the ball and strike count See Ball and Strike Count above CLEAR PITCH COUNT will clear all pitch count types for the respective team s pitcher To increment the ball and strike count for the pitcher automatically with BALL COUNT 1 gt and STRIKE COUNT 1 gt use the Auto Increment Pitches setting in the Menu under Edit Settings Hit and Error Indicators Digits Quick Reference 329 HIT or lt gt turn on or off their respective scoreboard indicators The ERROR key may also prompt for an error position depending on the
68. to cancel the selection and return to the game in progress 282 Strikeout Count Section 21 Cricket Operations Sport Insert 0G 164973 Cricket Code 5599 The Sport Insert drawing is located at the end of this section The Team Name insert and Block Diagram drawings are located in Appendix A Reference Drawings Insert Cricket Code 5599 Drawing A 164973 Refer to the information in Section 2 to start up the console and use the sport insert Read Section 2 carefully to fully understand the following operation instructions If an insert is lost or damaged a copy of the insert drawing located at the end of this section can be used until a replacement can be ordered 21 1 Cricket Keys Once the code for a cricket match is entered the console will power up with the Home side selected for display on the scoreboard If the Guest side is to start first the lt INNING 1 gt key will need to be pressed for the Guest team The LCD on the console will show which team is up and their team score the wicket number the overs remaining and the inning number as shown below HOME 123 INNGI OVER 50 e The scores of all eleven batsman and the extras will be added together for the total team score When a new game is started all of the scores will be set to zero The Runs 1 will increment the score for the batsman that is currently sele
69. volleyball e Added quarter score outputs for football to address 29 of code 6611 e Fixed 8 lane track output to show lane on address 12 it had the wrong rtd item e Added time into period for hockey to be shown when stop key is pressed and when arrow keys are pressed Version 2 1 7 Release Date 24 March 2006 e Added a warning time horn for a partial timeout using the full timeout warning time Madea menu option to select if the team score is shown on team score adv time section of the matside board e Added new address to baseball for a 2 driver inning board model BA 2022 e Changed the Mass Sub function in basketball so that it will not exit if you answer NO to the question of add player e Fixed the Wrestling advantage time edit so if the advantage time is set to 0 00 for one team and then started for the other team it will count correctly e Added custom code 0091 to replace an existing 2400 time of day console e Added support for receive of DSTI data in Hockey code Introduction 17 Changed baseball code to clear ball strike outs at top and bottom of inning and clear of batter and average Added a key to clear the batter number and batter average Changed entering of average in baseball so the value is padded with leading 0 s Added recovery time keys to wrestling Changed wrestling so the blood injury times remain on the display until a key is pressed Version 2 1 8 Release Date 26 May 2006 Added address
70. without updates from the external timer change the Guest 2 3 setting in the settings menu to SCORE TESA SCDORE EDIT If the value of Guest 2 and 3 in the settings menu NNN is set to score the LCD will display the current GUEST E value of score for the corresponding team Enter the new value and press lt ENTER gt 180 Track Operations Score 1 The home and guest 1 and 2 SCORE 1 gt keys are used to increment the team score TEAN SCORE 41 Press the appropriate score key to increment or decrement the score for the home or guest team AANE NNN current setting The LCD shows which key was pressed and the new value for the team score of the corresponding team 12 2 Edit The lt EDIT gt key allows the user to select and edit the following scoreboard fields Press lt EDIT gt and the key for the home or guest field to be edited Score 1 LCD Display TEAN SEDRE EDIT Press lt EDIT gt and any of the SCORE keys for the home or guest team to display the current team 7 HOME Score setting NNN current setting Enter the correct team score on the number pad and press ENTER 12 3 Menu The MENU key allows the user to select from a list of options specific for each sport The up and down arrow keys allow the user to scroll through the menu list Pressing a key other than YES the arrow keys and other allowed keys exits the Menu fu
71. z x le 00110011 0o o 00101001 00111101 0 N e N e N e WIRING DIAGRAM ADDRESS PLUG WITH ALL WIRES CONNECTED 61 62 100111110 51 52100110100 33 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 36 3700100101 a 40 41 42 48 00110000 64 01000000 35 00100011 39 00100111 43 44 45 00101101 46 0 1 110 47 111 49 0 0 1 1000 1 50 5300110101 a 54 55 00110111 56 00111000 58 1 1010 60 00111100 63 00111111 lt 57 0 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 KEY a a DESCRIPTION ADDED BOTTOM VIEW ADDRESS PLUG WIRE SIDE 00000001 00000010 00000011 00000100 00000101 00000110 00000111 00001000 00001001 10100001010 00001011 1200001100 00010101 00011111 Ni 28100011100 29100011101 30100011110 31 32100100000 26 27 1 10 11 5 59 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 15 100001101 14 100001110 15 100001111 16 00010000 17 0001000 1 18 00010010 19 100010011 20100010100 21 22100010110 251
72. 115078 and A 115079 when setting the address for a 16 column LED or incandescent driver 3 Use drawing A 123783 for a 4 column LED driver and drawing A 123941 for an 8 column incandescent driver when setting the address and column numbers 4 Use drawing A 145791 for a 16 column glow cube driver when setting the address and protocol numbers C 1 Indoor Model Numbers Address Basketball Volleyball Wrestling Hockey Football BB 1113 12 ttonttoz 2101 31013102 BB 1813 12 10 1102 210121112 310131025 i Coums58 ar J T fw 2021 12 nomoz 20 31013102 fJ All BB 2055 12 amos 21012111 31013102 88 2026 __ 1 Coumnss 8 a J fm 027 12 11014102 2101 310013102 o BB 2028 11011102 2101211315 3101 3102 BB 2029 2031 13 11041002 21012111 310131025 J ____ 02 1 11041002 21012111 310131025 2039 i2 105102 ator 91019402 BB 2042 12 14 1105 2105 3105 4105 6105 Sports Code Numbers 317 Address Basketball Volleyball Wrestling Hockey Football 4105 12 14 4105 2108 iz 11051002 21012111 810131025 J BB 2104 17 11011102 1 21012111 310013102 BB 2107 i17 11051102 210121112 310131025 2108 i17 1051002 1 21012111 31013102 BB2112 i17 11051102 210121115 310131025 BB2114 __
73. 2 24 HOUR GF DAS TOD 55 55 current setting Press YES or the right or left arrow key to select the Edit Settings submenu and show the first prompt on the LCD Refer to Section 10 4 Press NO to resume the game in progress using the current data and exit the Menu Press the down arrow key to scroll to the next selection Press YES or the right arrow key to select the Time of Day submenu and show the first prompt on the LCD Press NO to resume the game in progress using the current data and exit the Menu Press 1 or 2 to display the time of day in 12 hour default or 24 hour format Press ENTER the down arrow key to scroll to the next selection Enter the time of day in hours minutes and seconds using the selected format on the number pad and press ENTER Press ENTER or the down arrow key to scroll to the next selection Continued on next page Soccer Operations 159 Continued from previous page LCD Display RENU TIRE DAY Press 1 or 2 to display the game clock GAME 2 700 default or the time of day clock on the scoreboard current setting Press the down arrow key to exit the Menu and return to the game RENU TIRE GF nay If 2 tod is selected this message will be displayed 7 T BLANK GARE DATA Press ENTER to blank all game data on the scoreboard except for the Time of Day digits
74. 4 SCBD 4 50804 NOlLdl32S3Q 2 z e m E w N UddV 99508 ELI 1203480 gt 90 JLL N39 310SNOO 1OMINOO 319 6 NOILO313S T3NNVHO 5 900 6 QS SONDIOO38 SOINOMDIVO 2002 1HOlMAdOO SOINOMDIVO 1 35 02 Q3SS3NdX3 3HL ATIVOINOMIO313 SNV3A AG LON OQ AMVI3IMdOMd 4 5 33V SIHL NO 5 19139 Q3SS3NdX3 SLd39NOO SCOREBOARD WITH RADIO SET TO J5 CHANNEL SCOREBOARD 1 ONE CONSOLE SET CHA CONTROLL SCOREBOARD ONLY MOST BASIC SETUP ALL TIMES ONE SCOREBOARD AND ONE CONTROLLER AT SCOREBOARD RADIO RECEIVER WILL COME FACTORY SET CORRECTLY J5 BCAST1 CHANNEL 1 S1 1 SET CONTROL CONSOLE TO BCAST 1 CHANNEL 01 IF SCOREBOARD FAILS TO OPERATE OPEN SCOREBARD RADIO RECEIVER AND VERIFY THAT J5 BCAST1 AND CHANNEL 1 1 1 SCOREBOARD WITH RADIO SET TO J5 CHANNEL 1 SCOREBOARD 1 SCOREBOARD WITH RADIO SET TO J5 BCAST1 CHANNEL 1 SCOREBOARD 2 BASIC SETUP 5 S J5 BCAST1 CHANNEL 1 1 1
75. An interval time of 0 15 treated as if there were no automatic timing and stops at the next round Added codes for SUNY at Cortland 9403 9603 9703 Added hustle board stats to basketball codes 1103 1104 1105 This is on address 35 and includes rebounds blocks assists steals Added code 7611 to soccer for 4 column digit clocks Version 1 5 5 Release Date 23 October 2002 Made football code 6103 blank the total yards if rushing and passing yards are blank Added a segment for power on sponsor panel in basketball on address 35 segment 11 H and to address 17 segment 15 H Fixed the lock up problem in receive of stats in basketball and hockey Made baseball so it could shift inning scores by 9 Made wrestling show team score and match score based on the last score accessed Introduction 11 Added general stats to football for address 28 in code 6611 for the Fargodome Changed the default mode to race mode in auto racing Made codes 6000 and 1000 update the time on the display after doing a set time Added code 4701 and made it identical to code 4601 Made code 4601 to work for football boards Added code 4602 and 4702 to have 3 penalty timers counting for lacrosse Fixed the problem with mass sub in volleyball Added down labels 1st 2nd 3rd 4th to football Fixed the problem of team fouls that are displayed on the 6th line of a stats panel being blanked by player stats functions Changed the SO 2031 soccer output to show fouls i
76. CODE NUMBER HOME GREEN TEAM TEAM MATCH RESET PERIOD SCORE SCORE NUMBER MATCH p 1 1 1 START INJURY TIME HOME GREEN ADVANTAGE TEAM SCORE 1 SCORE 1 START INJURY TIME 66 234 LZ 00 AIN 92 vO NOlLdl32S3Q NOILVOO1 138 1 3009 514 13 SOLZ 3902 AGISLVN 1022 3009 qaaav 2 3 z GGOGCL VZ04 961 1 M43AVH8 3 549 66 230 90 ava TIVEASTION 1M3SNI uu 3105 02 531435 0005 14045 90046 QS S9NDIOO38 SOINOMLYVG LL 2434 REV 03 VOLLEYBALL CODE 2101 MATCH GAME GAME SERIES 3000 SERIES 2500 PLYR FL PTS MATSIDE LABEL HERE ENTER THIS CODE NUMBER Ne DELETE PLAYER MATCH NUMBER 1 TIME OUT ON OFF SCORE 1 ACES 1 BLOCKS 1 PLAYER NOLO 2 3 u o z WddV 3 8 L9OSCI VEOS 9611 66 934 90 aao NOILVOOT 138 1 3009 TIV83SV8 1M3SNI JIOSNOO S3lM3S 0005 14045 TIV 90045 QS SONDIOON8 SOINOMDIVQ LL 2438 REV 01 BASEBALL CODE TYPE 5501 STANDARD 5601 FB W CLK 5602 FB W O CLK LABEL HERE ENTER THIS CODE NUMBER 1 PITCH COUNT STRIKES 1 PITCH COUNT STRIKES 1 ERRORS 1 ERRORS 1 LEFT ON
77. COLUMN 5 COLUMN 5 COLUMN 6 COLUMN 6 COLUMN 7 COLUMN 7 COLUMN 8 COLUMN 8 COLUMN 9 COLUMN 9 COLUMN 10 COLUMN 10 COLUMN 11 COLUMN 11 COLUMN 12 COLUMN 12 COLUMN 13 COLUMN 13 COLUMN 14 COLUMN 14 COLUMN 15 COLUMN 15 COLUMN 16 COLUMN 16 ADDRESS SELECT 12 8K PROTOCOL 19 2K PROTOCOL 1 220 NOT USED NOT USED NOT USED NOT USED NOT USED UART RELAY EMULATION 5 PINS 2 O PIN 2 5 3 2 DRESS PLU WIRE SIDE a ADDRESS SELECT PINS a 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 e o o o lolo lo o PIN 11 2 2 2 2 olololo 2 2 2 2 ololo o PN9 2 2 olo 2 2 olo 2 2 lolo 2 2 o o PIN8 CA PIN 11 PIN 9 PIN 8 PIN 6 WIRING DIAGRAM J17 MAIN J10 11 J19 ADDRESS ADDRESS PLUG N FUNCTION FUNCTION PIN FUNCTIO WITH ALL WIRES SIG P CND N CONNECTED SIG N ADDO N GND N ADD1 N CLOUT P GND N CLOUT N 2 16 COLS1 N GND N COLS2 N COLSS N NOTES NDEN WITH NO ADDRESS PINS SELECTED THE DRIVER eae WILL DEFAULT TO 12 8K PROTOCOL COLUMN
78. Day ct ae bites cda re CH 305 22 4 SEIN ed eet pa 306 306 SHOU COCK 307 Penalty Time apte tna ba etate ned BA es 308 Time 309 Switch Output assesses hie ie E R eda Ade Se ie es 310 Xii Table of Contents Appendix A Appendix B Appendix C C2 C3 CA 5 Default Settings 2 eos RW HE Tele Do dl tee herede 311 Reference Drawings Sport Inserts Sports Code Numbers Indoor Model Nutbers nte cie 317 Outdoor Model 321 Miscellaneous Model Numbers nne 324 Custom Indoor Facility eode etie ett pee rere etie 326 Custom Outdoor Facility terio tire Pte tte a e ebat 326 Quick Reference Appendix D Sport 5000 Standard een 327 Sport 5000 Segment adest titel a de e aei tlie d e atu 328 Al Sport 5900 Bake 329 Sport 5000 331 ATL Sponb5000 333 Sport 5000 Hockey 335 UG BORE SUDO 337 5000 339 All Sport 5000 Volley allo
79. For example 1 00 PAIN ELGCE TIRE Set the amount of time for the overtime periods OVERTIME 11 55 17 56 current setting Enter the correct amount of time for overtime periods in minutes and seconds on the number pad and press lt ENTER gt For example 5 00 Basketball Operations 97 Shot Clock LCD Display MAIN CEOCH TIPIE RESET 11 55 fif 55 current setting SHOT CLUCH TIDUE SYNC MAINE This setting is used for the lt RESET gt button on the remote shot clock control console Note The current setting for the lt RESET gt time displays on the LCD until the first number key is pressed Enter the correct amount of reset time in minutes and seconds on the number pad and press lt ENTER gt For example 00 45 Press lt YES gt to synchronize the shot clock with the main clock If lt STOP gt for the main clock is pressed while the main and shot clocks are running the shot clock stops The shot clock restarts when START is pressed for the main clock Press to allow the shot clock to run independently of the main clock The shot clock starts and stops only with the switch on the remote shot clock control console SHOT CLUCH TIDUE AUTO BLANKO Press lt YES gt to blank the shot clock time when the shot clock time is greater than or equal to the main clock time The shot clock is reset and stopped when the display is blanked to eliminate inadvertent sounding of s
80. Horn is enabled and the main clock reaches zero or when HORN is pressed Write the settings for this installation in the space Custom provided oem Gunz Switch Output 1 Clock 0 Auto Manual Timing Round Length accessed by key Rest Length accessed by key Tae Kwon Do Operations 255 Section 18 Judo Operations Sport Insert 06 96891 Blue White Code 281 0G 98376 White Blue Code 284 The Sport Insert drawing is located at the end of this section The Team Name insert and Block Diagram drawings are located in Appendix A Reference Drawings Insert Judo c de 281 the et dette deest ener dade P EE es Drawing A 96891 Insert Judo code 284 ec ir rir erii a d xeu Drawing A 98376 Refer to the information in Section 2 to start up the console and use the sport insert Read Section 2 carefully to fully understand the following operation instructions If an insert is lost or damaged a copy of the insert drawing located at the end of this section can be used until a replacement can be ordered 18 1 Judo Competitor Status LCD Display THRE 4 00 1t The bottom line of the LCD will either display the Osaekomi time the medical time or the 1 1 i UIP i ul um competitor status during the operation of the W waza ari score position All Sport 5000 console in this mode Y yuko score position K koka score position P
81. LCD at the left is shown allowing edit of the Channel or Broadcast group setting Continued on next page 26 Basic Operations Continued from previous page LCD Display Action ENTER ACCEPT Edit the Broadcast Setting Use the number keys to enter the desired broadcast group and press CLEAR TO MODIFY ENTER to accept The bottom line shows the current setting The asterisk will move to the channel setting Use the number keys to edit this value and press ENTER to accept Edit the channel number to the 80857 GROUP desired value and press lt gt to accept RADIO CHAN O1 Broadcast Channel Control The default setting is Group Setting Scoreboards Broadcast 1 All Scoreboards All in BCAST Group 1 Set to corresponding BCAST 1 Channel All in BCAST Group 2 Set to Corresponding BCAST 2 Channel All in BCAST Group 3 Set to corresponding BCAST 3 Channel All in BCAST Group 4 Set to corresponding BCAST 4 Channel Channel 1 0 0 Basic Operations Single Controller Systems Channel Setting Typically all single controller systems will use the default setting BCAST 1 CHAN 1 radio receivers must be set with a switch setting of 1 with the Broadcast 1 BCAST 1 jumper set If you suspect interference from a nearby Daktronics system press CLEAR at the RADIO SETTINGS prompt to change the channel number Typically all multiple
82. Menu function The MENU function should be used at the beginning of each new game to edit the Home and Guest Rosters New Game LCD Display PENU PIBIN Press YES to clear all of the program data for the last game played or the game in progress and IN 7 NEW GANE begin running the selected sport Press lt NO gt to resume the game in progress using the current data and exit the Menu Press the down arrow key to scroll to the next selection New Code LCD Display RENU PRIN Press YES to begin selection of a new code from the ENTER CODE prompt NEW Press to resume the game in progress using current data and exit the Menu Press the down arrow key to scroll to the next selection Wrestling Operations 223 Home Roster Guest Roster Home Roster and Guest Roster are entered in the same way Home Roster is used as an example LCD Display RENLU RDOSTER Press YES or the right or left arrow key to select the Home or Guest Roster submenu and show the first EF T SELECT HONE prompt on the LCD Press to resume the game in progress using the current data and exit the Menu Press the down arrow key to scroll to the next selection HDRE TEBP The TEAM NAME LL 2441 insert must be inserted 4 to enter the Team Name Message Center TNMC RRBRRRRRRRRR Sanos The TNMC is updated after each selection is completed Use the COLUMNS ROWS and ST
83. Modified blank shot setting routine to update shot clock when setting was changed e Fixed basketball initialize routine to copy shot clock default on a new game and not on a resume Added second configurable timer reset switch in basketball and football Modified set play clock and set shot clock functions to start over at the first step when a new key was pressed Added 413 shots on goal scoreboard to all hockey codes Modified roster functions to send only changed RTD item fields Added codes 1401 and 1402 to basketball program and codes 2401 2402 to volleyball Modified initialize routine to leave the clock at its preset value when a new game is selected Version 1 2 1 Release Date 30 August 2000 e Corrected team name centering problem with odd length team names being off by one column Changed the multi purpose timer default dimming level to 0 full brightness Shifted characters and y were reduced to 3 columns for TNMCs Added a manual horn button function to test code 0001 Version 1 3 0 Release Date 24 October 2000 Modified multi purpose timer to have TOD display on a 6 digit clock output Changed initialize in basketball so heartbeat packet will be sent Introduction Modified pitch and speed routines to accept a faster pitch speed within 2 seconds of first reading Modified auto racing code to use driver name from ChronX for RTD display purposes Made several chan
84. Operations 49 At Bat The AT BAT keys turn the home and guest at bat indicators on and off It also clears ball strike and out count and sets batter and average to blank when the At Bat is turned on HORE AT BAT Press the home or guest lt AT BAT gt key to turn on the ON at bat indicator for that team 1 This display appears briefly HORE BAT To turn off the possession indicator press the same DEF AT BAT gt key a second time or press the opposite AT BAT gt key This display appears briefly The current status of the At Bat indicator is shown by the location of the on the main LCD screen Runs The function of the RUNS 1 gt key is determined by the Score By Inning setting If Score By Inning is disabled only the team total is incremented If Score By Inning is enabled both the team total and the total inning scores are incremented TEAN RUNS 1 When the Score By Inning setting is disabled nn Press the appropriate RUNS 1 gt key to current setting increment the total number of runs for the home or guest team The LCD shows which key was pressed and the new value for the corresponding team RUNS HORE 7 When the Score By Inning setting is enabled INNING NN XX NN current inning XX inning score Press the appropriate RUNS 1 gt key to increment the number of runs by inning and the game total for the home or guest team The game total is the sum of all inn
85. Penalty timers question will be displayed A YES response will adjust all penalty timers to the correct time based on the time entered for the main clock A lt NO gt response will not change the penalty timers Score Shots on Goal and Saves The home and guest SCORE 1 1 gt SHOTS ON GOAL 1 1 gt and lt SAVES 1 1 gt keys are all used to increment and decrement their respective totals Score is used as an example LCD Display TEAM nnn NNN current setting Action Press the appropriate key to increment or decrement the total for the home or guest team For example SCORE 1 1 gt Enter the correct number on the number pad and press ENTER The LCD shows which key was pressed and the new value for the team score of the corresponding team 136 Hockey Options 9 3 Clear Penalties Press CLEAR ALL PENALTIES to delete all of the penalties for the home or guest team LCD Display HORE PLUR PEN YES to clear the penalties for all players in the roster CLEAR ALL Press to decline the selection and return to the game Delete Penalty Press DELETE PENALTY to delete a single penalty for the home or guest team LCD Display Action HONE DEL PEN Use the up and down arrow keys to scroll to the 2 PNN PN NN NN correct penalty and press ENTER current setting Press CLEAR to decline the selection and retu
86. Press lt YES gt to automatically increment the inning AUTO INCREMENT INNING Ini Press to disable this function N current setting Score by Inning Some scoreboards display both the total score and the score by inning Note If the Score By Inning setting is not enabled the Display Innings and Inning Sequence settings are not displayed LCD Display SCORE INNING by inning Y N N current setting Press NO if the scoreboard only displays the total score Inning Sequence Note The Inning Sequence setting is not displayed if the Score By Innin enabled Press YES if the scoreboard displays the score g setting is not Use Inning Sequence when the number of innings played exceeds the number of innings that can be displayed on the scoreboard Baseball Operations Select SHIFT when real time data RTD is used to display the inning numbers SHIFT moves all of the inning numbers and scores left one digit The innings and scores automatically shift when lt INNING 1 gt is incremented and the inning number exceeds the number of displayed innings For example Inning 12345678910 becomes 234567891011 Score 0010200000 010200000 _ Select BLANK when the inning numbers are in a fixed position using decals BLANK starts a new set of inning numbers For example Inning 12345678910 becomes 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Score 0010200000 INNING SEQUENCE Pres
87. Press the down arrow key to scroll to the next selection HORE TEGR NAME The TEAM NAME LL 2441 insert must be inserted to enter the Team Name Message RRRRRRRRRRRRR Center settings The TNMC is updated after each selection is completed Use the COLUMNS ROWS and STROKE keys to select the WIDTH HEIGHT and FONT of the TNMC The defaults are 48 columns 8 rows and single stroke Enter up to fifteen 15 characters for the team name and press ENTER Reinsert the BASEBALL LL 2438 insert to continue The TEAM NAME LL 2441 insert must be 9 ADAR inserted to enter the Team Name Message Center ARAAARAAAR TNMC settings The TNMC is updated after each selection is completed Use the COLUMNS ROWS and STROKE keys to select the WIDTH HEIGHT and FONT of the TNMC The defaults are 48 columns 8 rows and single stroke Enter up to ten 10 characters for the team abbreviation and press lt ENTER gt Reinsert the BASEBALL LL 2438 insert to continue 54 Baseball Operations PITCHER NUMBER AONE Y current setting CLEAR PITCHES 57712 Display Menu Enter the jersey number of the new pitcher and press ENTER Press the down arrow key to scroll to the next selection This function clears pitch count statistics and should only be used before the start of a game or when a new pitcher enters the game Press YES to clear the in game status fouls an
88. Q COMMON FINISH LINE FOOTBALL SCOREBOARD XNA1 M 0995 TIV81003PO VH WVYOVIC 83518 WALSAS MOVuU L PICAL INTERFACE EQUIPMENT NEEDED SIGNAL CONVERTER 1065 0173 STANDS J BOX 1065 0027 CABLE W 12356 CABLE W 1267 LYNX SCBD OUTPUT SETTINGS SCRIPT ALLSPORT LSS BAUD 12 800 DATA BITS 8 PARITY EVEN STOP BITS 2 RUNNING TIME NORMAL RESULTS ON PAGE SIZE 1 LOOK HERE TO ALL SPORT 5010 DETERMINE THE MODEL NUMBER AND POWER SPECIFICATIONS 8 0 1196 0001 ALL SPDRT 5010 SERIAL NO 1001 le0 VDLTS MFG DATE 01 01 00 3 10 v 5 WATTS es J Ur J8 P41 120V s POWER SHOT CLOCK SWITCH MAN OUTPUT STANTISTOPIREBET ALL SPORT 5012 0A 1196 0068 ALL SPORT 5012 1001 12 VOLTS DC 01 01 00 lev 5 WATTS 12V DC POWER IN AND CURRENT LOOP SIGNAL OUT P41 ALL SPORT 5020 0A 1196 0005 ALL SPDRT 5080 1001 230 VOLTS AC 01 01 00 0v 5 WATTS OK LJ on
89. Rest Time SET ROUND TIME and SET REST TIME have similar functions and are described by the table below In the LCD Display window SET ROUND TIME is used as an example Both buttons will have similar operation procedures but one sets the round time and the other sets the rest time LCD Display ROUND TIRE SET ROUND TIME and SET REST TIME sets s the value for the time indicated in the button title NNNN Enter the value from the keypad and press current value lt gt Press lt CLEAR gt twice to cancel the change and resume match Round Number LCD Display POUND EDIT ROUND NUMBER sets the value for the current NN round Enter the value from the keypad and press lt gt current value Press CLEAR twice to cancel the selection and resume match Boxing Operations 271 Maximum Round Number LCD Display ROUND EDIT MAX ROUND NUMBER sets the value for the NN maximum number of rounds in the match Enter the value from keypad and press lt gt Y current value Press CLEAR twice to cancel the selection and resume match Round Number 1 LCD Display SOUND ROUND NUMBER 1 gt increment the round NN number by one NN new value 19 2 Menu The lt gt key allows the user to select from a list of options specific for each sport The up and down arrow keys allow the use
90. SELECT PINS U EASL C P O P ov 1150 0097 CL INPUT OR 1150 0101 FIBER COLUMN SELECT WORKS FOR EITHER 12 8K OPTIC INPUT RELAY DRIVER 1 OR 19 2K PROTOCOL J10 J2 J3 pum THE NUMBER IN PARENTHESIS 15 THE ADDRESS OF THE DATA RECEIVED FROM THE A S 5000 SERIES CONSOLE THE NUMBER BEFORE THE PARENTHESIS IS THE PHYSICAL ADDRESS SET BY THE JUMPERS ON THE J19 ADDRESS PINS DRIVER DEFAULT IS COLUMN 1 LED INDICATES THE DRIVER HAS POWER 000000060 RED LED WILL BE ON OR BLINKING WHEN THE CARD 15 RECEIVING SIGNAL REDRIVE CIRCUIT 15 PROCESSOR REFRESHED REFER TO DWG 128429 FOR FURTHER INFORMATION ON THE CURRENT LOOP REDRIVE CIRCUIT SPECIFICATIONS DAKTRONICS INC BROOKINGS SD 57
91. The captions will be added to basketball hockey volleyball wrestling and football arena e Changed player rosters to not allow duplicate numbers to be entered e Changed individual substitution and mass substitution to allow add of player number to roster if not found e Changed the LCD in basketball to display the shot time e Added team fouls 1 function in basketball Removed no AC power warning message at power up e Added flashing of player number in basketball and volleyball Version 1 0 6 Release Date 17 March 2000 e Added segment timer program e Added lacrosse code e Changed menu in each sport to include display menu subroutine Version 1 1 0 Release Date 2 May 2000 e Added pitch and speed code 5500 for Jugs and Stalker guns e Added tennis code 220 for standard tennis board e Added a scoreboard blank feature to the display menu e Added blank capability to the remainder of scoreboard digits in the TOD menu for outdoor applications Introduction The time out timer is blanked and the RTD sent when the timer is stopped Formatted the specific RTD item numbers as hh mm ss Add PLR F PTS captions team name message center TNMC for the BB 3000 series scoreboard Made the captions 1 and 2 control work on the sports of basketball hockey volleyball wrestling and football on column 3 of address 220 Added auto increment to period when the period time set is used and the clock value was at 0 00 Add
92. The possible settings for the switch output are as follows 0 DISABLED SWITCH D DISRBLEDP N current setting SWITCH 02 N current setting 2 CLOCK STOP SWITCH e LLULA 5 N current setting 3 MAIN HORN SWITCH J MAN HORNE N current setting Default Settings The switch remains open at all times and any external devices are disabled In count down mode the switch closes when the main clock reaches zero and remains closed until a nonzero value is entered In count up mode the switch closes when the main clock reaches the proper period break or overtime length and opens when any other value is entered The switch closes when the main clock is stopped and opens when the main clock is running External devices are disabled when the main clock is running The switch closes when the main horn sounds This could be when Auto Horn is enabled and the main clock reaches zero or when HORN is pressed Write the settings for this installation in the space Custom provided setting peut custom custom customs em Break Lenghh tm comer kesas comen ammeow Ja Oo Fummeou 159 mmaTmeou o ox Swin ouput 164 Soccer Options Section 11 Tennis Operation
93. WON 1 gt to increment the a matches won for the current team NN YN current matches won Games Won LCD Display GANES WON Press GAMES WON 1 gt to increment the TOP N number of games won in the current set for the respective player Point The POINT key increments the point value for the respective player If Tie Break scoring mode is selected the points will increment by 1 Otherwise the points will increment as 15 30 40 AD or GM The current point values will be shown on the LCD Advantage The advantage key sets an advantage score for the chosen player The score digits for this player will display AD The opposite player score will display dashes Note The ADVANTAGE key is disabled when Tie Break scoring mode is selected Deuce The lt DEUCE gt key sets both scores to 40 Note The lt DEUCE gt key is disabled when Tie Break scoring mode is selected Tie Break The TIE BREAK Key sets the mode of scoring to Tie Break mode In Tie Break scoring mode points for each player are incremented by one when the POINTS Key is pressed Note 1 Tie Break scoring mode may only be selected when both player point values are 0 Note 2 To change scoring mode back to normal use the reset game score key please refer to the table on the following page 166 Tennis Operations Reset Match LCD Display TOP NN SOT NN Press ENTER to reset the current match All set RESET
94. When enabled the injury times are displayed in the main clock digits and the corresponding home or guest match score digits flash The main clock must be stopped to use the injury timer Press START INJURY TIME to start the injury timer for the home or guest competitor The injury timer counts down from the maximum allowed time until lt STOP INJURY TIME is pressed 0 00 is reached The injury time is shown on the LCD display with H for home or G for guest Press the STOP INJURY TIME key to stop the injury timer and return the period time to the main clock digits A key press is required before the main clock digits return to period time This gives the coach time to see how much injury time remains Press YES to clear all of the data for the last match or the match in progress and begin a new individual match Press NO to resume the match in progress using the current data and exit the Menu If weight classes are selected it will ask for the winner Use the arrow keys to select HOME or GUEST and press lt ENTER gt Enter the points for the win and press ENTER The console will advance to the next weight class and display Match digits 218 Wrestling Operations BLOOD N NN 80 Th NNNM gt G NN blood timer NN N advantage timer H guest or home The console will display the time of day elapsed time of match and points scored in the match This will dis
95. a switch that can be used to drive a number of different devices The switch can be configured to operate under different settings The default setting is 1 CLOCK 0 To display the switch setting that you want to select Press the number 0 1 2 3 key as a shortcut or use the left and right arrow keys to scroll to the desired setting Press YES to select the new setting Press NO the down arrow key to leave the switch setting and display the next prompt The possible settings for the switch output are as follows 0 DISABLED SWITCH LD DISRBLEDP Y current setting The switch remains open at all times and any external devices are disabled In count down mode the switch closes when the SWITCH DUTPUT PI main clock reaches zero and remains closed until a 010 nonzero value is entered N current setting In count up mode the switch closes when the main clock reaches the proper period break or overtime length and opens when any other value is entered 2 CLOCK STOP ENS f Sas The switch closes when the main clock is stoppe I IT IN SWITCH GUTPUTSN and opens when the main clock is running External STOPP devices are disabled when the main clock is running N current setting 3 MAIN HORN SWITCH DUTPUT N The switch closes when the main horn sounds This could be when the auto horn is enabled and the 3 hinl HORNA main clock reaches zero o
96. accept Edit the channel number to the desired value and press lt ENTER gt to accept Channel Setting 1 8 Channels that may be used with broadcast channel 1 The channel switch on the receiver must match this value and only the Broadcast 1 BCAST1 jumper must be installed Basic Operations 29 Multiple Controller w Multiple Broadcast Systems Channel Setting Typically all multiple controller systems will use Broadcast Group 1 Channel 1 for the first controller in Broadcast Group 1 and Broadcast Group 2 Channel 1 for the first controller in Broadcast Group 2 All other consoles in each group are added sequentially using channels 2 4 RADIO SETTINGS The LCD shows the current radio settings along BCASTY CHAN with a prompt to accept or modify these values L EAA The LCD will toggle If the radio settings are correct press lt ENTER gt these screens If these values are incorrect press CLEAR NT F ENTER 10 ACCEPT If CLEAR is pressed to modify the radio settings CLEAR the LCD at the left is shown allowing edit of the channel or broadcast group setting Edit the broadcast setting Use the number keys to BLAST GROUP 1 enter the desired broadcast group and press 5900 CHAN Gi ENTER to accept The asterisk will move to the channel setting Use the number keys to edit this value and press ENTER to accept Edit the channel number to the desired value and press lt ENTER gt to acce
97. and return to the game Note The configured time of shot clock is set using the EDIT SETTINGS function when a new code is selected Recall Shot Time LCD Display SHOT CLOCK NODE Press lt RECALL SHOT TIME to recall the shot time that was remaining before the last shot clock RECALL Y N 4 reset was pressed To accept the recall press YES To decline the recall press NO Time Out On Off TIME OUT ON OFF stops and starts the time out clock The length of both the full and partial time outs can also be changed when the time out clock is stopped Note 1 Only the time outs configured in the EDIT SETTINGS function are displayed on the LCD and available for selection please refer to the table on the following page Note 2 The up and down arrow keys can also be used to select the full and partial time outs Basketball Operations 79 LCD Display TIAE GUTS SELECT Press TIME OUT gt to display the configured time for full time out length FULL _ 18 55 3 10 55 minutes seconds To accept the full time out length press lt YES gt To decline the selection of the full time out length press NO To change the full time out length enter the new length in minutes and seconds on the number pad and press lt ENTER gt Press lt CLEAR gt twice to clear changes and return to the game TIRE OUT SELECT Press TIME OUT gt a second time to PARTIAL ff 5S display the configur
98. and stops when the selected length is reached LCD Display When the main clock is set to count down and tenths TT of a second is selected the main clock displays in ce SEL NUP N tenths of a second remaining when the time is below N current setting one minute Press lt YES gt to set the main clock to display tenths of a second Press NO to display whole seconds FIGIN Enter the correct amount of time per period in minutes 7m and seconds on the number pad and press PERIOD 0055 aou 11 55 current setting For example 20 00 per period Note Pressing ENTER to select the period time as the main clock setting will increment the current period number if the clock value was previously zero Continued on next page 306 Water Polo Operations Continued from previous page LCD Display MAIN CEOCHA TIPIE BREAK _ 17 55 fif 55 current setting CEOCH TIPIE OVERTIME 11 55 fif 55 current setting Shot Clock LCD Display Action Set the amount of time between periods Enter the correct amount of time for break length in minutes and seconds on the number pad and press ENTER For example 1 00 Set the amount of time for the overtime periods Enter the correct amount of time for overtime periods in minutes and seconds on the number pad and press lt ENTER gt For example 5 00 SHOT
99. as shown the following actions may be selected LCD Display LAST DOUN Press lt RECALL LAST DOWN to redisplay the Ball On Down To Go and Possession values of the RECALL Y N previous play If Auto Calculate is off this function is disabled Press YES to use the previous values Press to use the values that were just entered 108 Football Options Quarter 1 LCD Display QUARTER 7 Press lt QUARTER 1 gt to increment the quarter number The full time outs are automatically reset at halftime n N current setting DLUBRTER 5UBP gt When the quarter number increments to 2 or 4 the 5 PLAY DIRECTION can be changed n NN current setting Press YES to change PLAY DIRECTION Press to leave PLAY DIRECTION the same Yards To Go The BALL ON is used to manually enter the field position yard line of the ball LCD Display 7060 EDIT Enter the number of yards to go for a first down NN and press lt gt NN current setting Press CLEAR twice to clear changes and return to the game Down 1 LCD Display DDUN Press DOWN 1 gt to manually increment the down number n N current setting A prompt showing down number displays briefly Football Options 109 Ball On The BALL ON key is used to manually enter the field position yard line of the ball If Auto Calculate is on SIDE OF FIELD must be selected first
100. counting down the horn will sound for one second 0 55 current setting when the warning time is reached Enter a zero for the time to disable the warning horn Enter the time in minutes and seconds on the number pad and press ENTER TIME DurTS nBBE Enter the number of partial time outs on the number PARTIAL N pad and press lt ENTER gt N current setting TIME DUTS TIRE Enter the amount of time for a partial time out in minutes and seconds on the number pad and press PARTIAL 17 55 lt ENTER gt 17 56 current setting For example 00 20 Continued on next page 126 Football Options Continued from previous page LCD Display TIME Press YES to display the time out time on the LCD SHOU ON N and the main clock digits of the scoreboard while the SA SLUT BRA time out clock is active current setting Press to display the time out time on the LCD only Center of Field Yard Line LCD Display CENTER FIELO SET Enter the value of the correct center field yard line on the number pad and press ENTER YARDS NN FQ Y current setting Note This value is used with the Auto Calculate function to calculate Ball On and To Go values the center of the field is crossed Auto Calculate LCD Display BBaLL BN hODE Press YES to enable the Auto Ball On To Go ES calculation The number of yards to go and the AUTO CALCULATE correct down are automati
101. days and time that have elapsed since the event occurred Note If the console is set to stop at zero the clock will not begin counting up until the lt 5 gt key is pressed LCD Display 1845 Enter the number of days for countdown 0 999 nnn NNN current value 15 3 Time Base Counter LCD Display VALUE NNNNNNN s current value is shown on the top line of the E LCD The time remaining until the next increment NXT INC 55 or decrement is shown on the bottom line nnnnnnn current value Value Days Press lt VALUE DAYSs to begin counting from the AINA nnnnnnn current value entered initial value The value can be up to eight digits 234 Event Counter Increment Value LCD Display INCREMENT VALUE This key is used to set the increment value The increment value will be added to the total value each time interval nnnn current value Decrement Value LCD Display DECRERENT VBLUE This key is used to set the decrement value The NNNN decrement value will be subtracted from the total Ing value each time interval if the increment value is nnn current value 0 Time Interval When START is pressed to start the main clock the controller counts down the time interval to 00 00 00 and adjust the initial value by the increment or decrement value The interval time is reset and the cycle will repeat LCD Display
102. display The frame number is 19 for Home and 20 for Guest 5 3 Menu The MENU key allows the user to select from a list of options specific for each sport The up and down arrow keys allow the user to scroll through the menu list Pressing a key other than YES the arrow keys and other allowed keys exits the Menu function New Game LCD Display RENU FIRIN Press lt YESs to clear all of the program data for the last game played or the game in progress and begin NEW GANEP NEW GAME running the selected sport Press lt NO gt to resume the game in progress using the current data and exit the Menu Press the down arrow key to scroll to the next selection Pitch and Speed 67 New Code LCD Display RENU PRIN Press lt YES gt to begin selection of a new code from the ENTER CODE prompt NEU CODE Press to resume the game in progress using the current data and exit the Menu Press the down arrow key to scroll to the next selection Dimming Menu The Dimming Menu allows the user to change the brightness of the scoreboard LCD Display ARENU Press lt 0 gt through or use arrow keys lt gt to select the intensity for the digits on the LEVEL 0 9 NN scoreboard NN current level NONE bright 90 Press lt NO gt to resume the game in progress using the current data and exit the Menu Press the down arrow key lt gt to
103. eio ir hee to de te e f rete e spe d re en 265 Edit Settings Same p RE ap a E eibi 267 Day s te etii e ORO 267 be 268 Clock e ae bete ose robert ar oen fee P Pes 268 Time estere oe ete i e EHE PR UR Ptr EX tte 268 Ippon Time 268 Medical Time otiose eu RAN LERRA TERRE er qe ERN 269 Switch 269 Default Settings cda eue ree E a hU d 270 19 1 19 2 19 3 Section 20 20 1 20 2 20 3 Boxing RE 271 Set Round Time Set Rest 271 Round Number eo ita e e E esas 271 Maximum ee i reme Poen Mh ipud 272 Round Number RE adobe 272 ie GS Tq e ime n bd 272 New inantea i Be 272 NEW COdE 273 Ee eee nes 273 Home Roster Guest Roster 274 Display Menit E r te epi io tt eet epe tiet 275 seo t eae 276 Strikeout Keys 279 Seas n Strikeouts ee hetero nti 279 e ge tee eris ere exe inb eue 279 Strikeouts ET T IRR ERAN 280 Display Control Keys eredi R
104. for FB 2007 to soccer football and baseball Fixed speed pitch so the stalker sport gun will work Added a team name caption for PERIOD HALF to soccer codes for Atlanta Fixed problem with team name edit in tennis for the second name Made baseball auto increment of innings update the period text as well Made the outs 1 key clear ball strike batter and average when it switches sides Version 2 1 9 Release Date 09 August 2006 Fixed a problem with some consoles that will not run test code 0000 in production 2 Added address 24 and 25 to code 6604 and 7604 3 Added possession indicators full col to address 16 in football codes Version 2 2 0 Release Date 08 January 2007 Changed code 9101 to make the dash on full and partial timeouts to always be on Also added team abbrev to the code address 222 Added a code 9111 for Georgia Dome Added a QUARTER caption for football in code 6601 to match the HALF caption in soccer Added a countdown timer code 370 that has an output with days and time with tenths of sec 18 Introduction e Added captions for baseball codes 5601 and 5602 to match the captions in football and soccer on address 226 e Added a separate warning time for the partial time outs in basketball e Fixed the advantage time in wrestling to update the home and guest advantage areas after an edit Also fixed the adv time when it was edited to blank or zero so it would count right it was counting almost 2 sec before it
105. gt to edit the current team score value Quick Reference 339 Sport 5000 Volleyball Note Refer to Section 13 Volleyball Operation for more detailed operating instructions Start Up Turnthe Power Switch ON the Resume Game Y N prompt Press ENTER YES gt to resume the game where last shut off or Press lt Clear NO gt to enter a new sport code number Team Score lt SCORE 1 gt and lt SCORE 1 gt increment and decrement the team score Games Won GAMES WON 1 increments the number of games won for the respective team Serve lt 5 gt turns the serve indicators on or off for the respective team Game and Match Number e lt 1 gt increments the game number The current game number is shown in the bottom right corner of the LCD Game scores will be reset to zero for the start of the next game Press lt EDIT gt lt GAME 1 gt to recover the previous game scores MATCH NUMBER 1 gt increments match number Aces Blocks Kills Digs lt 5 1 gt lt BLOCKS 1 gt lt KILLS 1 gt and lt DIGS 1 gt increment their respective team totals e console may ask for a player number depending on setting of Team Stats Update Player in Edit Settings Team statistics will be displayed based on the setting of User Defined settings for scoreboards displaying two of the stats Time Out first press of lt TIME OUT displays the number of f
106. keys are pressed LCD Display 57875 RECEIVED The key disabled message will display for one second and then the EXIT STATS message will DISABLED display and wait for a YES or NO key If the YES key is pressed then stats data will be saved EXIT STATS in the console and the console will lt EXIT STATS gt mode until another stats packet is received This will allow the operator to enter player stats from the console if the DSTI feed is lost LCD Display When the home or guest PLAYER key is pressed this prompt asks the jersey number of the player to be edited Y current setting Enter the jersey number on the number pad and press ENTER HORE PLAYER NN If the player is not in the roster this prompt asks if the player should be added FOUND 8002 in 00 current settings Press YES to add the player to the roster Press NO to decline the entry of the player number HORE PLAYER NN This message displays when the answer to the POSTER FULI previous prompt is YES and the roster is full LL NN current setting Continued on next page 194 Volleyball Operations Continued from previous page LCD Display HOME PLAYER NN S N A NN K NN NN player number 545 in game 5 0 out of game number of aces number of kills 8 NN number of blocks D NN number of digs HOME PLASER NN DELETE PLAYER Action If the playe
107. length press To change the partial time out length enter the new length in minutes and seconds on the number pad and press ENTER Press lt gt twice to clear changes and return to the game Press ENABLE PENALTY CLOCKS to allow the penalty clocks to count when the main clock is on Disable Penalty Clocks Press DISABLE PENALTY CLOCKS to disable the penalty clocks from counting when the main clock is on Minor Major Penalty The MINOR PENALTY and MAJOR PENALTY are used to enter the penalty time when PLAYER PENALTY is selected Refer to Subsection Player Penalty 132 Hockey Options Period 1 LCD Display PERIDD 4 Press PERIOD 1 gt to increment the period number n N current setting A prompt showing period number displays briefly Penalty LCD Display HORE PENBLTS Press the home or guest PENALTY key to turn on DN the penalty indicator for that team 1 HORE PENALTY To turn off the penalty indicator press the same PENALTY key a second time OFF Time Out The home and guest lt TIME OUT gt keys are used to decrement the number of time outs remaining and start the time out clock The scoreboard indicator is turned on when the type of time out is selected full or partial The scoreboard indicator is turned off when the time out clock expires or is stopped Note 1 Only the types full or partial of time outs that were configure
108. occurred LCD Display Action OVERS Press the appropriate lt 5 1 gt key to NN decrement the total number of overs for the game current setting The LCD shows which key was pressed and the new value for the game 286 Cricket Operations Inning 1 Inning 2 LCD Display CHANGE INNINGA Press the appropriate lt INNING 1 gt or lt INNING 2 gt key to select an inning for the home or guest team to score and display on the scoreboard ARE 500 SURE S N Y lt ENTER gt key N CLEAR key The console will ask if you are sure you want to change innings Press lt ENTER gt if you want to change the inning or CLEAR if you do not 21 2 Edit Runs 1 2 3 1 LCD Display TEAN RUNS EDIT Press lt EDIT gt and any of the RUNS keys for the home 7 zs or guest team to display the current team runs setting AUNE NNN Y current setting Enter the correct number of runs on the number pad and press lt ENTER gt Extras 1 1 EXTRBS EDIT Press lt EDIT gt and one of the EXTRAS keys for the T home or guest team to display the current extras 7 HORE Sig current setting Enter the correct number of extras on the number pad and press lt ENTER gt Cricket Operations 287 Wickets 1 1 LCD Display UICKETS EDIT NN Y current setting Overs 1 1 LCD Display OVERS EDIT NN current setting 21 3 Menu Press lt EDIT gt
109. pA 30 NOV 99 DATE DESCRIPTION pw NONE 1 1 9 6 RO 4A E 1 2 4 6 9 17 JAN 02 SCOREBOARD J BOX 25 J BOX SIGNAL CORD OA 1067 0056 SCOREBOARD W 1247 20 1086 0052 75 SEE SCOREBOARD MANUAL FOR POWER REQUIREMENTS 46 120V FOR THE SCOREBOARD ALL SPORT 5000 SERIES CONSOLE ALL SPORT CONSOLE LOCATION OUTPUTS TO SCOREBOARD 25 J BOX ou1 PUT SIGNAL 1 4 PHONE JACK J BOX PIN TYPE 1091 0227 OUTDOOR 14 SCOREBOARD 1009 0009 INDOOR 15 OUTPUT 16 SCOREBOARD OR 17 OUTPUT BANANA PHONE J BOX 18 SCOREBOARD 1064 0128 OUTDOOR 19 OUTPUT INCLUDES TIMER START CONNECTION FROM OMNISPORT OR POWER TIME 2 WIRE CONNECTION BETWEEN J BOXES BRINGS TIMER DATA FROM TIMER TO ALLSPORT CONSOLE TIMER LOCATION SCOREBOARD J BOX TIMER J BOX PIN WIRE COLOR 9 RED USE THIS SETUP IF THE OMNI SPORT 10 BLACK AND ALL SPORT CONSOLE ARE TO BE AT SEPARATE LOCATIONS USE THIS SETUP IF THE TIMER PORT 1000 AND ALL SPORT CONSOLE IS B
110. penalty character position medical exam positions When competitor status is displayed it will show from left to right the one digit score waza ari yuko koka one character for penalties K C S and two possible medical exam indicators This information is repeated for the other competitor The data will be display on the LCD according to the code entered into the All Sport 5000 console Blue White Code 281 or White Blue Code 284 Judo Operations 257 18 2 Judo Keys White and Blue Osaekomi LCD Display TE 400 WHITE DSREKOnI Set Osaekomi LCD Display WHITE BSRERUPI NNN NN NN current setting lt WHITE OSAEKOMI gt and lt BLUE OSAEKOMI gt start the Osaekomi timer The timer displays on the corresponding opponents side of the scoreboard The Osaekomi timer counts up to the time configured as Ippon time and sounds the horn unless the selected opponent s Wazaari is non zero If the latter condition is true the Osaekomi Timer stops at the configured Wazaari time and sounds the horn lt SET WHITE OSAEKOMI gt and lt SET BLUE OSAEKOMI gt sets the Osaekomi time for either competitor in seconds Notes This key is disabled while the Osaekomi Timer is running The Osaekomi time displays on the bottom line of the LCD 258 Judo Operations Sono Mama LCD Display 4 00 5090 7979 Yoshi LCD Display TE 400 YOSHI Toketa LCD Display TR
111. pressing the EDIT key press one of the increment or decrement keys for the desired field on the scoreboard Then simply enter the value you wish to display and press ENTER to accept Menu The MENU key allows the user to select from a list of options specific for each sport The up and down arrow keys allow the user to scroll through the menu list The left and right arrow keys allow the user to enter and exit submenu lists for a specific menu item Pressing a key other than YES the arrow keys or other allowed keys exists the Menu function 32 Basic Operations Set Main Clock CLOCK SET After the main clock has been stopped press SET MAIN CLOCK to display the current time of the main clock CURR 11 55 1 fif 55 1 minutes seconds tenths of a second To change the time enter the desired time on the number pad and press ENTER Press lt CLEAR gt twice to clear changes and return to the game AAN CLOCK EDIT Press SET MAIN gt a second time or the down arrow key to display the configured time for the main clock period length PERIOD Fifi 55 17 55 minutes seconds To accept the displayed period length press YES To decline the selection of the period length press To change the period length and set the main clock enter the new time in minutes and seconds on the number pad and press ENTER Note Pressing ENTER to s
112. statistic key to display the current setting For example lt SCORE 1 1 gt Enter the correct number on the number pad and press lt ENTER gt Press lt EDIT gt lt PERIOD 1 gt to display the current period setting Enter the correct quarter number on the number pad and press ENTER The full time outs are reset 138 Hockey Options Time Out On Off LCD Display TIME DUTS EDIT Press EDIT TIME OUT gt to display the Yn current time setting for full time outs 1 55 1 55 minutes seconds Enter the correct time on the number pad and press ENTER TIRE OUT EDIT Press TIME OUT gt a second time or the down arrow key to display the configured time for 101 PARTIAL partial time out length 11 55 minutes seconds Enter the correct time on the number pad and press ENTER 9 4 Menu The MENU key allows the user to select from a list of options specific for each sport The up and down arrow keys allow the user to scroll through the menu list Pressing a key other than YES the arrow keys and other allowed keys exits the Menu function The Menu function should be used at the beginning of each new game to edit the Home and Guest Rosters New Game LCD Display RENLU PRIN Press YES to clear all of the program data for the last game played or the game in progress and begin NEW GANEP GAME running the selected sport
113. team advantage time Press the STOP ADVANTAGE gt to stop the advantage timer Edit Key Function Press EDIT followed by any of the following keys to edit the respective value lt SCORE 1 gt TEAM SCORE 1 gt MATCH SCORE 1 gt MATCH SCORE 1 gt MATCH NUMBER gt lt PERIOD 1 gt TIME TIME OUT gt Pressing EDIT and START INJURY gt STOP INJURY TIME lt 5 BLOOD TIME or STOP BLOOD TIME while the time out clock is stopped will edit the current value of the respective timer Quick Reference 343
114. the down CLOCK EDIT arrow key to display the configured time for pre game length PRE 5 17 55 minutes seconds To accept the pre game length press lt YES gt To decline the selection of the pre game length press lt NO gt To change the overtime length and set the main clock enter the new time in minutes and seconds on the number pad and press lt ENTER gt Press lt CLEAR gt twice to clear changes and return to the game Press SET MAIN CLOCK a sixth time or the PAN CLOCK EDIT down arrow key to display the configured time for post game length POST 17 55 17 55 minutes seconds To accept the post game length press lt YES gt To decline the selection of the post game length press lt NO gt To change the overtime length and set the main clock enter the new time in minutes and seconds on the number pad and press lt ENTER gt Press lt CLEAR gt twice to clear changes and return to the game Basic Operations 35 2 7 Count Up Down AAN After the main clock has been stopped the direction of the clock can be set UP e DOWn UP BOUN current direction Press lt 1 gt or 2 to select UP or DOWN default Notes The current direction of the main clock is shown on the top line of the LCD The COUNT UP DOWN function is disabled while the clock is running Auto Horn AUTO HBRN DN Press 1 or 2 to select ON default o
115. the down arrow key to scroll to the next selection 264 Judo Operations New Code LCD Display RENU PBIN Press lt YES gt to begin selection of a new code from the ENTER CODE prompt NEU CODE promp Press NO to resume the game in progress using the current data and exit the Menu Press the down arrow key to scroll to the next selection Display Menu The DISPLAY MENU allows the user to start and edit the segment timer or to change the brightness of the scoreboard LCD Display fENU FIGIN ENTER Press lt YES gt to select the Display submenu and show the first prompt on the LCD ISPLAY DE Press the down arrow key to scroll to the next selection Continued on next page Judo Operations 265 Continued from previous page LCD Display Action RENU DISPLRS RUN Note The segment timer function is disabled while the clock is running SEG Y N Press lt YES gt to exit the sport code and run the segment timer program Press or the down arrow key to scroll to the next selection EXIT GARE This prompt confirms that the user wants to exit BRE YOU SURE S N the sport code and enter the segment timer The SEGMENT TIMER LL 2475 insert must be inserted to enter the Segment Timer settings Refer to Section 3 for more information on the segment timer Press lt YES gt to exit the sport code and run the segment timer program Press o
116. the selected player from the roster Player Substitution INDIV SUB substitutes a player currently out of the game for a player who is in the game e MASS SUB substitutes five players who are currently out of the game for all of the in game players Edit Key Function e Press lt EDIT gt followed by any of the following keys to edit their respective values lt RUNS 1 gt lt INNING 1 gt lt OUTS 1 gt lt HITS 1 gt lt ERRORS 1 gt LEFT ON 5 1 gt lt PITCH COUNT STRIKES 1 gt lt PITCH COUNT BALLS 1 gt lt FOUL BALLS 1 gt lt INPLAY 1 gt 332 Quick Reference Sport 5000 Football Note Refer to Section 8 Football Operation for more detailed operating instructions Start Up Turnthe Power Switch ON the Resume Game Y N prompt Press ENTER 5 gt to resume the game where last shut off or Press lt Clear NO gt to enter a new sport code number Team Score lt SCORE 1 gt lt SCORE 2 gt lt SCORE 3 gt lt SCORE 6 gt and lt SCORE 1 gt increment and decrement the team score Quarter lt QUARTER 1 gt increments the quarter number Ball On BALL ON edits the current Ball On location If the setting of Ball On Auto Calculate in Edit Settings is yes the console will calculate Down and Yards To Go values from the Ball On value When BALL gt is pressed the console will prompt for side of field and then display the Down and Yards T
117. to Section 2 6 Standard Keys for more detailed operating instructions Start Stop Clock lt START gt and STOP control the function of the main clock The green LED on the START button is illuminated when the clock is running Horn HORN sounds the main horn The horn sounds for as long as the horn key is pressed AUTO HORN sets the horn to automatically sound when a period end is reached The yellow LED on the HORN is illuminated when the auto horn setting is ON Clock Direction COUNT UP DOWN sets the direction of the main clock The clock direction is shown in the upper right corner of the LCD e This key is disabled while the clock is running Set Main Clock first press of the SET MAIN CLOCK edits the current main clock value Press the SET MAIN gt repetitively to edit the configured period break and overtime length Press ENTER at any of the displayed clock values to load that value into the main clock e This key is disabled while the clock is running Edit Key lt EDIT gt is used to edit sport values Press EDIT followed by the desired score or other data to be edited Refer to the specific sport documentation for the edit key function Quick Reference 327 Sport 5000 Segment Timer Note Refer to Section 3 Segment Timer Operation for more detailed operating instructions First and Last Segment FIRST SEGMENT and LAST SEGMENT se
118. used with the SET MAIN CLOCK key Note 2 The period break and overtime lengths are used differently depending on the direction of the main clock For count down the main clock is set to the selected length decrements towards zero and stops at zero For count up the main clock is set to zero increments towards the selected length and stops when the selected length is reached LCD Display ELGEE nDBE When the main clock is set to count down and tenths T of a second is selected the main clock displays in TENTH SECONG N a tenths of a second remaining when the time is below N current setting one minute Press YES to set the main clock to display tenths of a second Press to display whole seconds AAN CLOCK TIME Enter the correct amount of time per period in minutes and seconds the number pad and press ENTER PERIOD 1 55 2 11 55 current setting For example 60 00 per game Set the amount of time for the breaks between games BREAK 11 55 fif 55 current setting Enter the correct amount of time for breaks in minutes and seconds on the number pad and press lt ENTER gt For example 3 00 206 Volleyball Operations Time Outs Note 1 If a full or partial time out is not needed for the HOME or GUEST TIME OUT keys enter zero for the number of time outs Note 2 If a full or partial time out is not needed for TIME OUT ON OFF
119. 00 series console has a relay that can be used to drive a number of different devices The relay can be configured to operate under different settings The default setting is 1 CLOCK 0 To display the relay settings that you want to select Press the number 0 1 2 3 key as a shortcut or use the left and right arrow keys to scroll to the desired setting Press lt YES gt to select the new setting 254 Tae Kwon Do Operations Press or the down arrow key to leave the relay setting and display the next prompt The possible settings for relay output are as follows 0 DISABLED SWITCH BUTPUT N D DISRBLEDP N current setting SWITCH at N current setting 2 CLOCK STOP SWITCH GUTPUTHN STOPP N current setting 3 MAIN HORN SWITCH BUTPUT h AMAIN HORNE N current setting Default Settings The relay remains open at all times and any external devices are disabled In count down mode the relay closes when the main clock reaches zero and remains closed until a nonzero value is entered In count up mode the relay closes when the main clock reaches the proper period break or overtime length and opens when any other value is entered The relay closes when the main clock is stopped and opens when the main clock is running External devices are disabled when the main clock is running The relay closes when the main horn sounds This could be when Auto
120. 00010111 24 00011000 25100011001 08 05 1 2 3 4 5 553400 vWIO3G 553400 01 pate 28 APR 99 11100001 11111100010 11111100011 11111100100 11100101 1111110101110 1111110101111 11111101000 11111101001 1111110110110 1111101011 11111101100 1111110111101 11111101110 11111101111 111111 0 000 111110010 111110011 11110100 11110101 11110110 11110111 11111000 1111111001 11111010 1111111011 11111100 1111111101 11111110 1111111111111 Ne 1111110001 le 0 le 0 DOOS N e 251 252 225 226 227 228 229 234 235 236 237 238 239 240 241 242 243 244 245 253 254 255 230 231 Q 232 lt 233 246 247 Q 248 lt 249 lt 250 BOTTOM VIEW 1150 RO4A 115079 BROOKINGS SD 57006 DRAWN BY VANBEMMEL 129 THROUGH 255 WIRE IS CONNECTED 2 1100000 1 11000010 11000011 11000100 11000101 11000110 11000111 11001000 11001001 11001010 11001011 11001100 11001101 11001110 11001111 11010000 S Zoo vo mw
121. 006 PROJ RELAY DRIVER SPECIFICATIONS 2 OCT 00 UPDATED NOTES SECTION DES BY EB DRAWN BY BRAVEK 08 NOV 99 DATE DESCRIPTION rx T T NONE 1 1 S RO 4A 7 1 2 5 9 1 KEY WIRE NOT CONNECTED 1 WIRE IS CONNECTED TO ANY GROUND PIN 4 7 10 J4 ADDRESS AND NAME SWAP SELECT JACK OG 6 5 9 OO ADDRESS PL WIRE SIDE SIGNAL IN SIGNAL IN NAME SELECT BOTH HOME amp GUEST HOME GUEST ONLY 1 221 SEE NOTE BELOW 2 222 3 223 4 224 5 225 6 226 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 PIN 11 PIN 11 DECIMAL ADDRESS WIRING DIAGRAM ADDRESS PLUG WITH ALL WIRES CONNECTED 2 2 2 2 2 _ PINS 22 gt PINS o0 2 200 2 200 2 20 PING 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 PIN 5 5 a Nlo afa wro PIN 9 PIN 8 PIN 6 PIN 5 12 TEAM NAME SWAP PINS 10 1 0 1176 0011 1 1 2 amp 2 1 2 OUTDOOR TEAM NAME MESSAGE CENTER SHIFT NOTES WITH NO ADDRESS PINS SELECTED THE TNMC SHIFT CARD WILL DEFAULT TO A S 4000 PROTOCOL NAME SWAP PIN WORKS FOR EITHER A S 4000 OR A S
122. 015 J BOX WIRING RING BLACK WIRE amp MAIN SHOT CLOCK SCBD SIGNAL RED WIRE CLOCK SCBD SIGNAL DAKTRONICS SLEEVE SCHEMATIC MAIN 1 4 PHONE JACK I BLACK WIR MAIN BLACK WIRE WHITE WIRE AUXILIARY BING BLACK WIRE SCOREBOARD YH i a WHITE WIRE a AUXILIARY SHOT CLOCK SCBD SIGNAL SLEEVE AUXILIARY SHOT CLOCK SCBD SIGNAL SCHEMATIC AUXILIARY 1 4 PHONE JACK CHANGED 0 1166 4 TO 0A 1196 31 17 JAN 02 DAKTRONICS INC BROOKINGS SD 57006 ADDED A S 3000 ALL SPORT 5000 BLOCK DIAGRAM A S 3000 OR 5000 BB VB amp WR 2 ADDED SHOT CLOCK REMOTE START 29 99 5 TO A S 5000 CONTROLLER DES BIS DRAWN By E BRAVEK 15 99 REVISION APPR DATE DESCRIPTION 03 SCALE NONE 1 1 9 6 RO 4A 1 2 5 4 1 5 26 00 NOlLdl32S3Q 2 z m x m lt A z m gt o U o o N I z gt so O 2 z o 1 8 66 230 SI 900 6 QS S9NDIOO38 STRIP 1 4 OF INSULATION OFF OF EACH WIRE INSERT WIRE IN THE CORRECT POSTION USING A SMALL FLAT HEAD SCREW DRIVER TIGHTEN THE TERMINAL BLOCK
123. 101101 11001101110 101 9 10201100110 111 11201110000 11501110001 114 01110010 11501110011 11601110100 11701110101 10701101011 9 11801110110 12501111101 12601111110 12701111111 128 106 011 10 1010 108 z 122 01 1 1 1 0 10 124 0 1 1 1 1 1 0 0 120 01111000 gt 91 1 812011111011 1001111 104 01101000 lt 105 1 119 1 lt 121 BOTTOM VIEW 1150 RO4A 115078 BROOKINGS SD 57006 DRAWN BY VANBEMMEL 1 THROUGH 128 WIRE 15 CONNECTED 01000111 qo t 01010001 qo to 1 N e N e N e DAKTRONICS INC 65 00000 1 6601000010 67101000011 6801000100 6901000101 0 70 011000110 72 75 0100 1001 80 01010000 96101100000 74 011001010 75 101001011 76 0 1001100 77101001101 78 101001110 79101001111 82101010010 85101010011 84 01010100 85101010101 8601010110 87101010111 88101011000 90101011010 92101011100 95101011101 94 010111110 95101011111 71 81 lt 89 01011001 a lt a DES BY REVISION ADDRESS TABLE a m O z z o O O
124. 11010001 110100110 11010011 11010100 11010101 11010110 11010111 11011000 11011001 11011010 11011100 11011101 11011110 11011111 11100000 1 N e DAKTRONICS INC 195 194 195 196 197 201 202 205 205 206 207 208 209 210 211 212 215 221 222 223 224 198 199 Q 200 204 214 215 Q 216 lt 217 lt 218 220 DES BY AVB REVISION ADDRESS TABLE a m O Lu z z o O z x 10100010 10100011 10100 100 10100101 10101000 10101001 10110000 N e 10110010 10110011 10110100 1101111011011 10110110 10110111 10111000 110111111001 11011111110 11 0 10111100 110111101 111000000 Ne 10111110 10111111 10110001 o qo to 10100111 10101010 10101011 110101100 10101101 110101110 10101111 ele 10100001 0 N e 1 WIRING DIAGRAM ADDRESS PLUG WITH ALL WIRES 6 162 165 164 165 CONNECTED 175 174 175 176 177 178 179 180 181 189 190 191 192 KEY 1 166 amp 167 Q 168 lt 169 170 171 172 182 amp 183 Q 184 lt 185 lt 186 lt 155 100 11011 5187 1 0 1 1 1 0 1 1 3219 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 1 188 DESCRIPTION
125. 136 Score Shots on Goal and Saves ccccccsscsccccccecsssssecececeesessaececececeessaeseeececsessaeeeeeeeesenenaees 136 Clear All Penal tes RE EE ERE Cete E 137 Delete Penalty nie ani tp P Pete eie p Pete deed tp REG 137 Edit M M SDN ULLA eiie MEC 137 Time Outs seek teet tester RE es RE eh ee e 137 Score Shots on Groal Saves ai I Gece 138 1 eR 138 Time Out On Off terc Ro ete nri 139 139 ING We Grate etek 139 New COE anten d E a 140 Home Roster Guest Roster 140 Display tee RE e b e REP e e Rope 141 Edit Settings ed et ete eh decore 143 ate nee uet ele oie iba eoo dites 143 re crit aeree e EE E PEE P HE 144 Main Clock 144 Table of Contents pe a RH Eo ES 145 Tir e Outside RIPE Ue ERE aee 146 Select Captions ente Rh Or ERG Et here t 147 Switch O tput anie eh Ue er xe d hum De pe dads ee Ee d pr he aeg 147 Detault Settings eaten ee apnea tp 148 Section 11 Soccer T 150 Tim
126. 2 for more information on the Segment Timer Press YES to exit the sport code and run the segment timer program Press or the down arrow key to scroll to the next selection RENU DINING Press 0 through 9 or use the arrow keys lt gt lt gt gt to select the intensity for the digits on LEVEL 10 97 NN the scoreboard NN current level Press to resume the game in progress using the current data and exit the Menu Press the down arrow key lt gt to scroll to the next selection Note Dim levels pertain to outdoor LED products Indoor LED and incandescent products only support one level of dimming at 5096 252 Tae Kwon Do Operations Edit Settings LCD Display EDIT SETTINGS Time of Day LCD Display lFiENU PIRIN SELECT GF DAS 110 2 24 HOUR GF DAS TOD 55 55 current setting GF DAS GAME _ 2 700 current setting Press YES or the right or left arrow key to select the Settings submenu and show the first prompt on the LCD Press to resume the game in progress using the current data and exit the Menu Press the down arrow key to scroll to the next selection Press lt YES gt or the right arrow key to select the Time of Day submenu and show the first prompt on the LCD Press to resume the game in progress using the current data and
127. 2000 Fixed the clock 0 indicator period end so it will update when count up down 15 changed Made the shot clock not blank when the clock is set to count up e The time of day TOD clock only works with 60Hz made so it will work with 50Hz power also This includes having it count this in the tenths hundredths field so the TOD will be in sync with the driver time e The timeout ON OFF key does not allow for a cold key exit once it is in edit of the time e Increase the refresh rate of the drivers When set to TOD display the TOD was not being sent out on RTD Modified the soccer and baseball settings function to check if it is called while in the game or before the game for certain settings that change what is displayed on the scoreboards e Add code 0000 to do keyboard test and LCD test Introduction Add indication of console running from battery backup Add message at console power up to indicate that AC power was not connected Add message to LCD and sound beeper when AC power lost Make shot play clock horn turn off with reset operation Make TOD in 24 hour format so it does not shift to mm ss when hrs are zero Make the set TOD packet so it will still send when the same TOD is set in Version 1 0 2 Release Date 12 January 2000 Added output tables for BB 2031 PLF and BB 2031 FPL these tables were added to codes 1101 and 1102 and replaced the BB 3000 output on address 13 Version 1 0 3 Release Date 21 Janu
128. 27 Continued from previous page LCD Display GF DAS GAME _ 2 700 current setting BF DAS BLANA GAME DATAS 14 4 Settings Action Press lt 1 gt or lt 2 gt to display the game clock default or the time of day clock on the scoreboard Press the down arrow key to exit the Menu and return to the game If 2 tod is selected this message will be displayed Press ENTER to blank all game data the scoreboard except for the Time of Day digits The user can edit the following settings when EDIT SETTINGS has been selected from the Main Menu Main Clock Note 1 The settings entered for Main Clock are used with the SET MAIN CLOCK key Note 2 The period break and overtime lengths are used differently depending on the direction of the main clock For count down the main clock is set to the selected length decrements towards zero and stops at zero For count up the main clock is set to zero increments towards the selected length and stops when the selected length is reached LCD Display MAN CLOCK TIME PERIOD l i 55 17 56 current setting Enter the correct amount of time per period in minutes and seconds on the number pad and press ENTER For example 3 00 per period Note Pressing ENTER to select the period time as the main clock setting will increment the current period number if the clock value was previously zero 228
129. 3040 13 23 24 25 26 1103 2103 3103 4103 6103 Model 43050 13 23 24 25 26 1103 2103 3103 4103 6103 Model 43510 Model 3520 Model 3530 TBD HA TBD VERNIS GENE MEET Mmm pape Model 4510 Model 4520 Model 4530 320 Sports Code Numbers Notes 1 code 1101 is Player Foul and code 1102 is Foul Player 2 code 2101 is Game Number amp Match Number and code 2111 is Game Number only 3 code 3101 is Match Number and code 3102 is Advantage Time 4 Game Clock only C 2 Outdoor Model Numbers Address Baseball Football Track Lacrosse 61 Columnsi 8 5501 61 Columns 1 8 5501 _____ 618 61 18 5501 61 Columns 1 8 55001 J BA718 62 18 5501 BA 08 t12 cot 1518 __ dsa 1524 __ BA 2001 676869 5801 BA 2002 6769 51 BA 2004 6769 501 2005 6769 501 BA 2006 11646566 ______ 5500 8 55015 BA 2007 11 646566 5500855015 BA 2008 11 67 6869 5500855015 BA 2009 11 6768 69 5500855015 5501 E 2011 11 67 68 69 5500855015 5501 b i 2013 64656641 __ 5500855013 BA 2014 676869 5501 J 2017 fer dsa 2018 64 65 661 55 2019 6769 5 BA 2022 6
130. 36 20 T W 1237 50 FT W 1238 50 FT W 1340 10 FT SHOT CLOCK CONTROL 1196 0031 MAIN CLOCK START STOP HORN SWITCH 1166 0003 SCOREBOARD SCOREBOARD SHOT CLOCK 1196 0015 e 120V AC 58 7 SHOT CLOCK SIGNAL CABLES W 1381 100 FT SIGNAL CORD eec 1236 20 FT W 1237 50 FT 1258 50 FT W 1340 10 FT SHOT CLOCK CONTROL 1196 0051 PORTABLE SHOT CLOCK MAIN CLOCK 17 JAN 02 06 SEP 01 ADDED BOTTOM OPTIONAL STATS PANEL TO MAIN BOARD AND ADDED SIGNAL CABLES TO AND FROM OPTIONAL STATS PANELS 14 DEC 00 ADDED 120VAC TO SIDE BOARDS OF ALL SPORT 5000 ud SERIES CONSOLE CHANGED 0 1166 0004 TO 0A 1196 0031 START STOP HORN SWITCH 1166 0005 DAKTRONICS INC BROOKINGS SD 57006 prov ALL SPORT 5000 SCOREBOARD BLOCK DIAGRAMS A S5000 BB VB WR 3 29 DEC 99 ADDED SHOT CLOCK REMOTE START STOP TO TOP A S5000 CONTROLLER DATE DESCRIPTION DES BY REVISION DRAWN BY E BRAVEK DATE 29 99 SEDE NONE 1196 RO4A 124688 SCOREBOARD J BOXES PROVIDED BY DAKTRONICS 1 4 P
131. 470 5501 2515 31 61 2618 31 61 2715 31 62 2718 31 62 55001 3718 646 6 101 3724 64656 s551 pem O FB824 Ja eeo 760 4601 7601 4601 7601 4601 7601 8601 4601 7601 8601 4601 7601 8601 4601 Sports Code Numbers 321 Model Address Baseball Football Soccer Track Lacrosse FB 1630 15 16 5601 5602 6601 7601 4601 7601 4601 7601 86015 4601 7601 86015 4601 7601 86015 4601 7601 8601 4601 7601 4601 7601 86015 4601 7601 4601 2005 Ja o o 661 761 4601 7601 86015 4601 7601 86015 4601 7601 86015 4601 7601 8601 4601 7601 86015 4601 5601 5602 7601 8601 4601 2350 __ 1215 6601 761 4601 TBD TBD TBD __ TBD TBD TBD TBD TBD TBD __ TBD TBD TBD __ TBD TBD TBD TBD TBD FB2180 2122235 Jen TBD __ TBD __ TBD TBD TBD TBD TBD TBD __ TBD TBD TBD TBD TBD TBD TBD TBD TBD TBD __ TBD Lo poc twn fj TBD TBD TBD TBD TBD TBD TBD TBD TBD TBD TBD TBD TBD TBD TBD TBD TBD __ TBD TBD __ TBD TBD TBD TBD TBD ee 322 Sports Code Numbers Model
132. 5 PIN 3 PIN 2 POWER GREEN J17 CHARGE RED FUNCTION VBB LOW RED J19 L SIG P OPERATE AMBER FUNCTION L SIG N D L OUT P R L OUT N SW P 52 12CONS P os DCONS N 5 OWER SW N Di 85 SIC P 85 SIG N D PRO PRI z e e gt gt gt gt gt gt Qo DO qUCOURP J18 FUNCTION SW P SROW P SW N COL N CTION INTBATT P EXTBATT N FUNCTION TEST NOTE BAUD RATE WITH NO ADDRESS OR PROTOCOL PINS SELECTED THE DRIVER WILL DEFAULT TO A S 4000 PROTOCOL INVERT RS 485 WITH ADDRESS PINS ONLY THE DRIVER WILL DEFAULT CURRENT LOOP TO A S 5000 PROTOCOL
133. 5000 PROTOCOL THE NUMBER IN PARENTHESIS IS THE ADDRESS OF THE DATA RECEIVED FROM THE A S 5000 SERIES CONSOLE THE NUMBER BEFORE THE PARENTHESIS IS THE PHYSICAL ADDRESS SET BY THE JUMPERS ON THE J4 ADDRESS PINS e CARD RECEIVES POWER FROM THE MODULE THAT IT IS PLUGGED INTO 1150 0132 1 amp 3 4 INDOOR INCANDESCENT AND LED TEAM NAME MESSAGE GREEN LED INDICATES THAT THE CARD HAS POWER CENTER SHIFT CARD RED LED WILL BE ON OR BLINKING WHEN THE CARD IS RECEIVING SIGNAL 0 1176 0011 OUTDOOR TEAM NAME CARD SHIFTS FROM LEFT TO RIGHT HOME SIDE TO GUEST SIDE NAME SWAP PIN CHANGES CARD FROM DEFAULTING TO HOME TO DEFAULTING TO GUEST SIDE DATA 0 1150 0132 INDOOR TEAM NAME CARD SHIFTS FROM RIGHT TO LEFT GUEST SIDE TO HOME SIDE NAME SWAP PIN CHANGES CARD FROM DEFAULTING TO GUEST TO DEFAULTING TO HOME SIDE DATA DAKTRONICS INC BROOKINGS SD 57006 PROJ A S 5000 CAPABLE TNMC SHIFT CARD S
134. 92 Volleyball Operations Continued from previous page LCD Display Action HOME PLASER NN FOUND current setting HOME PLASER NN ROSTER FULL current setting HOME PLASER NN ACES current setting Serve LCD Display HOME SERVE aN HOME SERVE OFF In Game Out of Game If the player is not in the roster this prompt asks if the player should be added Press lt YES gt to add the player to the roster and credit the play to that player Press to decline the entry of the player number This message displays when the answer to the previous prompt is YES and the roster is full The players number and number of points display if the player was found in the game or correctly added to the roster Press the home or guest SERVE key to turn on the possession indicator for that team To turn off the possession indicator press the same lt SERVE gt key a second time or press the opposite SERVE key The IN GAME and OUT OF GAME keys are only functional when the Home or Guest PLAYER key has been pressed Delete Player The DELETE PLAYER key is only functional when the Home or Guest PLAYER key has been pressed Volleyball Operations 193 Player Note If player stats are being received from DSTI the keys PLAYER IND SUB and MASS SUB will be disabled The LCD will display the messages shown below when these
135. AS Press lt YES gt or the right arrow key to select the Time of Day submenu and show the first prompt on the LCD Press lt NO gt to resume the game in progress using the current data and exit the Menu Press lt 1 gt or lt 2 gt to display the time of day in 12 hour default or 24 hour format Press lt ENTER gt or the down arrow key to scroll to the next selection Enter the time of day in hours minutes and seconds using the selected format on the number pad and press lt ENTER gt Press lt ENTER gt or the down arrow key to scroll to the next selection Press lt 1 gt or lt 2 gt to display the game clock default or the time of day clock on the scoreboard Press the down arrow key to exit the Menu and return to the game If 2 tod is selected this message will be displayed Press ENTER to blank all game data on the scoreboard except for the Time of Day digits Water Polo Operations 305 22 4 Settings The user can edit the following settings when EDIT SETTINGS has been selected from the Main Menu Main Clock Note 1 The settings entered for Main Clock are used with the SET MAIN CLOCK key Note 2 The period break and overtime lengths are used differently depending on the direction of the main clock For count down the main clock is set to the selected length decrements towards zero and stops at zero For count up the main clock is set to zero increments towards the selected length
136. Appendix B which can be used until a replacement can be ordered Use the labels provided in Appendix B to attach the correct code number label to the sport insert in the appropriate location Write the code number in the space provided below Write the correct code number here If you do not know the code number to enter for your scoreboard refer to Appendix B in this manual If you do not know the model number of your scoreboard refer to the Installation and Maintenance manual provided with the scoreboard 41 Baseball Keys Inning 1 Note If game stats are being received from DSTI the keys on the console will be disabled The LCD will display the messages shown below when these keys are pressed STATS RECEIVED The key disabled message will display for one second KES DISABLED and then the lt EXIT STATS gt message will display and wait for a lt YES gt or lt NO gt key If the lt YES gt key is pressed the stats data will be saved in the console and EXIT STATS MODE the console will EXIT STATS mode until another stats packet is received This will allow the operator to enter player stats from the console if the DSTI feed is lost Baseball Operations 47 INNING 1 Press lt INNING 1 gt to increment the current inning N number 1 current setting The LCD shows the new value Out 1 The current out number is displayed on the main LCD screen Press OUT 1 gt to increme
137. Appendix B to attach the correct code number label to the sport insert in the appropriate location Write the code number in the space provided below Write the correct code number here If you do not know the code number to enter for your scoreboard refer to Appendix B in this manual If you do not know the model number of your scoreboard refer to the Installation and Maintenance manual provided with the scoreboard 8 1 Football Keys Time Out On Off TIME OUT gt stops and starts the time out clock The length of both the full and partial time outs can also be changed when the time out clock is stopped Note 1 Only the time outs configured in the EDIT SETTINGS function are displayed on the LCD and available for selection please refer to the table on the following page Note 2 The up and down arrow keys can also be used to select the full and partial time outs Football Options 105 LCD Display DUT SELECT Press TIME OUT gt to display the configured time for full time out length FULL 10 55 18 55 minutes seconds To accept the full time out length press YES To decline the selection of the full time out length press To change the full time out length enter the new length in minutes and seconds on the number pad and press lt ENTER gt Press CLEAR twice to clear changes and return to the game TIRE OUT SELECT Press TIME OUT ON
138. BASE 1 IN PLAY 1 LEFT ON BASE 1 IN PLAY 1 STRIKE COUNT 1 BATTER INNING 1 AVERAGE NOlLdl32OS3Q 2 3 voOSCI vEO3 961i M3AVH8 3 28 0000 YYW MOVYL 1435 0008 1304 TIV 90046 QS SONIMOONS TRACK CODE 8601 MANUAL TIMING 8602 OMEGA TIMERS 8603 OMNISPORT TIMERS 8604 HAWKEYE FINISH LYNX RUNNING TIME RTD PLACE CODE LABEL HERE ENTER THIS CODE NUMBER GUEST 2 GUEST 2 SCORE EVENT GUEST 1 GUEST 1 SCORE 7 GUEST 3 GUEST 3 SCORE HEAT e v 00 vl 00 92 834 61 NOlLdl32S3Q t094 3002 1144 3009 a3aaav SNOLLOS 51004 2 z 3 66 230 60 1 M3990S IM3SNI 3105 02 531435 0005 14045 90046 QS S9NDIOO38 5 LL 2440 REV 03 SOCCER CODE TYPE 7701 STANDARD SCORE SCORE TIMEOUT 7711 SERIES 2000 50 7611 SERIES 2000 FB 7601 SOC FB 7501 SOC gt BA 7604 TOD SHOTS CORNER ON GOAL KICKS 1 1 SAVES SAVES PENALTY Hy 4 KICKS 1 PLACE CODE LABEL HERE ENTER THIS CODE NUMBER V TIME OUT ON OFF CORNER KICKS
139. CE EQUIPMENT NEEDED Qn 1 SIGNAL CONVERTER 0 1065 0173 STANDS LYNX SCBD OUTPUT SETTINGS 1 1009 0058 SCRIPT ALLSPORT LSS 1 CABLE WES BAUD 12 800 1 CABLE W 1267 DATA BITS 8 STOP BITS 2 RUNNING TIME NORMAL RESULTS ON PAGE SIZE 1 L NOlldO WVYOVIC W3lSAS oss ONI 2661 LHOINAdOD 90045 QS SONDIOON8 01315 NI 1 HSINIJ SGLG6 V80d SC11 16 8 10 ava v0 86 92 10 NOlLdINDS30 SYSEWNN LYWd Q3SIA34 SONILIAS LAdLNO 0805 1 0006 SV ovr 0 935 GI MOHS OL 33183ANOO TWNOIS Q39NVH9 1065 0026 2V1 55 _ gt 1 4 ASe 2600 E OR 5009 PRESS BOX SIGNAL CONVERTER 0A 1065 0173 TK PINS AERA 1 amp 2 13 P SEE SCOREBOARD SPECIFICATIONS OA 1065 0027 W 1256 STANDS LYNX COMPUTER NOT BY DAKTRONICS 120 VAC POWER 15 AMP BREAKER 2 3 2 E WddV 1 6 46 86 20 ava M 0825 11 61004 3 41 SS3Hd NI 1 HSINIJ cj 0130 43514 WILSAS 90045 QS SONDIOON8 SDINOMDIVQ SOINOMDXIVO 266 1HOIMAdOO
140. D 5 The switch remains open at all times and any external devices are disabled B DISRBLEDP N current setting Lore d de th hel hen th n count down mode the switch closes when the IITDIIT SWITCH main clock reaches zero and remains closed until a nonzero value is entered N current setting In count up mode the switch closes when the main clock reaches the proper period break or overtime length and opens when any other value is entered Continued on next page Track Operations 187 Continued from previous page Setting 2 CLOCK STOP SWITCH BUTPUT N e CLULA STOPP N current setting 3 MAIN HORN SWITCH GUTPUTHN J MAN HORNE N current setting Default Settings Write the settings for this installation in the space Custom provided Gem cusam custom Guest 2 3 Score or Event Heat Event Heat Switch Output 1 Clock 0 The switch closes when the main clock is stopped and opens when the main clock is running External devices are disabled when the main clock is running The switch closes when the main horn sounds This could be when Auto Horn is enabled and the main clock reaches zero or when lt HORNs is pressed Custom 3 188 Track Operations Section 13 Volleyball Operations Sport Insert LL 2434 The Sport Insert drawing is located at the end of this section The Team Name
141. D shows which key was pressed and the new value for the team score of the corresponding team If the program is configured to update the player points this prompt displays asking for a player number Enter the jersey number of the player who scored the points and press ENTER If the player is not in the roster this prompt asks if the player should be added Press YES to add the player to the roster and credit the points to that player Press to decline the entry of the player number This message displays when the answer to the previous prompt is YES and the roster is full The player s number and number of points display if the player was found in the game or correctly added to the roster 82 Basketball Operations Team Fouls 1 LCD Display TEAM FOULS 1 NN current setting FOULS 1 AONE PLAYER current setting HOME PLASER NN FOUND NN current setting HOME PLASER NN ROSTER FULL current setting HOME PLASER NN FOULS n NN N current setting Press the home or guest TEAM FOULS 1 gt key to increment the number of team fouls for the corresponding team The number of team fouls stop incrementing at the number of fouls configured for the 1 on 1 or 2 shot bonus If the program is configured to update the player fouls this prompt displays asking for a player number Enter the jersey number of the player who
142. DESCRIPTION 5 E 121 1 1 9 E x 1 5 63 1 NOlLdl32OS3Q 2 2 2 3 c Yn gt gt I A a m 2 9 m 2 o 2 rm GOPS Ik 9 94 LO 61 0 SONOMd MHVdSP 20 834 LC 2 2 gt v o 2 o gt A o D o 2 o z 900 6 QS S NIXOOYG 0G 163409 R1 STRIKEOUT COUNT CODE 5099 CLEAR DISPLAY SEASON STRIKE OUTS e RUN PROMO 1 RUN PROMO 11 RUN PROMO 2 RUN PROMO 12 STRIKE STRIKE OUTS OUTS 1 1 DISPLAY STRIKE OUTS LO LONdV80 NOlLdl32S3Q NVASIV8 1 001 lM3SNI JO 100AVI Q39NVHO NOISIA33 7 6791 04 0001 YHVdSf I3MOIMO 1M3SNI SOINOMLYVG 90046 QS S9NDIOO38 e gt a eo e CRICKET ome 5599 HOME BATSMAN INNING BATSMAN LEFT 2 RIGHT RUNS 6 RUNS EXTRAS EXTRAS 4 1 1 GUEST WICKETS f BATSMAN INNING BATSMAN LEFT 1 P RIGHT e e WICKETS RUNS 1 6 RUNS EXTRAS EXTRAS 4 1 1 cc E a zB c 00 67841 90 TH
143. E 1 1 1 LL SLEEVE S BLACK WIRE i WHITE WIRE 1 1 L I L__SLEEVE o BLACK WIRE 1 WHITE WIRE L 1 1 WHITE WIRE 1 L 8 AUXILIARY JACK AUXILIARY JACK AUXILIARY JACK AUXILIARY JACK RING TIP i SHUNT O SLEEVE O RING TIP i SHUNT O SLEEVE RING TIP i SHUNT O SLEEVE RING TIP SHUNT SLEEVE O mm a um Mum mm ma um ma ma mm mm EM mm mm 900 6 QS S9NDIOO38 1 WHITE WIRE T BLACK WIRE WHITE WIRE T BLACK WIRE WHITE WIRE T BLACK WIRE WHITE WIRE T BLACK WIRE OO EbySOL VEOSS9OL 1 2 5 0 2 SCBD43 SCBD 3 SCBD
144. E 4 00 TOKETR lt SONO MAMAs stops the Osaekomi and main clock and disables the lt START gt key The values of Osaekomi and main clock are held until the YOSHI key is pressed to resume Note An S appears next to the Osaekomi time on the bottom line of the LCD to show the current Sono Mama state lt YOSHI gt restarts the Osaekomi and main clock if they were previously running and stopped by the key The clocks continue counting from the values on the scoreboard when the timers were stopped Note This key is disabled when a Sono Mama is not currently selected TOKETA stops the Osaekomi timer Osaekomi time starts from zero the next time the WHITE OSAEKOMI gt or BLUE OSAEKOMI keys are pressed Judo Operations 259 Clear LCD Display CLEAR clears the Osaekomi time from both 4 00 opponents sides of the scoreboard CLEAR Note This key is disabled if the Osaekomi timer is running or if the Osaekomi timer is currently on Win LCD Display WIN flashes the Winner indicator for the selected opponent Ippon LCD Display WHITE IPPON IPPON lights the Ippon indicator and flashes the Winner indicator for the selected opponent The opponents Winner and indicators are cleared Un 260 Judo Operations Medical Exam LCD Display BLUE MEDICAL 1 Un MEDICAL Keikoku LCD Display WHITE KEI
145. E CONCEPTS EXPRESSED AND DETAILS SHOWN ON THIS DRAWING ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY DO NOT REPRODUCE BY ANY MEANS INCLUDING ELECTRONICALLY WITHOUT THE EXPRESSED WRITTEN CONSENT OF DAKTRONICS INC COPYRIGHT 2002 DAKTRONICS INC DAKTRONICS INC BROOKINGS SD 57006 PROJ INSERT A S 5000 WATER POLO DESCRIPTION DES BY DRAWN BY CBRECZI DATE 13 NOV O2 REVISION APPR BY SCALE 1 1 1 1 96 1 784 59 Appendix C Sports Code Numbers Reference Drawings Address Table 1 through 1285 oec tote Address Table 129 through 256 Protocol Table 1 through 4 LED oes aii Ded us t EA A S 5000 Capable at cena FGPG teta EI 8 Column Driver Nee A S 5000 Current Loop Output 16 Golumn LED Driveri s aoc do patet Rb et ae luae Roa el Pha aie TE Digit W te ates ar Stone SE Spec LED Driver IV 16 QOL eed aucti ot oti beg e aso Notes 1 Allscoreboards are controlled by a 16 column LED incandescent or glow cube driver except where noted by the column numbers to configure for a 4 column LED or an 8 column incandescent driver 2 Use drawings A
146. E SET THE CONTROL CONSOLE TO BCAST 2 CHANNEL 00 EACH SCOREBOARD RADIO RECEIVER WILL NEED TO BE SETUP YOU CAN HAVE UP TO 4 CHANNELS IN EACH BCAST GROUP CHANNEL 1 THRU 4 REFER TO DRAWING 1110 RO1A 180514 OR 1110 180521 FOR CHANNEL SETTING NSTRUCTIONS 90046 QS SO9NDIOOM8 SOINOMDIVO 2002 1H9lMAdOO TO RUN EACH SCOREBOARD INDEPENDENTLY SET THE CONTROL CONSOLE TO THE APPROPRIATE BROADCAST GROUP BCAST 1 OR 2 AND THEN SET THE CHANNEL TO THE SCOREBOARD CHANNEL EX TO RUN SCOREBOARD 3 IN THE SETUP ILLUSTRATED ABOVE SET THE CONTROL CONSOLE TO BCAST 2 CHANNEL 01 ALL SCOREBOARDS IN ONE GROUP SET JS BCAST1 THEN SET THE HANNEL 4 OF EACH SCOREBOARD TO A DIFFERENT CHANNEL NUMBER FROM 1 THRU 4 THIS WILL BE BROADCAST GROUP 1 BCAST 1 N39 1SvOQVON8 FIdILINW NOLLO3I3S T3NNVHO ATIVOINONIO3T3 A8 LON OQ AMVL3RidOMd 9NIMVHO SIHL NO NMOHS 1130 Q3SS3HdX3 SId3ONOO JHL 90 6608lL VLOsS OLLI THIS IS A STEP BY STEP EXPLANATION USING GEOMETRY TO CALCULATE THE SPEED ADJUST VALUE IN THE MENU OF THE ALL SPORT PITCH AND SPEED PROGRAM CODE 5500 A CALCULATOR WITH ABILITY TO DO SIN COS TAN IS REQUIRED DO ALL CALCULATIONS TO XXXX VALUES SIEF t MEASURE IN FEET DISTANCE FROM PITCHER S MOUND STRAIGHT BACK PAST H
147. EAKING BALL NOISIARY LL 2482 R1 KNUCKLE BALL USER 1 USER 2 0334 0006 5 LYSSNI 90046 QS S9NDIOO38 00 MdV 680 1 04 961 1 NOlLdl32S3Q 2 5 21515 AVW d LO SA34 3 d3S 5318100 L NOM 5135 3002 3 00 52 0006 14085 11 LM3SNI 3105 02 531435 0005 14045 TIV 90046 QS SO9NDIOO38 2483 REV 01 TENNIS CODE TYPE 0220 STANDARD 0221 PRO LABEL HERE ENTER THIS CODE NUMBER Ns MATCHES GAMES WON SERVE WON 1 1 SETS WON 1 MATCHES GAMES WON SERVE WON 1 1 SETS DOUBLES SERVE DOUBLES SERVE POINT ADVANTAGE POINT ADVANTAGE TIMER RESET 1 TIMER RESET TIMER STOP TIMER START ENTER THIS CODE NUMBER PLACE CODE LABEL HERE CLOCK CONSOLE CODE TYPE 1000 BASKETBALL 6000 FOOTBALL 106961 90 J DAKTRONICS INC BROOKINGS SD 57006 ALL SPORT 5000 SERIES CONSOLE INSERT SMART CLOCK CODES 1000 6000 DES BY DRAWN BY EBRAVEK 25 AUG OO
148. ED standard software number When the self test completes a prompt displays ININININ PREM CODE the code number for the last game played This is RESUME DANES useful when power to the console is lost during a last code selected game Press YES to resume the last game stored in memory The console is now ready for game operation Press to start a new game or change to a different sport The console will prompt for a new code number as shown below The SELECT CODE prompt allows you to accept SELECT the last code selected displayed on the second CODE NNNN line or enter a new code NNNN last code selected To accept the code shown press ENTER To select a new sport code 1 the code number from the sport insert or the section of the manual for that sport 2 Use the number keys to enter the new four digit code Press ENTER Continued on next page Basic Operations 23 2 5 Continued from previous page If a new code is selected and the radio option is RADIO CHAN NN installed the console prompts for a channel ENTER OR CHANGE When Resume Game is used the last channel selected is used last radio channel used Press ENTER to accept the channel number or enter a new channel number Refer to Section 2 5 for more information Setting Radio Channels Reference Drawings Channel Selection Single Control Console Gen
149. ER HAS POWER RED LED WILL BE ON OR BLINKING WHEN THE DRIVER IS RECEIVING SIGNAL qgoo8gspsr REDRIVE CIRCUIT 15 PROCESSOR REFRESHED REFER TO DWG 128429 FOR FURTHER INFORMATION ON THE CURRENT LOOP REDRIVE CIRCUIT SPECIFICATIONS COLUMN COLUMN SELECT 0 SELECT 3 ALSO COLUMN SELECT 1 MAKES THESE CHANGES NO JUMPER CONNECT J19 INPUT DATA DIGIT 5 SEGMENT H CONNECTIONS 10 TO 11 amp 12 IS SENT TO DIGIT OUTPUT NO 1 SEGMENT H DATA INPUT NUMBER 516171 8 15 14 15 16 INPUT DATA DIGIT 9 SEGMENT H DIGIT OUTPUT CONNECTOR 1 2 3 4 1121314 IS SENT TO OUTPUT NO 2 SEGMENT poro DAKTRONICS INC BROOKINGS SD 57006 CHANGED TIME OF DAY ENABLE TO PROJ ESSE IND ONDE T me 4 COLUMN LED DRIVER ll SPECIFICATIONS REMOVED STAND ALONE FROM WORDING FOR DES BY EB DRAWN BY E BRAVEK 08 NOV 99 DATE DESCRIPTION jr NONE 1 1 5 RO 4A 1 2 5 7 8 5 KEY WIRE NOT CONNECTED 1 WIRE IS CONNECTED TO ANY GROUND PIN 1 4 7 10 J19 ADDRESS AND COLUMN SELECT JACK SWITCH S1 JACK J19 COLUMN SELECT OR COLUMN SELECT COLUMN 1 COLUMN 1 COLUMN 2 COLUMN2 COLUMN 3 COLUMN 3 COLUMN 4 COLUMN 4
150. Error Position setting total Team Hits and Errors are modified using the lt HITS 1 gt and lt ERRORS 1 gt keys See Team Hits Errors Left On Base below Team Hits Errors Left On Base lt HITS 1 gt lt ERRORS 1 gt LEFT ON BASE 1 gt increment their respective team totals Team Runs e lt RUNS 1 gt increments team runs Team Runs are scored by total or by inning depending on the Score by Inning setting Edit Key Function e Press lt EDIT gt followed by any of the following keys to edit their respective values lt RUNS 1 gt lt INNING 1 gt lt OUTS 1 gt lt HITS 1 gt lt ERRORS 1 gt LEFT ON BASE 1 gt PITCH COUNT STRIKES 1 gt PITCH COUNT BALLS 1 gt FOUL BALLS 1 gt lt INPLAY 1 gt 330 Quick Reference Sport 5000 Basketball Note Refer to Section 7 Basketball Operation for more detailed operating instructions Start Up Turnthe Power Switch ON Atthe Resume Game Y N prompt Press ENTER 5 gt to resume the game where last shut off or Press lt Clear NO gt to enter a new sport code number Team Score lt SCORE 1 gt lt SCORE 2 gt lt SCORE 3 gt lt SCORE 1 gt increment and decrement the team score The console may ask for a player number depending on the setting of Team Score Update Player in the Menu under Edit Settings Team Fouls TEAM FOULS 1 gt and TEAM FOULS 1 gt increment and decrement the total team fouls
151. H AN OVERALL SHIELD DAK PART W 1077 ONE CABLE FOR EACH SCOREBOARD TO RUN SCOREBOARDS TOGETHER PLUG ONE A S 3000 OR 5000 CONTROL CONSOLE INTO THE JACK LABELED MAIN DUAL 1 4 PHONE J BOX W SHUNT JACK 1196 0015 lt SIGNAL CORD W 1236 20 FT W 1237 50 FT 5 VE 38 H 120V AC OR J3 TO SCOREBOARD SYSTEM WITHOUT SHOT CLOCKS m 7 CLOCK START STOP HORN SWITCH ALL SPORT 3000 OR 5000 SERIES CONSOLE OA 1166 0003 TO RUN SCOREBOARDS SEPARATELY PLUG ONE A S 3000 OR 5000 CONTROL CONSOLE INTO THE JACK LABELED MAIN AND ANOTHER A S SEPARATE SCOREBOARD CONTROL 3000 OR 5000 CONTROL CONSOLE INTO THE JACK LABELED AUXILIARY 0 1196 0013 J BOX TYPICAL 0 1196 0015 J BOX WIRING RING BLACK WIRE MAIN SCBD SIGNAL B RED WIRE LHP x SCBD SIGNAL DAKTRONICS SLEEVE 6 SCHEMATIC MAIN 1 4 PHONE JACK MAIN BLACK WIRE I WHITE WIRE XILIARY AU RING BLACK WIRE AUXILIARY SCBD SIGNAL SCOREBOARD m WHITE WIRE w AUXILIARY SCBD SIGNAL lt SLEEVE 5 SCHEMATIC AUXILIARY 1 4 PHONE JACK DAKTR
152. H2109 7723 121 1 14011402 2401 24 _ 44014402 H2112 7 0 402 24012402 14401 44 H2114 74 14011402 24012402 14401 44 __ ___ tot age fe eee lee PERENNE eee DENEN 288801 30 2001 23242526 _ 11010102 2101 30 2002 232425262728 11011102 2101 st Jo 50 2003 58 5 5 48 E 2101 sion 30 2102 25242526 1101102 2100 st Jo 30 2103 232425262728 11011102 2101 8100 2101 soa Jaa d 50 2106 t5 29 st5 406 50 2107 __ 15 29 13068 468 pc uuu Je a ___ m2010 O T2014 a Woo Tac cx ANS 102 112 Sports Code Numbers 319 Address Basketball Volleyball Wrestling Hockey Football vs 2002 t ____ das 17 ______ 208 E pcm wr 2024 104 294 wr 2025 i 94 wn206 i _ _ wn207 wa 1 1 ____ 834 _ _ wn208 wa _ 94 wn209 wa 2 8304 wr 2101 ioe 0 _ _ wn2002 i wn2u8 i wn2000 wa 8304 Manos ma wn200 ma 2 804 i Model 43030 13 23 24 25 26 1103 2103 3103 4103 6103 Model 4
153. HONE JUMPER CABLE PROVIDED BY DAKTRONICS o 120 MAIN SCOREBOARD SINGLE 1 4 I RECOMMENDED SIGNAL CABLE 1 PAIR 22 AWG CABLE WITH AN OVERALL SHIELD DAK PART W 1077 SIGNAL CORDS PHONE 9 OA 1009 0058 EM 1256 20 W 1237 50 hos e 120V 1258 30 1540 10 SCOREBOARD SYSTEM W O GOAL LIGH TS ALL SPORT 3000 OR 5000 SERIES CONSOLE E MAIN CLOCK 0 1166 0003 START STOP HORN SWITCH 9 120V AC 120V AC MAIN SCOREBOARD GOAL JUDGE S COAL LICHT did 010 0064 Y CONSOLE 0 1010 0063 gt 120V AC eon 1 4 PHONE J BOX OA 1009 0058 25 PIN 0 1067 0056 SHOTS ON GOAL RECOMMENDED SIGNAL CABLE 1 PAIR 22 AWG CABLE WITH AN OVERALL SHIELD PART W 1077 ONE CABLE FOR EACH SCOREBOARD 9 120V AC SIGNAL CABLE 25M TO 25M 1247 20 FT OA 1086 0052 75 FT OUTPUT TABLE J BOX PUT SIGNA
154. IARY PHONE JACK deer PROJ SCHEMATIC DUAL 1 4 PHONE J BOX W SHUNT JACK bes BY BRAVEK DRAWN BY E BRAVEK pate 15 DEC 99 DESCRIPTION ia NONE 1 1 9 6 ROSA 7 1 253 1 6 SCOREBOARD J BOXES TYPICAL INSTALLATION SHOWN PROVIDED BY DAKTRONICS 1 4 PHONE JUMPER CABLE PROVIDED BY DAKTRONICS OSN 120V AC 120V AC AUXILIARY MAIN SCOREBOARD SCOREBOARD OPTIONAL CABLE ROUTING 1 OPTIONAL CABLE ROUTING 2 amp 2 1 120V AC 120V AC RECOMMENDED SIGNAL CABLE 1 PAIR 22 AWG CABLE WITH AN OVERALL SHIELD DAK PART 1077 ONE CABLE FOR EACH SCOREBOARD TO RUN SCOREBOARDS TOGETHER PLUG ONE A S 3000 OR 5000 CONTROL CONSOLE INTO THE JACK LABELED MAIN DUAL 1 4 PHONE J BOX W SHUNT JACK re i uu m d FT 1196 0013 J W 1237 50 FT W 1238 30 FT W 1340 10 FT 44 120V AC SHOT CLOCK CONTROL 1196 0031 SCOREBOARD SYSTEM WITH SHOT CLOCKS 2 omm C MAIN CLOCK START STOP HORN SWITCH 0 1166 0003 ALL SPORT 3000 OR 5000 SERIES CONSOLE ue 0 1196 0013 J TYPICAL 1196 0
155. IN CLOCK key Note 2 The period length is used differently depending on the direction of the main clock For count down the main clock is set to the selected length decrements towards zero and stops at zero For count up the main clock is set to zero increments towards the selected length and stops when the selected length is reached LCD Display CLOCK TIME Enter the correct amount of time per period in minutes and seconds on the number pad and press lt ENTER gt PERIOD 11 55 ux le 11 55 current setting For example 20 00 per period Switch Output The Sport 5000 series console has a switch that can be used to drive a number of different devices The switch can be configured to operate under different settings The default setting is 1 CLOCK 0 To display the switch settings that you want to select Press the number 0 1 2 3 key as a shortcut or use the left and right arrow keys to scroll to the desired setting Press YES to select the new setting Press or the down arrow to leave the switch setting and display the next prompt please refer to the table on the following page 174 Tennis Operations The possible settings for switch output are as follows 0 DISABLED SWITCH 0 0 588 2020 N current setting SWITCH 02 I current setting 2 CLOCK STOP SWITCH BUTPUT N e LLULA 5 N current setting 3 MAIN HORN SWITCH J MA
156. INTERVAL The time interval is the interval time between each increment or decrement 59 HH AN SS current value Note The clock must be stopped to set the time interval Event Counter 235 15 4 External Input Counter The External Input Counter counts the occurrences of switch inputs starting at the initial value Value Days LCD Display PALLE Press lt VALUE DAYS gt to begin counting from the entered initial value The value can be up to eight significant digits AINA NNNNNNNN current value Increment Value LCD Display INCREMENT VALUE 15 ig set the increment value The NINN increment value is added to the total value each time an external switch input 1 is detected J4 current value Decrement Value LCD Display DECRERENT VALUE This key is used to set the decrement value The NAN each time an external switch input 2 is detected NNNN current value 44 decrement value is subtracted from the total value 236 Event Counter 15 5 Menu The MENU key allows the user to select from a list of options specific for each sport The up and down arrow keys allow the user to scroll through the menu list Pressing a key other than YES the arrow keys and other allowed keys exit the Menu function New Game LCD Display NENU NAIN GANEP New Code LCD Display CODE Press YES to begin new gam
157. KA ON BLUE URZRRRI N new value There are two MEDICAL gt keys on the All Sport 5000 The first press of z MEDICAL gt turns on the indicator for the selected opponent and starts the medical timer The timer will display in the Osaekomi digits and the medical indicator will flash while the timer is running to indicate it is a medical time Pressing MEDICAL EXAM a second time will stop the timer if it is running If the timer is not running it will turn on the second indicator and start the timer Once both medical indicators are turned on pressing MEDICAL gt will not allow the medical timer to start The LCD screen will show Max Medical when the key is pressed Pressing the other cz MEDICAL gt key while the timer is running will switch the indicator and the timer to the corresponding side of the display and the timer will continue to run KEIKOKU lights the corresponding penalty indicator and increments the opposing players Wazaari by one Pressing lt KEIKOKU gt a second time clears the penalty indicator and decrements the opposing players Wazaari by one The LCD shows the current indicator status and the new Wazaari value for the opposing player Note Any other penalties Chui or Shido for the selected player are cleared when a Keikoku penalty is assessed Corresponding Yuko and Koka opponent values are decremented Judo Operations 261 Wazaari LCD Dis
158. LE PROJ 2 JUNE 00 LAYOUT 8 COLUMN DRIVER III REMOVED DIMMING HEADER AND TABLE pEs EB DRAWN BY EB pate 11 NOV 99 30 NOV 99 DATE DESCRIPTION m 1 5 RO 4A 7 1 2 5 9 4 1 F1 THRU F8 ARE TYPE 10 DAKTRONICS PART NUMBER F 1006 F17 THRU F18 ARE TYPE AGC 1 2 DAKTRONICS PART NUMBER 1000 29 SEP 00 RECOMMENDED MAXIMUM CABLE LENGTH WITH ONE RUN AS SHOWN 2000 2000 IN DRIVER OUT RECOMMENDED MAXIMUM CABLE LENGTH WITH COMBINATION OF TWO RUNS FROM EITHER THE ALL SPORT 5000 OUTPUT OR DRIVER REDRIVE CIRCUIT AS SHOWN 2000 TOTAL 2000 TOTAL or 2000 1000 IN DRIVER OUT IN DRIVER OUT IN DRIVER OUT 41 92 OR J3 a Be el RECOMMENDED MAXIMUM PARALLEL LOADS ON REDRIVE CIRCUIT OR ALL SPORT 5000 OUTPUT 5 PARALLEL LOADS PARALLEL LOADS PARALLEL LOADS FROM ANY DRIVER FROM A S OUTPUT REDRIVE CIRCUIT MAX CABLE LENGTH OF MAX CABLE LENGTH OF 2000 FROM THE A S 2000 FROM THE DRIVER OUTPUT TO LAST PARALLEL OUTPUT TO THE LAST DRIVER PARALLEL DRIVER RECOMMENDED MAXIMUM REDRIVES 10 REDRIVES FOR ANY DRIVER MAXIMUM
159. MER LL 2475 insert must be inserted to enter the Segment Timer settings Refer to Section 3 for more information on the Segment Timer Press YES to exit the sport code and run the segment timer program Press NO or the down arrow key to scroll to the next selection Press 0 through 9 or use the arrow keys lt gt lt gt gt to select the intensity for the digits on the scoreboard Press to resume the game in progress using the current data and exit the Menu Press the down arrow key lt gt to scroll to the next selection Note Dim levels pertain to outdoor LED products Indoor LED and incandescent products only support one level of dimming at 5096 142 Hockey Options Edit Settings LCD Display EDIT SETTINGS Time of Day LCD Display AENU AAIN SELECT TOD GF DAS ie 2 24 HOUR GF DAS TOD 65 55 current setting BF DAS GAME 0 current setting Press YES or the right or left arrow key to select the Settings submenu and show the first prompt on the LCD Refer to Section 9 5 Settings Press NO to resume the game in progress using the current data and exit the Menu Press the down arrow key to scroll to the next selection Press YES or the right arrow key to select the Time of Day submenu and show the first prompt on the LCD Press NO t
160. MER RESET 1 Resets the play clock or shot clock to the Reset 1 value Note This function may also be implemented with a remote start stop reset switch connected to J7 Timer Reset 2 TIMER RESET 2 Resets the play clock or shot clock to the Reset 2 value Note This function may also be implemented with a remote start stop reset switch connected to J7 Menu The MENU key allows the user to select from a list of options specific for each sport The up and down arrow keys allow the user to scroll through the menu list Pressing a key other than lt YES gt the arrow keys and other allowed keys exits the Menu function Refer to Section 7 for the Basketball Menu Key functions Refer to Section 8 for the Football Menu Key functions 74 Clock Console Operation 6 4 Settings Refer to Section 7 for Basketball Settings Refer to Section 8 for Football Settings Note Only settings that apply to the operation of the main clock or shot play clocks will affect the operation of the clock console Clock Console Operation 75 Section 7 Basketball Operations Sport Insert LL 2433 The Sport Insert drawing is located at the end of this section The Team Name insert and Block Diagram drawings are located in Appendix A The Quick Reference is located in Appendix D Reference Drawings Insert Basketball Drawing 120121 Block Diagrams A S5000 3000 amp WR 1
161. Menu Press the down arrow key to scroll to the next selection 204 Volleyball Operations Time of Day SELECT BF DAS ie 2 24 HOUR GF DAS TOD 55 55 current setting GF DAS GAME 0 current setting GF DAS BLANA GAME DATAS Press YES or the right arrow key to select the Time of Day submenu and show the first prompt on the LCD Press NO to resume the game in progress using the current data and exit the Menu Press 1 or 2 to display the time of day in 12 hour default or 24 hour format Press ENTER or the down arrow key to scroll to the next selection Enter the time of day in hours minutes and seconds using the selected format on the number pad and press ENTER Press ENTER or the down arrow key to scroll to the next selection Press 1 or 2 to display the game clock default or the time of day clock on the scoreboard Press the down arrow key to exit the Menu and return to the game If 2 tod is selected this message will be displayed Press ENTER to blank all game data on the scoreboard except for the Time of Day digits Volleyball Operations 205 13 4 Settings The following settings can be edited by the user when EDIT SETTINGS has been selected from the Main Menu Main Clock Note 1 The settings entered for Main Clock are
162. Multi Purpose Timer codes Code 99 is used to operate the multi purpose timer Note The Multi Purpose Timer is a general timer used for 2 4 and 6 digit time displays The timer will count up or down through hours minutes and seconds The information will shift on the 2 and 4 digit displays to show the most significant time values as the time changes The Multi Purpose Timer code is also used as a Time of Day code by accessing the Time of Day Menu through the Menu Key The segment Timer may also be accessed through the Menu Key Standard Keys The keys that are used by the multi purpose timer are START lt STOP gt SET MAIN CLOCK gt COUNT UP DOWN gt AUTO gt MANUAL HORN and lt MENU gt The key functions are explained in more detail in Section 2 6 Accessing the Multi Purpose Timer Turn on the console enter multi purpose timer code and press ENTER Press the MENU key and press the down or up arrows until the following message is displayed FIENU PFIBIN Press YES to enter the Time of Day Menu SELECT TUDP Basic Operations 37 Accessing the Segment Timer Refer to Section 3 for details on running this function of the Sport 5000 console Turn on the console Enter the multi purpose sport code used for the scoreboard in use and press ENTER A list of sport codes can be found in Appendix B Press the MENU key and press the down or up arrows until the following message is displa
163. N HORNE current setting Default Settings The switch remains open at all times and any external devices are disabled In count down mode the switch closes when the main clock reaches zero and remains closed until a nonzero value is entered In count up mode the switch closes when the main clock reaches the proper period break or overtime length and opens when any other value is entered The switch closes when the main clock is stopped and opens when the main clock is running External devices are disabled when the main clock is running The switch closes when the main horn sounds This could be when Auto Horn is enabled and the main clock reaches zero or when HORN is pressed Write the settings for this installation in the space Custom provided Main Clock Period 00 00 Length Switch Output LOock 0 Tennis Operations 175 Section 12 Track Operations Sport Insert LL 2439 The Sport Insert drawing is located at the end of this section The Team Name insert and Block Diagram drawings are located in Appendix A The Quick Reference is located in Appendix D Reference Drawings Block Diagrams A S5000 3000 Outdoor Sports Drawing A 124690 Insert teer ento p deett etd ve ees Drawing A 125094 Insert Team en dece Drawing A 125290 Refer to the information in
164. O3JS8 6896 vsSON 991l 46 435 96 N LLI L A3d 26896 90 DAKTRONICS INC BROOKINGS SD 57006 PROJ INSERT BOXING CODE 291 1 WE m ots AVB DRAWN BY VANBEMMEL 54t 26 SEP 97 REVISION APPR BY DATE DESCRIPTION SCALE 1 1 6 R BA 7 9 6 8 9 2 LO co LLI eO L AS 72286 90 J DAKTRONICS INC BROOKINGS SD 57006 PROJ CUSTOM INSERT KARATE CODE 285 CHANGED PART NUMBER TO 06 98374 1 JUN 00 AVB Avg PES BY ANB DRAWN BY D DELEEUW DATE 11 NOV 97 DATE DESCRIPTION 727 1 1 6 R 7 9 5 7 4 28 lt gt lt L AS 986 90 J DAKTRONICS INC BROOKINGS SD 57006 PROJ CUSTOM INSERT TAE KWON DO CODE 286 1 CHANGED PART NUMBER TO 06 98375 DES BY AVB DRAWN BY D DELEEUW DATE 11 NOV 97 DATE DESCRIPTION 222 1 1 1 1 6 6 R 8A 9 a 5 7 5 66 91 3078 01 Q34 Q39NVHO NOlLdl32S3Q 9 86 90 OL YSEWNN 1 4 JUDO WHITE BLUE CODE 284 MEDICAL BLUE MEDICAL WAZA ARI WAZA ARI KEIKOKU WAZA ARI 8 WAZA Ani KEIKOKU 1 1 ON OFF 1 1 ON OFF YUKO YUKO CHUI YUKO YUKO CHUI KOKA KOKA SHIDO KOKA KOKA SHIDO 4 1 ON OFF CLEAR 4 1 ON OFF 2 3 m lt gt
165. OF 2000 MAXIMUM OF 2000 OF CABLE OF CABLE A IN DRIVER OUT IN DRIVER OUT IN DRIVER OUT IN DRIVER OUT IN DRIVER OUT IN DRIVER OUT IN DRIVER OUT IN DRIVER OUT IN DRIVER OUT IN DRIVER OUT DAKTRONICS INC BROOKINGS SD 57006 PROJ ALL SPORT 5000 CURRENT LOOP OUTPUT SPECIFICATIONS DES BY EB DRAWN BY EBRAVEK DATE 26 FEB OO REVISION APPR BY DESCRIPTION scat NONE 1 1 9 6 4 1 28429 1150 0126 UNCOATED OR 0 1150 0127 16 COLUMN LED DRIVER 1 COATED J5 J7 913 c ot 1 19 gt 15 eoi CAO LU g exo 9 1 mt MV 9 5 6 g et 9999999999 6 9 1
166. OFF gt a second time to display PARTIAL ff 5S the configured time for partial time out length HIL Iii 17 55 minutes seconds To accept the partial time out length press YES To decline the selection of the partial time out length press To change the partial time out length enter the new length in minutes and seconds on the number pad and press ENTER Press CLEAR twice to clear changes and return to the game Set Play Clock The PLAY CLOCK setting is used by the remote play clock console The configured play clock times are set using the EDIT SETTINGS function when a new code is selected Note 1 When RESET ON STOP is set to yes Y the STOP switch automatically resets the play clock using the RESET 1 time and the RESET button uses the RESET 2 time Note 2 When RESET ON STOP is set to no N the STOP switch does not reset the play clock and the RESET button uses the RESET 1 time please refer to the table on the following page 106 Football Options LCD Display PLAY CURR NNSS 17 55 minutes seconds PLAS CLOCK EDIT RESET i55 17 55 minutes seconds Press SET PLAY CLOCK to display the configured time for overtime length To accept the play clock time length press YES To decline the selection of the play clock time length press To change the play clock time length and set the play clock enter the new time in minutes a
167. OME PLATE TO THE AREA WHERE GUN IS WRITE YOUR MEASUREMENT ON THE PROVIDED ON THE TRIANGLE PICTURE BELOW STEP 2 MEASURE IN FEET HOW HIGH THE GUN IS OFF THE GROUND WRITE YOUR MEASUREMENT ON THE PROVIDED ON THE TRIANGLE PICTURE BELOW 553 CALCULATE THE LENGTH 1 VALUE USE LENGTH 1 02 STEP 4 CALCULATE THE ANGLE 1 VALUE USE ANGLE 1 COS D LENGTH 1 CALCULATED ANGLE 1 CALCULATED LENGTH 1 ANGLE 1 COS DX LENGTH amp D PITCHER S MEASURE IN FEET HOW FAR OVER THE GUN IS OFFSET FROM HOME PLATE WRITE YOUR MEASUREMENT ON THE PROVIDED ON THE TRIANGLE PICTURE BELOW COPY THE LENGTH 1 VALUE WHICH FOUND ABOVE TO THIS PICTURE YOU WILL REUSE THAT NUMBER STEP 7 CALCULATE THE ANGLE 2 VALUE USE ANGLE 2 TAN O LENGTH 1 CALCULATED e DISTANCE IN FEET OF FEST IN FEET CALCULATED PITCHERS MOUND STEP 8 ADD CALCULATED ANGLE 1 TO CALCULATED ANGLE 2 ENTER VALUE HERE STEP 7 CALCULATE SPEED ADJUST VALUE USE SPEED ADJUST VALUE COS ANGLE 1 ANGLE 2 CALCULATIONS SHOWN WILL NOT BE 100 EXACT ADDITIONAL ADJUSTMENTS CAN BE MADE AS REQUIRED THE LOWER THE NUMBER THE FASTER SPEED THE GUN READS ALL ADJUSTMENTS SHOULD BE DONE AT LEVEL THE CONCEPTS EXPRESSED AND DETAILS SHOWN ON THIS DRAWING ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY DO NOT REPRODUCE BY ANY MEANS INCLUDING ELECTRONICALLY WITHOUT THE
168. ONICS INC BROOKINGS SD 57006 ALL SPORT 5000 BLOCK DIAGRAM A S 3000 OR 5000 BB VB amp WR 1 ADDED A S 3000 01 APR 00 DES DRAWN BY BRAVEK 29 NOV 99 REVISION APPR DATE DESCRIPTION SCALE NONE 1 1 9 6 RO 4A 1 2 4 6 8 6 1 4 PHONE JUMPER CABLE PROVIDED BY DAKTRONICS Bow DUAL 1 4 PHONE W SHUNT JACK SCOREBOARD J BOXES NOT TYPICAL INSTALLATION SHOWN PROVIDED BY DAKTRONICS mS gt e 120V OPTIONAL OPTIONAL STATS MAIN STATS PANEL SCOREBOARD PANEL 120V AC OPTIONAL STATS PANEL CABLE ROUTING 1 pee 45 e 120V AC ARY SCOREBOARD OPTIONAL CABLE ROUTING 4 120V AC 1196 0015 J7 120V AC SCOREBOARD SYSTEM WITH SHOT CLOCKS DUAL 1 4 PHONE J BOX W SHUNT JACK e ALL SPORT 5000 SERIES CONSOLE ue AEG 120V AC SIGNAL CORD 6 e 120V AC RECOMMENDED SIGNAL CABLE 1 PAIR 22 AWG CABLE WITH AN OVERALL SHIELD DAK PART 1077 ONE CABLE FOR EACH SCOREBOARD TO RUN SCOREBOARDS TOGETHER PLUG ONE A S 5000 CONTROL CONSOLE INTO THE JACK LABELED MAIN W 12
169. PECIFICATIONS EDITED TEXT HOME ONLY TO 2 OCT HOME GUEST ONLY DES BY DRAWN BY E BRAVEK bar 08 NOV 99 DATE DESCRIPTION cn NONE 1 1 5 O R 4A E 1 2 5 9 4 J25 J26 ER ccc 2009 20000 OO DRIVER FRONT VIEW WITH COVER 40000 J20 REMOVE TWO WING NUTS TO REMOVE COVER AND J25 GAIN ACCESS TO FUSES FUNCTION FUNCTION PNE DS1 RX J16 ADDR O 8 ADDR 4 DS2 PWR FUNCTION ADDR 1 9 ADDR 5 SEG GND GND SEC ADDR 2 11 ADDR 6 ADDR 3 12 SWAP DS5 STATUS J17 FUNCT SIG IN SIG IN SIG OUT OUT 918 FUNCTION LAMP NEUT LAMP NEUT LAMP HOT 1 5 5 7 LAMP HOT 2 4 6 8 O1 S CALI ND J26 FUNCTION GND PROT 0 SES d eu E PROT 1 TS 5000 58 poo poo PROT 2 J17 FIS TOD N 21 J 9 ges 59 F17 gez 4 2 F14 F16 6008 bog J20 J16 14 DRIVER FRONT VIEW WITH COVER REMOVED
170. PICAL INTERFACE EQUIPMENT NEEDED BAUD 12 800 DATA BITS B CABLE 0 1065 0160 STANDS PARTEIEN STOP BITS 2 RUNNING TIME NORMAL RESULTS ON PAGE SIZE 1 0130 43514 W3lSAS 90045 QS SONDIOON8 SOINOM DIVQ 5 ONI NI 1 HSINIJ 6S1S56 V80d SCll 16 82 10 PRESS BOX OA 1065 0026 25 PIN to 16 CABLE ALL SPORT 2600 4000 OR 5000 V1 55 gt V1 4 120 VAC POWER Je J BOX 0A 1010 0026 2 CONDUCTOR 22 AWG SHIELDED CABLE HOUSED IN 1 2 CONDUIT SPECIFICATIONS OF 1010 0026 STANDS 3WOS yvr 0 935 GI NOlLdl32S3G MOHS OL M314H3ANOO TWNOIS Q39NVH9 SONILIAS LAdLNO 0825 1 COMMON FINISH LINE XNA1HSINI3 M 2808 TWELOOS MOVEL 89518 WALSAS 1 SIGNAL CONVERTER 0A 1065 0173 TB CL TX JUMPERS PINS 12 N 04 1009 38 D nS W 1236 SM9 2 3 120 15 BREAKER X COMPUTER FOOTBALL BY DAKTRONICS SCOREBOARD WddV SOINOYLYVG M 0895 11 61004 3 41 TYPICAL INTERFA
171. R 22 AWG CABLE WITH AN SIGNAL 1196 0015 W 1236 20 Q4 LOCATIONS OVERALL SHIELD DAK PART W 1077 1257 50 ONE CABLE FOR EACH SCOREBOARD W 1238 30 41 42 W 1340 10 NOTE PLUG AN A S 3000 OR 5000 CONSOLE INTO ANY OF THE AUXILIARY JACKS ON ANY OF THE J BOXES AND CONTROL THAT INDIVIDUAL SCOREBOARD PLUG THE A S 3000 OR 5000 CONSOLE INTO ANY ONE OF THE MAIN JACKS ON ANY J BOX AND CONTROL ALL OF THE SCOREBOARDS 7 MAIN CLOCK START STOP HORN SWITCH 1166 0005 2 3 m x m gt lt m 3 UD gt 22 gt lt gt N o o UD w lt 99 ge RR ALL SPORT 3000 5000 SERIES CONSOLE ee ae oe 414 4 csv mme I J BOX 1 J BOX 2 J BOX 3 J BOX 4 0008 14045 RED WIRE BLACK WIRE BLACK WIRE BLACK WIRE BLACK WIRE MAIN JACK RING J TIP LL I BLACK WIRE WHITE WIRE JACK RING J TIP MAIN JACK RING 22 OC MAIN JACK RING 2 OC LLL SLEEVE S L BLACK WIR
172. R 2022 282 or 285 WR 2023 283 or 286 TN 2007 EL f Sports Code Numbers 325 Model Address Sport Code Relay Driver 2 rr c i TNMC Home Guest Team Name 221 9 TNMC Player Foul Points Caption 2 Notes 1 Code 8000 is available on the Sport 5100 console only C 4 Custom Indoor Facility Site Contract Basketball Volleyball Wrestling Hockey Football Belgrade Arena 9100 9200 9300 9400 American Airlines American Airlines Center C9443 9101 01 9601 C10014 02 su EOM we Bismark Civic Center C10379 9104 04 Coliseo De Puerto Rico C10617 9105 Tyson BE Events Center C10976 University of South Dakota 9407 907 990706 9607 o Custom contract retrofit Custom 2 80 Lol a NN 9901 C 5 Custom Outdoor Facility Site Contract Baseball Football Soccer Track Lacross e SUNY Cortland C1000 203 9703 Hi 9403 3COM Park c11471 9606 University of South Carolina SVO 9610 Ao contract retrofit E 326 Sports Code Numbers pate 28 APR 99 10000000 Ne 01100101 01111001 qo t v 01101111 DOO 9C N e N e 97 01100001 98 01100010 99 01100011 10001100100 10901
173. ROKE keys to select the WIDTH HEIGHT and FONT of the TNMC The defaults are 48 columns 8 rows and single stroke Enter up to fifteen 15 characters for the team name and press ENTER Reinsert the WRESTLING LL 2435 insert to continue 9999 The TEAM NAME LL 2441 insert must be inserted to enter Team Name Message Center RRRRRRRRRR The TNMC is updated after each selection is completed Use the COLUMNS ROWS and STROKE keys to select the WIDTH HEIGHT and FONT of the TNMC The defaults are 48 columns 8 rows and single stroke Enter up to ten 10 characters for the team abbreviation and press lt ENTER gt Reinsert the WRESTLING LL 2435 insert to continue 224 Wrestling Operations Display Menu The DISPLAY MENU allows the user to start and edit the segment timer or to change the brightness of the scoreboard LCD Display RPENU FIBIN ENTER Press YES to select the Display submenu and DISPLAY show the first prompt on the LCD 1 f Press the down arrow key to scroll to the next selection AENU DISPLAY RUN Note The segment timer function is disabled while the clock is running SEG Y N 5 Press YES to exit the sport code and run the segment timer program Press NO or the down arrow key to scroll to the next selection EXIT GARE This prompt confirms that the user wants to exit the BRE YOU SURE S N sport cod
174. RUSHING and YARDS PASSING edit their respective team total FIRST DOWNS 1 gt increments the number of first downs for the respective team Edit Key Function e Press lt EDIT gt followed by any of the following keys to edit the respective value lt SCORE 1 gt lt SCORE 1 gt lt SCORE 2 gt lt SCORE 3 gt lt SCORE 6 gt lt FIRST DOWNS 1 gt lt QUARTER 1 gt lt DOWN 1 gt lt TIME OUT gt lt TIME OUT ON OFF gt 334 Quick Reference Sport 5000 Hockey Note Refer to Section 9 Hockey Operation for more detailed operating instructions Start Up Turnthe Power Switch ON the Resume Game Y N prompt Press lt gt to resume the game where last shut off or Press lt gt to enter a new sport code number Team Score lt SCORE 1 gt and lt SCORE 1 gt increment and decrement the team score Time Out first press of lt TIME OUT displays the number of full time outs for the selected team second press displays the number of partial timeouts if applicable Press enter to take a time out for the selected team The TIME OUT gt selects a full 1st press or partial 219 press time out and starts the time out clock time out clock may be displayed on the main scoreboard using the Time Outs Show Main setting in the Menu under Edit Settings Period lt PERIOD 1 gt increments the current period number S
175. S TO FUSES J25 FUNCTION FUNCTION DS1 RX Ji J8 GND 7 GND FUNCTION ADDR O 8 ADDR 4 SEG C ADDR 1 9 ADDR 5 DS3 STATUS SEG B GND GND SEG A ADDR 2 11 ADDR 6 J17 SEG F ADDR 3 12 CLMN SWAP FUNCT SEG E SIC IN SEG D SIC IN COMMON SIG OUT SEG H SIG OUT SEG O1 S CALI ND J26 FUNCTION GND J25 J1 J J18 PROT 0 ddd FUNCTION PROT 1 H 0000 45000 LAMP NEUT SU LAMP NEUT TOD N Dor ag z z LAMP HOT 1 3 5 7 oad Dr z LAMP HOT 2 4 6 8 F17 F18 DRIVER FRONT VIEW WITH COVER REMOVED 425 FUNCTION FAN SW HOT NEUT FAN HOT NEUT J19 J22 FUNCTION FUNCTI NEUTRAL 1 0 NEUTRAL 2 COMMON 120V HOT 120V HOT PLUG FROM FAN IN COVER CONNECTS TO 925 A CHANGED J25 amp J26 TEXT 2 OCT OO 5 V TO GND BIN So Ta s DAKTRONICS INC BROOKINGS SD 57006 CORRECTED J26 PINOUT TAB
176. S9NDIOO38 SOINOMLYVG LL 2436 REV 09 HOCKEY LACROSSE HANDBALL CODE 4000 500 CONSOLE 4401 10 0 906 4402 W S0G 4102 LC 2 BB 4103 SERIES 3000 4104 SERIES 2500 4105 PLYR FL PTS 4601 HK FB 4602 LC FB 4701 506 4702 LC SOC LABEL HERE ENTER THIS CODE NUMBER V HOME SCORE 1 SCORE 1 TIME OUT lt SHOTS ON GOAL 1 SAVES 1 SAVES 1 PENALTY lt PLAYER DELETE PENALTY PENALTY ENABLE PENALTY CLOCKS MINOR PENALTY TIME OUT ON OFF DISABLE PENALTY CLOCKS MAJOR PENALTY PERIOD 1 TIME OUT gt SHOTS ON GOAL PENALTY DELETE PENALTY 66 234 90 66 234 LZ 00 92 NOlLdl32S3Q SYAWNN 3402 NOILVOOT 138 1 3009 SOLE 3009 2 3 uq lt z 2 0 DE D D m 90 2 2 gt gt 2 ca 20 o 2 m 70 gt 2 SOLI 66 AON aia TEAWWSENVA V SOINOMLYVG 90046 QS S9NDIOO38 LL 2435 REV 02 V WRESTLING CODE 3101 PLAYER FOUL FOUL PLAYER SERIES 3000 SERIES 2500 PLYR FL PTS MATSIDE JR LABEL HERE ENTER THIS
177. SHOTS ON GOAL 1 gt lt SHOTS ON GOAL 1 gt lt SAVES 1 gt lt SAVES 1 gt lt HALF 1 gt PENALTY KICKS 1 gt lt PENALTY KICKS 1 gt lt CORNER KICKS 1 gt lt CORNER KICKS 1 gt lt TIME OUT ON OFF gt lt TIME OUT gt 338 Quick Reference Sport 5000 Track Note Refer to Section 12 Track Operation for more detailed operating instructions Start Up Turnthe Power Switch ON the Resume Game Y N prompt Press ENTER YES gt to resume the game where last shut off or Press lt Clear NO gt to enter a new sport code number Team Score lt 5 1 gt and score keys for home and guest 1 increment and edit the team total score The Guest 2 and Guest 3 score keys can also edit team scores if the setting of Guest 2 3 Value is Score Reset RESET resets the main clock This only applies to the manual input code code 8601 Place PLACE edits the current place value Lane LANE edits the current lane value Events GUEST 2 SCORE EVENT gt edits the current event value if the setting of Guest 2 3 Value is Event Heat e The event value will be overwritten if the console is connected to an external timer Heat GUEST 3 SCORE HEAT gt edits the current heat value if the setting of Guest 2 3 Value is Event Heat e The heat value will be overwritten if the console is connected to an external timer Edit Key Function Press EDIT followed by lt SCORE 1
178. Section 2 carefully to fully understand the following operation instructions If an insert is lost or damaged a copy of the insert drawing located at the end of this section can be used until a replacement can be ordered 17 1 Tae kwon do Keys D LCD Display UHITE D WHITE D 1 gt and WHITE D 1 gt increment and N decrement the points value for the selected competitor N new value Gamjeom G LCD Display WHITE G lt WHITE G 1 gt and lt WHITE G 1 gt increment and N decrement the penalty count for the selected 8 N new value Tae Kwon Do Operations 247 Kyong go K LCD Display WHITE 5 WHITE 1 gt and WHITE 1 gt increment or decrement the 1 2 point deduction warnings for the selected opponent n N new value Win LCD Display WIN turns on the Win indicator for the selected opponent LCD Display WHITE CHECK YN turns on the check indicator for the selected BN opponent Total On Off TOTAL ON OFF gt sets the total point scoring or off The total points for each competitor are calculated from scoring for all rounds The score is calculated as follows D points G penalties K warnings Total Score Weight Class WEIGHT CLOSS lt WEIGHT CLASS gt sets weight class shown on the display NN Y current setting 248 Tae Kwon Do Operations Round Length LCD Display POUND LENGTH ROUND LENGTH
179. Section 2 to start up the console and use the sport insert Read Section 2 carefully to fully understand the following operation instructions If an insert is lost or damaged a copy of the insert drawing located at the end of this section can be used until a replacement can be ordered Use the labels provided in Appendix B to attach the correct code number label to the sport insert in the appropriate location Write the code number in the space provided below Write the correct code number here Notes The four digit code displayed is the code that is currently selected Code 8601 is the code for manual data input External Timer Codes 8602 8604 e External timers must have specific Baud rates entered into the Venus 7000 computer when using RTD information The different rates are noted with each external timer e Code 8602 is for interfacing with the PowerTime timer Scoreboard type setting the PowerTime under initialization scoreboard type must be set to multi line and 1 The baud rate must be changed to 9600 in the Venus 7000 computer Code 8603 is for interfacing with the OmniSport 1000 or OmniSport 6000 e The Current Loop Scoreboard Setting under Setup Comm Ports on the OmniSport 6000 must be set to SW 87 89 MS 167 169 if code 8603 is used with the OmniSport 6000 track timing program The baud rate must be set to 12800 Baud in the Venus 7000 computer e Code 8604 is for interfac
180. Sport Insert drawing is located at the end of this section The Team Name insert and Block Diagram drawings are located in Appendix A Reference Drawings Insert Karate Code 282 istis EY Fia AR Ea Ya Drawing A 96890 Insert Karate Cod 285 ERU Drawing A 98374 Refer to the information in Section 2 to start up the console and use the sport insert Read Section 2 carefully to fully understand the following operation instructions If an insert is lost or damaged a copy of the insert drawing located at the end of this section can be used until a replacement can be ordered 16 1 Karate Keys W Wazaari LCD Display WHITE H lt W 1 gt and lt W 1 gt increment and decrement the N value for the selected competitor 1 N new value H Hansoku LCD Display WHITE lt H 1 gt and lt H 1 gt increment and decrement the N Hansoku for the selected opponent 1 N new value Karate Operations 239 M Mubobi LCD Display WHITE fl lt M 1 gt and lt M 1 gt increment or decrement the Mubobi value for the selected competitor n N new value J Jogai LCD Display WHITE J J41 and lt J 1 gt increment or decrement the N Jogai value for the selected competitor 1 N new value LCD Display WIN turns the Win indicator for the selected opponent 16 2 Edit W H M J The W H M and J
181. T AAAAARARAAAAA ADBER HRRRRRRRRR Press YES or the right or left arrow key to select the Home or Guest Roster submenu and show the first prompt on the LCD Press to resume the game in progress using the current data and exit the Menu Press the down arrow key to scroll to the next selection The TEAM NAME LL 2441 insert must be inserted to enter the Team Name Message Center TNMC settings The is updated after each selection is completed Use the COLUMNS ROWS and STROKE keys to select the WIDTH HEIGHT and FONT of the TNMC The defaults are 48 columns 8 rows and single stroke Enter up to fifteen 15 characters for the team name and press lt ENTER gt Insert the BASKETBALL LL 2433 insert to continue The TEAM NAME LL 2441 insert must be inserted to enter the Team Name Message Center TNMC settings The is updated after each selection is completed Use the COLUMNS ROWS and STROKE keys to select the WIDTH HEIGHT and FONT of the TNMC The defaults are 48 columns 8 rows and single stroke Enter up to ten 10 characters for the team abbreviation and press lt ENTER gt Insert the BASKETBALL LL 2433 insert to continue 92 Basketball Operations LCD Display Press YES to assign the jersey numbers for all the players in the roster EDIT PLAYERS Press or the
182. TART STOP HORN SWITCH ALL SPORT 3000 OR 5000 SERIES CONSOLE 1166 0003 SCOREBOA POWER AND SIGNAL WIRES ARE TERMINATED IN A POWER AND SIGNAL TERM PANEL LOCATED INSIDE OF THE SCOREBOARD LOCATION OF PANEL DEPENDS UPON MODEL OF SCOREBOARD REFER TO SCOREBOARD MANUAL FOR MORE DETAILS SEE SCOREBOARD MANUAL FOR SCOREBOARD POWER REQUIREMENTS RECOMMENDED SIGNAL CABLE 1 PAIR 22 AWG CABLE WITH AN OVERALL SHIELD DAK PART 1077 ONE CABLE FOR EACH SCOREBOARD PLAY CLOCK POWER 4 PHONE JACK J BOX SIGNAL CORDS 1009 0058 W 1236 20 FT 0A 1091 0227 OUTDOOR W 1237 50 FT W 1238 30 FT J7 mu 1540 10 FT PLAY CLOCK CONTROL 120V AC P d 0 1196 0031 I FOOTBALL SYSTEM WITH PLAY CLOCKS LO MAIN CLOCK Zi START STOP HORN SWITCH ALL SPORT 3000 OR a 0 1166 0003 5000 SERIES CONSOLE THE CONCEPTS EXPRESSED AND DETAILS SHOWN ON THIS DRAWING ARE CONFIDENTIAL AND PROPRIETARY DO NOT REPRODUCE BY ANY MEANS INCLUDING ELECTRONICALLY WITHOUT THE EXPRESSED WRITTEN CONSENT OF DAKTRONICS INC COPYRIGHT 2003 DAKTRONICS INC hc MBRET TO DATT TRER JJS DAKTRONICS INC BROOKINGS SD 57006 CHANGED TO REPRESENT ALL OUTDOOR SPORTS PRo ALL SPORT 5000 BLOCK DIAGRAMS A S 3000 OR 5000 OUTDOOR SPORTS 5 3000 DES BY DRAWN BY BRAVEK
183. THE CONTROL CONSOLE TO BCAST CHANNEL 00 N39 15 00 048 FIONIS NOIILO3T3S T3NNVHO 90 66608L VLOS OLLI SCOREBOARD WITH RADIO SET TO J5 BCAST1 CHANNEL 1 SCOREBOARD WITH RADIO SET TO J5 CHANNEL 2 SCOREBOARD 1 5 1 CONTROLLING SCOREBOARD 1 INDEPENDENTLY SCOREBOARD 2 CONTROLLING SCOREBOARD 2 INDEPENDENTLY TO JS SCOREBOARD WITH RADIO SET BCAST2 CHANNEL 1 SCOREBOARD 3 CONTROLLING SCOREBOARD 3 INDEPENDENTLY SCOREBOARD WITH RADIO SET TO J5 BCAST2 CHANNEL 2 SCOREBOARD 4 CONTROLLING SCOREBOARD 4 INDEPENDENTLY ONE CONSOLE WITH RADIO ONE CONSOL ONE CONSOLE WITH RADIO LE WITH RADIO SET TO BCA SET TO BCA SET TO BCAST 2 BCAST 2 CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL 01 EL 02 CONTROL CONTROLL CONTROLLING TROLLING SCOREBOARD 1 SCOREBOARD 2 SCOREBOARD 3 EBOARD 4 NOlLdl3OS3Q CONTROLLING CONTROLLING SCOREBOARD 1 amp 2 COREBOARD 3 amp 4 AS BROADCAST GROUP AS BROADCAST GROUP BCAST 1
184. TILL WIRE IS HELD IN PLACE MAKE SURE TO NOT HAVE ANY EXCESS UNINSULATED WIRE STICKING OUT OF TERMINAL BLOCK POSITION REBOA REBOA REBOA REBOA REBOA REBOA N 21 SWITCH INTPUT PIN 22 DATA OUTPUT SIGNAL PIN 25 SWITCH OUTPUT OOOOOOOOOOO00 OOOOOOOOOOO00 OOOOOOOOOOOO00 PIN 24 10VAC DC EXTERNAL CONSOLE POWER SOURCE 6626 6o0o02o 09020 PIN 25 10VAC DC EXTERNAL CONSOLE POWER SOURCE 9119 09 9 REAR VIEW OF J BOX FACEPLATE RS232 RECEIVE PIN 2 RS232 TRANSMIT PIN 3 GND PIN 7 SWITCH INPUT 1 PIN 8 CL INPUT PIN 9 CL INPUT PIN 10 SWITCH OUTPUT PIN 11 1 4 PHONE JUMPER CABLE PROVIDED BY DAKTRONICS TYPICAL INSTALLATION SHOWN SCOREBOARD J BOX NOT PROVIDED BY DAKTRONICS 00 LO m mj mej mel 120V AC 120V AC 120V AC 120V AC it 2 3 4 SCOREBOARD SCOREBOARD SCOREBOARD SCOREBOARD 000 s v NOlLdl32S3Q 4J BOX 2 1J BOX 3 DUAL 1 4 PHONE RECOMMENDED SIGNAL CABLE ALL J BOX 1 PAI
185. TROKE keys to select the WIDTH HEIGHT and FONT of the TNMC The defaults are 48 columns 8 rows and single stroke Enter up to ten 10 characters for the team abbreviation and press lt ENTER gt Reinsert the FOOTBALL LL 2437 insert to continue 120 Football Options Display Menu The DISPLAY MENU allows the user to start and edit the segment timer or to change the brightness of the scoreboard LCD Display FiENU PIRIN ENTER DISPLAY MENUS l iENU BISPLRS RUN SEG TIMER 571 EXIT GATE ARE SURE S N Press YES to select the Display submenu and show the first prompt on the LCD Press the down arrow key to scroll to the next selection Note The segment timer function is disabled while the clock is running Press YES to exit the sport code and run the segment timer program Press NO or the down arrow key to scroll to the next selection This prompt confirms that the user wants to exit the sport code and enter the segment timer The SEGMENT TIMER LL 2475 insert must be installed to enter the Segment Timer settings Refer to Section 3 for more information on the Segment Timer Press YES to exit the sport code and run the segment timer program Press NO or the down arrow key to scroll to the next selection Continued on next page Football Options 121 LCD Display MENU LEVEL 0 9 NN Yn current level FiENU PIRIE SETTINGS
186. TYPE 2 1 2 3 3 SCOREBOARD OUTPUT SCOREBOARD OUTPUT SCOREBOARD OUTPUT LIGHT S 120V AC ALL SPORT 5000 ONLY T d SERIES CONSOLE HOCKEY SYSTEM WITH GOAL LIGHTS Nu MAIN CLOCK 1166 0003 START STOP HORN SWITCH DAKTRONICS INC BROOKINGS SD 57006 PRo ALL SPORT 5000 BLOCK DIAGRAM A S 3000 OR 5000 HOCKEY ADDED A S 3000 26 APR 00 DATE DESCRIPTION DES BY DRAWN BY BRAVEK DATE 29 NOV 99 1196 RO4A 124689 APPR BY SCALE NONE SCOREBOARD POWER AND SIGNAL WIRES ARE TERMINATED IN A POWER AND SIGNAL TERM PANEL LOCATED e INSIDE OF THE SCOREBOARD LOCATION OF PANEL DEPENDS UPON MODEL OF SCOREBOARD REFER TO SCOREBOARD MANUAL FOR MORE DETAILS SEE SCOREBOARD MANUAL 1 4 PHONE JACK J BOX FOR SCOREBOARD POWER 0A 1009 0038 INDOOR OR REQUIREMENTS 0A 1091 0227 OUTDOOR SIGNAL CORD W 1236 20 FT W 1237 50 FT W 1238 50 FT W 1340 10 FT RECOMMENDED SIGNAL CABLE gt 1 PAIR 22 CABLE WITH AN z OUTDOOR SCOREBOARD SYSTEMS OVERALL SHIELD DAK PART W 1077 120 AC 44 T MAIN CLOCK m S
187. The TNMC is updated after each selection is completed Use the COLUMNS ROWS and STROKE keys to select the WIDTH HEIGHT and FONT of the TNMC The defaults are 48 columns 8 rows and single stroke Enter up to fifteen 15 characters for the team name and press ENTER Reinsert the TRACK LL 2439 insert to continue HBDRE TER 8882 The TEAM NAME LL 2441 insert must be inserted to enter the Team Name Message RRRRRRRRRR Center TNMC settings The TNMC is updated after each selection is completed Use the COLUMNS ROWS and STROKE keys to select the WIDTH HEIGHT and FONT of the TNMC The defaults are 48 columns 8 rows and single stroke Enter up to fifteen 15 characters for the team abbreviation and press lt ENTER gt Reinsert the TRACK LL 2439 insert to continue Display Menu The DISPLAY MENU allows the user to start and edit the segment timer or to change the brightness of the scoreboard LCD Display ENTER Press YES to select the Display submenu and show the first prompt on the LCD Press the down arrow key to scroll to the next selection DISPLAY Track Operations 183 Continued from previous page LCD Display Action FIENU DISPLES RUN Note The segment timer function is disabled while the clock is running SEG TIMER Y N Press YES to exit the sport code and run the segment timer program Press NO or the down arrow key to scroll to
188. The TNMC is updated after each selection is completed Use the COLUMNS ROWS and STROKE keys to select the WIDTH HEIGHT and FONT of the TNMC The defaults are 48 columns 8 rows and single stroke Enter up to ten 10 characters for the team abbreviation and press lt ENTER gt Reinsert the VOLLEYBALL LL 2434 insert to continue FIENU HGRE Enter the jersey number for that player from the official roster and press ENTER The next PLASER Br PI player is shown on the LCD Continue entering the current setting jersey numbers for up to 15 players Press the CLEAR key to advance to the next option RENLU H RE This function clears all game statistics and should only be used before the start of game CLEAR 579752 Press YES to clear the in game status fouls and points for all players in the home roster Press NO to decline the selection Press the down arrow key to scroll to the next selection 202 Volleyball Operations Display Menu The DISPLAY MENU allows the user to start and edit the segment timer or to change the brightness of the scoreboard LCD Display FENU PBIN ENTER Press YES to select the Display submenu and DISPLAY show the first prompt the LCD 1 L Press the down arrow key to scroll to the next selection AENU DISPLAY RUN Note The segment timer function is disabled while z the clock is running SEG TIMER Y N d
189. The default setting is 1 CLOCK 0 To display the switch setting that you want to select e Press the number 0 1 2 3 key as a shortcut or use the left and right arrow keys to scroll to the desired setting Press YES to select the new setting Press NO or the down arrow key to leave the switch setting and display the next prompt 102 Basketball Operations The possible settings for the switch output are as follows 0 DISABLED SWITCH GUTPUTSI LD DISRBLEDP N current setting SWITCH 02 I current setting 2 CLOCK STOP SWITCH e LLULA 5 N current setting 3 MAIN HORN SWITCH J MAN HORNE current setting The switch remains open at all times and any external devices are disabled In count down mode the switch closes when the main clock reaches zero and remains closed until a nonzero value is entered In count up mode the switch closes when the main clock reaches the proper period break or overtime length and opens when any other value is entered The switch closes when the main clock is stopped and opens when the main clock is running External devices are disabled when the main clock is running The switch closes when the main horn sounds This could be when Auto Horn is enabled and the main clock reaches zero or when HORN is pressed Basketball Operations 103 Default Settings Write the settings for t
190. UTSI LD DISRBLEDP N current setting SWITCH 02 N current setting 2 CLOCK STOP SWITCH BUTPUT h e LLULA 5 N current setting 3 MAIN HORN SWITCH J MAN HORNE I current setting The switch remains open at all times and any external devices are disabled In count down mode the switch closes when the main clock reaches zero and remains closed until a nonzero value is entered In count up mode the switch closes when the main clock reaches the proper period break or overtime length and opens when any other value is entered The switch closes when the main clock is stopped and opens when the main clock is running External devices are disabled when the main clock is running The switch closes when the main horn sounds This could be when Auto Horn is enabled and the main clock reaches zero or when lt HORNs is pressed Wrestling Operations 231 Section 15 Event Counter Sport Insert 06 58047 The Sport Insert drawing is located at the end of this section The Quick Reference is located in Appendix D Reference Drawings Insert Event Counter Drawing A 58047 Refer to the information in Section 2 to start up the console and use the sport insert Read Section 2 carefully to fully understand the following operation instructions If an insert is lost or damaged a copy of the insert drawing located at the end of this s
191. add a new penalty or edit an existing penalty for the home or guest team To edit an existing penalty use the up and down arrow keys to scroll to the desired penalty and press lt ENTER gt Enter the jersey number of the player with the penalty on the number pad and press lt ENTER gt Press CLEAR twice to clear changes and return to the game The default penalty time initially displayed is the minor penalty value that was entered in Settings Enter the penalty time by pressing the MINOR gt or MAJOR PENALTY key or use the number pad to enter the correct penalty time and then press lt gt Pressing MINOR PENALTY or MAJOR PENALTY additional times will add the configured time for that penalty with each press Press the CLEAR to clear the penalty time if MINOR PENALTY gt or MAJOR PENALTY are pressed too many times Hockey Options 135 Set Main Clock LCD Display CLOCK SET 55 fif 55 1 minutes seconds tenths of a second ADJUST PENALTY TIMERS 571 After the main clock has been stopped press SET MAIN CLOCK to display the current of the main clock To change the time enter the desired time on the number pad and press ENTER Press lt CLEAR gt twice to clear changes and return to the game If there are penalty times and the lt START gt has been pressed at least once after setting the period time the Adjust
192. and press lt ENTER gt 52 Baseball Operations 4 3 Menu The MENU key allows the user to select from a list of options specific for each sport The up and down arrow keys allow the user to scroll through the menu list Pressing a key other than lt YES gt the arrow keys and other allowed keys exit the Menu function The MENU function should be used at the beginning of each new game to edit the Home and Guest Rosters New Game MENU MAIN NEW GATE New Code Press lt YES gt to clear all of the program data for the last game played or the game in progress and begin running the selected sport Press lt NO gt to resume the game in progress using the current data and exit the Menu Press the down arrow key to scroll to the next selection NENU NAIN NEW CODE Press lt YES gt to begin selection of a new code from the ENTER CODE prompt Press lt NO gt to resume the game in progress using the current data and exit the Menu Press the down arrow key to scroll to the next selection Baseball Operations 53 Home Roster Guest Roster Home Roster and Guest Roster are entered in the same way Home Roster is used as an example FIENU ROSTER Press YES or the right or left arrow key to select m the Home or Guest Roster submenu and show the LEE 7 SELECT first prompt on the LCD Press to resume the game in progress using the current data and exit the Menu
193. aptions controlled by control 1 Press the 2 key to select ON and OFF for captions controlled by control 2 Display Lines for Weight Class LCD Display BE DISP LINES This setting represents the number of lines used on N the stat panel displays It can only be set to 5 or 6 N number of lines Press the 5 or key and then ENTER Display Team Score LCD Display ISPLAY NO This menu option allows for selection of having the Team Score display on the Matside advantage team TERI SCORE score module If set to display it will show team score after the match is reset until an advantage time is started N number of lines Press lt YES gt to select display ON Press to select display OFF 230 Wrestling Operations Switch Output The Sport 5000 series console has a switch that can be used to drive a number of different devices The switch can be configured to operate under different settings The default setting is 1 CLOCK 0 To display the switch setting that you want to select Press the number 0 1 2 3 key as a shortcut or use the left and right arrow keys to scroll to the desired setting Press YES to select the new setting Press or the down arrow key to leave the switch setting and display the next prompt please refer to the table on the following page The possible settings for the switch output are as follows 0 DISABLED SWITCH GUTP
194. ard outputs for pos 41 45 to use the correct RTD item numbers and display the correct information Version 1 4 1 Release Date 1 March 2001 Addoutputs for a new MS 2009 to soccer and to football basketball and hockey codes for use at the American Airlines Center in Dallas codes 9101 basketball and 9401 hockey Addoutputs for SO 2008 to soccer Code 7601 and football code 6601 and hockey code 4601 Add x100 team score segments to hockey boards with address 71 to basketball codes 1401 and 1402 and to hockey codes 4401 and 4402 for testing purpose Version 1 4 2 Release Date 12 April 2001 Added a menu option to baseball to allow a 2 digit time or at bat to be displayed in the at bat section of the output This is done for a new model of scoreboard BA 2005 e Added a minimum speed selection for radar gun on pitch and speed Corrected problem with speed of pitch not working with Stalker radar gun when gun is set for whole digit and no tenths Added a medical timer so it will count beyond the end of a period e Fixed judo osaekomi timer so it will count beyond the end of a period Added address 22 for 6 digit time on the TI 2006 to the multi purpose timer e Added an output for 50 1830 1930 to code 4601 hockey lacrosse for use in lacrosse that will show period on the home penalty digit Version 1 4 3 Release Date 8 June 2001 Added a new address 17 for Tuff Sport basketball boards to c
195. ary 2000 Made change to RAM test in production test Added output tables for a BB 2031 these tables were added to codes 2101 and 2111 in volleyball and codes 3101 amp 3102 in wrestling and replaced the BB 3000 output on address 13 Version 1 0 4 Release Date 7 February 2000 Revised wrestling advantage time to not start with clock start if the advantage clock was previously stopped Added flashing of player stats in basketball and volleyball Removed the delete players option in home and guest roster for basketball and volleyball Removed the edit settings question at power up Removed the new game question when the code entered is the same as the previous code that was used Changed menu so that arrow keys will wrap around back to the start of the menu items Moved the switch output selection to the end of the settings function Revised the player edit function in basketball and volleyball to exit the routine when lt gt is pressed Introduction Version 1 0 5 Release Date 7 March 2000 e Track sport added Test code 0001 added e Set TOD to 12 00 when start up so operators will set new time e Added caption control to basketball volleyball football wrestling and hockey e Added codes for the 2500 series basketball boards e Added previous game scores to volleyball for display on the 2500 series basketball board e Added player fouls points PLY FL PTS captions for the 3000 and 2500 series basketball boards
196. ber here If you do not know the code number to enter for your scoreboard refer to Appendix B in this manual If you do not know the model number of your scoreboard refer to the Installation and Maintenance manual provided with the scoreboard Soccer Operations 149 10 1 Soccer Keys Time Out On Off TIME OUT gt stops and starts the time out clock The length of both the full and partial time outs can also be changed when the time out clock is stopped LCD Display TIRE OUT SELECT Press TIME OUT gt to display the configured time for full time out length FULL _ 18 55 1 55 minutes seconds accept the full time out length and press YES To decline the selection of the full time out length press NO To change the full time out length enter the new length in minutes and seconds on the number pad and press ENTER Press CLEAR twice to clear changes and return to the game Notes Only the time outs configured in the EDIT SETTINGS function are displayed on the LCD and available for selection The up and down arrow keys can also be used to select the full and partial time outs Continued on next page 150 Soccer Options LCD Display TINE BUT SELECT PARTIAL 17 55 17 55 minutes seconds Half 1 N current setting Continued from previous page Press TIME OUT ON OFF gt a second time to display the configured time for partial tim
197. blank the BALL ON DOWN and TO GO values when pressed LCD Display TESA SCORE 7 Press the appropriate score key to increment or decrement the score for the home or guest team nnn In current setting The LCD shows which key was pressed and the new value for the team score of the corresponding team Possession The lt 55 gt keys turn the home and guest possession indicators on and off If Auto Calculate is on PLAY DIRECTION and SIDE OF FIELD must also be selected LCD Display HORE POSSESSION If Auto Calculate is on PLAY DIRECTION SIDE ON OF FIELD and BALL ON must also be selected 1 Press the home or guest lt 55 gt key to turn on the possession indicator for that team 7 Iu To turn off the possession indicator press the same POSSESSION lt POSS gt key second time or press opposite POSS key PLAY DIRECTION Select the direction of play for the current series of downs E Ee Press 1 or the left arrow to set play direction from right to left Press 3 or the right arrow to set play direction from left to right Continued on next page 112 Football Options Continued from previous page LCD Display IDE OF FIELD ic BALL NN current setting BRLLONNN gt DOUN N 60 NN current setting 7000150 157810 Action Selects the current side of field for ball placement Press 1 or the left arrow t
198. cally calculated and displayed Press NO to disable this feature and manually enter the down and the number of yards to go Football Options 127 Select Captions LCD Display SELECT CAPTIONS This menu option allows for the controlled backlit gt captions to be turned ON OFF 1 Press the 1 key to select ON and OFF for captions controlled by control 1 Press the 2 key to select ON and OFF for captions controlled by control 2 Score by Quarter SCORE BY QUARTER This feature allows for scores to be recorded by 7 quarter This data is available on the output X current setting Press lt YES gt to score by quarter or press NO to not score by quarter Note If this feature is enabled all scores are edited by quarter Use this function only when needed Switch Output The Sport 5000 series console has a switch that can be used to drive a number of different devices The switch can be configured to operate under different settings The default setting is 1 CLOCK 0 To display the switch setting that you want to select Press the number 0 1 2 3 key as a shortcut or use the left and right arrow keys to scroll to the desired setting Press YES to select the new setting Press NO or the down arrow key to leave the switch setting and display the next prompt refer to the menu on the following page 128 Football Options The possible sett
199. cansino RE E enne nennen 48 Ball Count Strike Count Clear 49 Hit Error oiii eco 49 PAU abs 50 eee tepida eae Id EE 50 Hits Errors Left on Base 51 Pitch Count Foul Balls In 51 4 2 Editrice IER mela e ntn 51 nnn Fl ei eR RG Peine aep 51 E 52 Hits Errors Lefton 52 4 3 MODs riti etn nde d etn d Re 53 ING Ws Crates te M ien 53 New Code eese atacan aite 53 Roster Guest ROSIE VO RP EP 54 Display E ed tete oae het 55 Edit Settings im decet e eer e nep ipe t ade 57 a bh P Eee bete at diese gr aera a 57 44 58 ete nta bis das 58 ECOL POSTE GM 2 59 Auto Increment Pitches eese ener eene ener entrer enne tres entere eese tran 59 Auto Increment I ntng 60 Score by ente ce POL Re 60 Sequence eere pecore rm eae Eee aed ete ea sabe ite 60 Display Wining ode de edo d nt id d ea e teet 61 Display oie ERR EOD e ERU 62 Select ic oro ea b eaa sti he n nto iet crit
200. ccessing Segment Timer Turn on the console Enter the multi purpose sport code used for the scoreboard in use and press lt gt list of sport codes can be found in Appendix B The segment timer program is accessed through the main menu of each individual sport The DISPLAY MENU allows the user to start the segment timer Press the MENU key and press the down or up arrows until the following message is displayed Note The segment timer function is disabled while the clock is running fFIENU FIRIN ENTER Press lt YES gt to enter the display menu Press lt YES gt to exit the sport code and run the ISPLAY 2 segment timer program MENG DISPLAY RUN SEG TIMER The console will prompt the user to press lt YES gt a second time to enter the segment timer to avoid accidental exit from the sport program EXIT GARE Refer to Section 3 1 for general segment timer BRE YOU SURE Y N operation instructions 3 3 Accessing 2 Digit or 6 Digit Display Segment Timer This code is only used for the two digit or six digit displays designed exclusively for segment timing Enter code 100 after turning on the All Sport console to access the exclusive segment timer program For all other scoreboards enter the correct scoreboard code and use MENU to access the segment timer Refer to Section 3 2 40 Baseball Operations 3 4 Segment Timer Keys Segment Time The SEGMENT NO TIME gt key is used
201. ces The switch can be configured to operate under different settings The default setting is 1 CLOCK 0 To display the switch setting that you want to select Press the number 0 1 2 3 key as a shortcut or use the left and right arrow keys to scroll to the desired setting Press YES to select the new setting Press NO or the down arrow key to leave the switch setting and display the next prompt The possible settings for the switch output are on the following page Hockey Options 147 0 DISABLED SWITCH D DISRBLEDP N current setting SWITCH I CLULA 02 N current setting 2 CLOCK STOP SWITCH e LLULA 5 N current setting 3 MAIN HORN SWITCH BUTPUT h J MAN HORNE I current setting Default Settings The switch remains open at all times and any external devices are disabled In count down mode the switch closes when the main clock reaches zero and remains closed until a nonzero value is entered In count up mode the switch closes when the main clock reaches the proper period break or overtime length and opens when any other value is entered The switch closes when the main clock is stopped and opens when the main clock is running External devices are disabled when the main clock is running The switch closes when the main horn sounds This could be when Auto Horn is enabled and the main clock reaches zero or when HORN is presse
202. controller systems will use channel 1 for the first controller other controllers will use sequential channel settings 2 8 The following table describes broadcast channel and channel settings 5000 SETTINGS The LCD shows the current radio settings along with a prompt to accept or modify these values CAST CHAN pone The LCD will toggle these Screens If the radio settings are correct press lt ENTER gt If these values are incorrect press CLEAR BLAST GROUP 1 If CLEAR is pressed to modify the radio settings RADIO CHAN 01 the LCD at the left is shown allowing edit of the channel or broadcast group setting Edit the broadcast setting Use the number keys to enter the desired broadcast group and press ENTER to accept ENTER ACCEPT Broadcast Group Setting CLEAR TO MODIFY 1 Use this setting for all single controller The bottom line shows Systems the asterisk will move to the channel setting Use the number keys to edit this value and press ENTER to accept Edit the channel number to the desired value and press ENTER to accept Channel Setting 1 8 Channels that may be used with broadcast channel 1 The channel switch on the receiver must match this value and only the Broadcast 1 BCAST1 jumper must be installed default settings Basic Operations Multiple Controller w Single Broadcast Group Channel Setting Typically all single controller systems will use Broadcast 1 and Cha
203. cs identifies individual drawings This number is located in the bottom right corner of the drawing The manual will refer to drawings by the last five digits and the letter preceding them In the example the drawing would be referred to as Drawing A 69945 The drawings are located at the end of each section and in Appendix A DAKTRONICS INC BROOKINGS SD 57006 PROJ BASKETBALL TITLE SEGMENTATION 7 SEG BAR DIGIT DES BY BPETERSON DRAWN BY TNELSON 8 JUL 02 7087 P08A 69945 Figure1 Drawing number location Introduction 1 1 1 1 2 Console Overview The Sport 5000 Series console is a state of the art scoring and timing system The console s liquid crystal display LCD will guide you through the operation of the system As a safety feature this product has a 3 wire ground type plug equipped with a third grounding pin This plug only fits into a grounding type power outlet Note If you are unable to insert the plug into the outlet contact a qualified electrician to replace the obsolete outlet When opening the packages inspect for shipping damage such as rattles and dents See that all equipment is included as shown on the packing slip Immediately report any deficiencies to Daktronics Save all packing materials for shipping if warranty repair or exchange is needed Revision History Version 1 0 Release Date 3 January 2000 e Initial software release Version 1 0 1 Release Date 11 January
204. ct ON and OFF for captions controlled by control 1 Press the 2 key to select ON and OFF for captions controlled by control 2 210 Volleyball Operations Switch Output The Sport 5000 series console has a switch that can be used to drive a number of different devices The switch can be configured to operate under different settings The default setting is 1 CLOCK 0 To display the switch setting that you want to select Press the number 0 1 2 3 key as a shortcut or use the left and right arrow keys to scroll to the desired setting Press YES to select the new setting Press NO or the down arrow key to leave the switch setting and display the next prompt The possible settings for the switch output are as follows 0 DISABLED SWITCH D DISRBLEDP N current setting The switch remains open at all times and any external devices are disabled In count down mode the switch closes when the main SWITCH DUTPUT PI clock reaches zero and remains closed until a nonzero 07 value is entered N current setting In count up mode the switch closes when the main clock reaches the proper period break or overtime length and opens when any other value is entered Th hen th lock d and e switch closes when the main clock is stopped an IIT SWITCH GUTPUT N opens when the main clock is running External devices STOPP are disabled when th
205. cted for that key When a new batsman number is selected the score on the scoreboard will change to show that batsman s score Cricket Operations 283 Batsman Left Batsman Right LEFT BATSMAN and RIGHT BATSMAN set the Home and Guest Batsman numbers for the players that are currently batting LCD Display HOME BATSMAN BER NN current value Runs 1 4 6 LCD Display LEFT RUNS HORE Y current setting Runs 1 Press Home or Guest LEFT BATSMAN to set the left batsman s number for that team The current setting will show on the LCD When finished do the same for the right batsman Use the keypad to enter a new number and press lt ENTER gt The number can only be set from 1 to 11 The number will default to 11 if any number above eleven is entered Press the appropriate run key RUNS 1 gt RUNS 4 gt RUNS 6 gt to increment the total number of runs for the left or right batsman The LCD shows which key was pressed and the new value for the corresponding batter RUNS 1 gt is used to make corrections if an entry error has occurred LCD Display LEFT RUNS 1 Y current setting Press the appropriate lt RUNS 1 gt key to decrement the total number of runs for the left or right batsman The LCD shows which key was pressed and the new value for the corresponding batter Cricket Operations Extras 1 LCD Display EXTRA RUNS i
206. current setting of full time outs remaining Enter the correct number of full time outs on the number pad and press ENTER Press lt EDIT gt TIME OUT gt for the home or guest team a second time or the down arrow key to display the current setting of full time outs remaining Enter the correct number of partial time outs on the number pad and press ENTER The home and guest SCORE 1 1 gt keys are all edited in the same way LCD Display TEAM nnn NNN current setting Press EDIT and the appropriate statistic key to display the current setting For example SCORE 1 1 gt Enter the correct number on the number pad and press ENTER Water Polo Operations 299 Period 1 LCD Display PERIOD EDIT Press EDIT PERIOD 1 gt to display the current N quarter setting N current seing Enter the correct quarter number on the number pad and press ENTER The full time outs are reset Time Out On Off LCD Display TIME DUTS EDIT Press lt EDIT gt TIME OUT gt to display the current time setting for full time outs FULL _ 18 55 10 55 minutes seconds Enter the correct time on the number pad and press lt gt DUT EDIT Press TIME OUT gt a second time or the 2 down arrow key to display the configured time for PARTIAL 77 55 partial time out length 17 55 minutes seconds Enter t
207. d Write the settings for this installation in the space Custom provided Yes Cd 2000 BrakLengh 1500 J Overtime Length 500 id 200 MajorPenaty 5 FuTmeOus __ Partial Time Outs o Timeout ooo o Switch Output Clock 0 148 Hockey Options Section 10 Soccer Operations Sport Insert LL 2440 The Sport Insert drawing is located at the end of this section The Team Name insert and Block Diagram drawings are located in Appendix A The Quick Reference is located in Appendix D Reference Drawings Block Diagrams A S5000 3000 Outdoor Sports Drawing A 124690 Insert SOCGCebs vene diia Drawing A 125215 Insert Team cir d rene Drawing A 125290 Refer to the information in Section 2 to start up the console and use the sport insert Read Section 2 carefully to fully understand the following operation instructions If an insert is lost or damaged a copy of the insert drawing located at the end of this section can be used until a replacement can be ordered Use the labels provided in Appendix B to attach the correct code number label to the sport insert in the appropriate location Write the code number in the space provided below Write the correct code num
208. d points for all players in the home roster Press to decline the selection Press the down arrow key to scroll to the next selection The Display Menu allows the user to start and edit the segment timer or to change the brightness of the scoreboard l iENU PIRIN ENTER ISPLRS MENUS Press YES to select the Display submenu show the first prompt on the LCD Press the down arrow key to scroll to the next selection Baseball Operations 55 RENL DBISPLBS RUN Note The segment timer function is disabled while the clock is running SEG TIMER Press YES to exit the sport code and run the segment timer program Press or the down arrow key to scroll to the next selection EXIT GARE This prompt confirms that the user wants to exit BRE YOU SURE Y N the sport code and enter the segment timer Note The SEGMENT TIMER LL 2475 insert must be inserted to enter the Segment Timer settings Refer to Section 3 for more information on the segment timer Press lt YES gt to exit the sport code and run the segment timer program Press or the down arrow key to scroll to the next selection Continued on next page Baseball Operations Continued from previous page RENU Press lt 0 gt through lt 9 gt or use the arrow keys LEVEL 0 8 NN to select the intensity for the digits on the scoreboard NN cur
209. d in the EDIT SETTINGS function are displayed on the LCD and available for selection please refer to the table on the following page Note 2 The up and down arrow keys can also be used to select the full and partial time outs Hockey Options 133 LCD Display TINE GUT HOnE FULL N current setting TINE PARTIALE I N current setting TINE BGUT HOnE GUTS Press TIME to display the number of full time outs remaining To accept the full time out and start the time out clock press YES Full time out decrements To decline the selection of a full time out press Full time out does not decrement Note The up and down arrow keys can also be used to select the full and partial time outs Press TIME a second time to display the number of partial time outs remaining To accept the partial time out and start the time out clock press YES Partial time out decrements To decline the selection of a partial time out press lt gt Partial time out does not decrement Note The up and down arrow keys can also be used to select the full and partial time outs This message appears when there are no time outs left 134 Hockey Options Player Penalty LCD Display HOME LPNN current setting HOME LPN PN TSS NN player number 17 56 penalty time Press PLAYER PENALTY to
210. de LCD Display RENU PRIN Press YES to begin selection of a new code from the ENTER CODE prompt NEU CODE Press NO to resume the game in progress using the current data and exit the Menu Press the down arrow key to scroll to the next selection Home Roster Guest Roster Home Roster and Guest Roster are entered in the same way Home Roster is used as an example LCD Display RENU ROSTER Press YES or the right or left arrow key to select the Home or Guest Roster submenu and show the 7 SELELT HOME first prompt on the LCD Press NO to resume the game in progress using the current data and exit the Menu Press the down arrow key to scroll to the next selection HDRE TEB NAME The TEAM NAME LL 2441 insert must be A inserted to enter the Team Name Message RRRRRRRRRRRRR Center settings The TNMC is updated after each selection is completed Use the COLUMNS ROWS and STROKE keys to select the WIDTH HEIGHT and FONT of the TNMC The defaults are 48 columns 8 rows and single stroke Enter up to fifteen 15 characters for the team name and press ENTER Reinsert the VOLLEYBALL LL 2434 insert to continue Volleyball Operations 201 Continued from previous page LCD Display Action The TEAM NAME LL 2441 insert must be BBBR inserted to enter the Team Name Message RRRRRRRRRR Center TNMC settings
211. diet 89 SCOIGSE T 2 REIR REN IER TRE HE EVER Hie Ee 89 tnim 90 Intoa A S EIES AAE E E EREA ed ee DP E have 90 Time Out OO A a 90 7 2 acie n eite ODE ir e 91 91 o 91 Home Roster Guest 92 Display M nu RES 93 Edit SettIngs ut tre qa de o er dete ei a rond 95 of Day pH pa Cab a eate es 95 7 3 ie dien aee cente 96 Number of 96 Main Glock uae aie demande IRE be REUS 97 SHOE ClOCK c iene 98 eren RII NN RB E 99 SCORE T m 100 eere t mee ECCO MS to eet Da esc 101 Select hee ehe he et e o a e i caus t ei e e 101 Select Team Foul Display rtt n RU eA REUS 102 Score by Quarter es ate E etur edente erbe em t s 102 Switch ore e etti soe tei 102 Settings eibi 104 Section 8 Football Operati
212. displayed if no errors are found SUB IND SUB HORE This message is displayed for the following reasons SUB NOT The player going into the game is already marked as in the game The player coming out of the game is not marked as in the game IND SUB HORE This message is displayed if the player going in or the NOT FOUND NN player coming out of the game is found in the roster Y current setting Press YES to correct the jersey number Enter the correct jersey number and press ENTER 196 Volleyball Operations Mass Substitution LCD Display MASS 5 PLAYER current setting 1955 SUB H TIE SUB MASS SUB H TTIE DUPLICATE NN current setting 1955 5 NOT FOUND Y current setting After the home or guest MASS SUB key is pressed the LCD will display a message on the LCD asking for the first of six player numbers that are going into the game Enter the jersey number on the number pad and press ENTER for each of the six players Press at any time to exit the Mass Substitution function When the home or guest MASS SUB key is pressed this prompt asks the jersey number of the first player entering the game Enter the jersey number of the each of the six players entering the game on the number pad and press lt ENTER gt This message is displayed if no errors are found This message displays for each dup
213. e ML 150 151 JUDA PK 152 CORE ET SL sss iterom ane dette tete d texte AT A e cm Ret 153 Other Increment and Decrement 153 Edit 2458 ite tie nai pete GA POUR RUPEE 153 lr 153 Time Out On Off reete e rene cete eet 154 154 Score r T sl sce ver RR ee 155 Other Increment and Decrement 155 155 156 New EE 156 Home Roster Guest 156 Display 157 Seti a ete 159 159 Setti 160 160 Corner Kicks Saves or 5 161 Time ctae n DR HE AY EORR E e Rel 161 Display PenaltyZEOL i pee eet pe det eerte p 163 Switch Output Inepte ee e tei uet tei fe eto php Ite eds 163 164 Reset RS omite 167 Reset Game nda RIO ET 167 Numbers T eut eut tutt st 167
214. e Added a second H segment for colons on penalty time to the sec 1 digit in hockey for FP 25 displays Changed the DSTI interface so it would not send back data it received but only update the scoreboards Added boxing code 291 for BB 3000 scoreboards Added the driver data for a BA 2010 to the BA 5 driver at address 61 Added the driver data for FB 2005 to FB 8 driver at address 11 Introduction Added 32 column captions for BB 3000 boards for TMFLS TOL at address 225 Changed delete of penalty time in hockey so it will scroll penalty time 2 up instead of bringing in time from penalty time 3 Version 1 5 1 Release Date 27 December 2001 Fixed the timeout indicators so they will clear when the main clock is started Changed the timeout function so it will turn on the indicator but not the timeout time when the configured time is set to zero Fixed the track code running time output address 22 so the colon will light when the colon is on in the RTD data Added address 2 to all auto racing codes for LC230 and LC218 displays except lane timer 303 Default segment timer for 5 minutes Version 1 5 2 Release Date 6 March 2002 Added shot clock timing to hockey lacrosse Added pen fouls display selection in addition to SOG and saves in soccer Added code 4499 for paint ball that uses hockey insert but has 3 penalty times that count In basketball added team fouls display on line 6 of player fouls stats and made its display config
215. e LCD Display INJURY TIME EDIT HORE __ 10 55 17 55 current setting Action Press EDIT and either of the BLOOD TIME keys for the home or guest team to display the current blood time setting Enter the maximum allowed blood time in minutes and seconds on the number pad and press the ENTER gt key For example 5 00 Press lt EDIT gt and either of the INJURY TIME keys for the home or guest team to display the current injury time setting Enter the maximum allowed injury time in minutes and seconds on the number pad and press the ENTER key For example 5 00 Match Number Period Team Score and Match Score The home and guest MATCH NUMBER 1 gt PERIOD 1 gt lt SCORE 1 1 gt and MATCH SCORE 1 2 3 1 gt keys are all edited in the same way Team Score is used as an example Wrestling Operations 221 LCD Display TESA SCORE EDIT Press lt gt and the appropriate statistic key to display the current setting For example TEAM SCORE 41 1 gt NNN YN current setting Enter the correct number on the number pad and press lt ENTER gt 222 Wrestling Operations 14 3 Menu The MENU key allows the user to select from a list of options specific for each sport The up and down arrow keys allow the user to scroll through the menu list Pressing a key other than YES the arrow keys and other allowed keys exits the
216. e CYCLE KPH MPH gt key displays kilometers per hour followed by miles per hour Cycle Time LCD Display CYCLE TINE This setting determines the length of time each 2 speed reading is displayed MPH and KPH before nn 55 displaying the opposite reading fif 55 current cycle time Note If the console is set to cycle a Y will be displayed next to CYCLE on the LCD menu Press CYCLE or CYCLE gt to set console to cycle mode 66 Pitch and Speed Pitch Count Keys Home and Guest Pressing one of the pitch count keys will increment the value by one To edit one of the values use EDIT as described below LCD Display PITCHER To edit one of the pitch count values press lt EDIT gt NNI and then press the key of the item to be modified STRIKE NNN The current value will be shown on the LCD Enter NNN current value the new value on the number pad and press lt gt Clear Pitch Count LCD Display Action 5 PITEHER Press CLEAR PITCH COUNTS and the console m will display the question Clear Press CLEAR ALL ENTER to clear the pitch counts or lt CLEAR gt to abort the operation Display Home Guest Count Pressing DISPLAY HOME COUNT or DISPLAY GUEST COUNT will send the RTD information with a specific frame number for Home or Guest This frame number can be used to select the pitch count frame on a matrix
217. e 234 15 3 Time Base ERR UR TITRE 234 Days teint nia Sadi RUIN enean owe ht a DOS 234 T cr ment e IE ru eie dtque o pc IU d 235 Decrement aluet bate etu ees 235 Pam Ente rv s ete ac er t bo rte Er ERO GT ERU RE EE Re YR 235 15 4 External Input Counter eeu apertas et d eius 236 ee uEROHCER EB BLISS RR 236 Increment Value 236 Decrement Value tester evene 236 15 5 237 NeW Games assa Rea bte tentat nate e 237 New COE 2 Sich REI pM a 237 Diin Bright z eese er neve nib ie 238 SLOP at Zero i s DE iet s 238 16 1 239 WW Zaatl ect reme p pee m eee te ete 239 ECL H R P 239 M MuUbOD1 mt t iia ecd ie edes 240 ERE 240 AM 240 16 2 d RUE 240 WHM J 6 28 ogee ite eS E cette o ae 240 16 3 241 241 D 241 Display Menu oot omm
218. e 300 so the lap time shows on the old CH14 xx displays Introduction 15 Added custom code 9606 for the San Francisco 49ers football board Added code 9100 for BB 2139 basketball board with 12 electronic player name captions Added period digit to soccer for a new SO 2013 board to address 14 uses addresses 13 and 14 and also to hockey lacrosse address 14 Added power on caption segments to the BB stats addresses 36 and 37 Added save of baseball basketball RTD to GIP when exit of stats mode is done This allows for recovery of current game data if stats feed is lost Version 2 0 9 Release Date 25 October 2004 Added captions for H G WEIGHT to wrestling and set correct captions for codes 3101 to 3105 Fixed the clear stats function in volleyball so it updates after the clear and does not take players out of the game Changed the score of 1 3 6 in football so that it will blank ball on down to go Added team name abbreviations address 222 for the main sports Fixed electronic team name captions for USD by adding a code for basketball football and volleyball that supported an outdoor controller that shifts left to right Fixed the tennis team name captions top and bottom so the length can be set Added custom code 9108 for Brigham Young University for a retrofit of their old board Version 2 1 0 Release Date 02 February 2005 Added a code for running wrestling on a hockey and basketball board combo H 2104 BB 2124
219. e Roster and Guest Roster are entered in the same way Home Roster is used as an example LCD Display RFENU ROSTER Press YES or the right or left arrow key to select the Home or Guest Roster submenu and show the 7 SELELT HONE first prompt on the LCD Press NO to resume the game in progress using the current data and exit the Menu Press the down arrow key to scroll to the next selection The TEAM NAME LL 2441 insert must be 8889998888898 gt inserted to enter the Team Name Message Center TNMC settings The is updated after each selection is completed Use the COLUMNS ROWS and STROKE keys to select the WIDTH HEIGHT and FONT of the TNMC The defaults are 48 columns 8 rows and single stroke Enter up to fifteen 15 characters for the team name and press ENTER Reinsert the TENNIS LL 2483 insert to continue 170 Tennis Operations Display Menu The DISPLAY MENU allows the user to start and edit the segment timer or to change the brightness of the scoreboard LCD Display FENU PBIN ENTER Press YES to select the Display submenu and DISPLAY show the first prompt the LCD 1 L Press the down arrow key to scroll to the next selection FIENU DISPLES RUN Note The segment timer function is disabled while the clock is running SEG Y N 5 Press YES to exit the sport code and run the segment time
220. e and enter the segment timer The SEGMENT TIMER LL 2475 insert must be inserted to enter the Segment Timer settings Refer to Section 3 for more information on the segment timer Press YES to exit the sport code and run the segment timer program Press NO or the down arrow key to scroll to the next selection Continued on next page Wrestling Operations 225 Continued from previous page LCD Display Action PENU Press 0 through or use the arrow keys lt gt lt gt gt to select the intensity for the digits on the LEVEL 0 9 NN scoreboard NN current level Press to resume the game in progress using the current data and exit the Menu Press the down arrow key lt gt to scroll to the next selection Note Dim levels pertain to outdoor LED products Indoor LED and incandescent products only support one level of dimming at 5096 Weight Class The WEIGHT CLASS MENU allows the user to enter the weight class values LCD Display WEIGHT 895 You may enter a total of 14 weight classes Use the NNN LIN up and down 1 1 arrow keys to select the index of the weight class to edit and press lt ENTER gt NNN weight class WEIGHT CLASS Enter a new value for the weight class and press n NNN IN lt ENTER gt WEIGHT CLASS You can set the winner of this weight class here D MIN This would be used mainly for editi
221. e bottom line on the LCD Press lt EDIT gt lt SET gt to edit the current set number Press EDIT MATCH NUMBER 1 gt to edit the current match number 168 Tennis Operations Matches Won LCD Display PATCHES WON EDIT Press EDIT MATCH WON 1 gt to edit the current matches won for the selected team Y current matches won 11 3 Menu The MENU key allows the user to select from a list of options specific for each sport The up and down arrow keys allow the user to scroll through the menu list Pressing a key other than YES the arrow keys and other allowed keys exit the Menu function The MENU function should be used at the beginning of each new game to edit the Home and Guest Rosters New Game LCD Display RENU PBIN Press YES to clear all of the program data for the last game played or the game in progress and begin 7 2 NEW DAME running the selected sport Press lt NO gt to resume the game in progress using the current data and exit the Menu Press the down arrow key to scroll to the next selection New Code LCD Display RENU PRIN Press YES to begin selection of a new code from the ENTER CODE prompt NEW CODE ig Press NO to resume the game in progress using the current data and exit the Menu Press the down arrow key to scroll to the next selection Tennis Operations 169 Home Roster Guest Roster Hom
222. e main clock is running N current setting TORN Th h cl hen th h ds Th e switch closes when the main horn sounds is IITDIIT SWITCH GUTPUTH N could be when Auto Horn is enabled and the main 3 FIBIN HORNO clock reaches zero or when HORN is pressed N current setting Volleyball Operations 211 Default Settings Write the settings for this installation in the space Custom provided a Break Length Update Player User Def 1 Time Outs o Time Out ooo Main Clock Mode Tenths Switch Output 1 Clock 0 212 Volleyball Operations Section 14 Wrestling Operations Sport Insert LL 2435 The Sport Insert drawing is located at the end of this section The Team Name insert and Block Diagram drawings are located in Appendix A The Quick Reference is located in Appendix D Reference Drawings Block Diagrams A S5000 3000 BB VB amp WR 1 Drawing A 124686 Block Diagrams A S5000 3000 BB VB 8 WR 3 Drawing A 124688 Insert Drawing A 124701 Insert Team ceu ugs Drawing A 125290 Block Diagrams A S5000 3000 BB VB 8 WR 2 Drawing A 125415 Refer to the information in Section 2 to start up the console and use the sport insert Read Section 2 carefu
223. e next selection Note Dim levels pertain to outdoor incandescent products Indoor LED products only support one level of dimming at 5096 When the LCD Display is as shown the following actions may be selected LCD Displa Action 0 0 PFIENU PIRIN EDIT SETTINGS Press YES or the right or left arrow key to select the Settings submenu and show the first prompt on the LCD Refer to Section 16 4 Press NO to resume the game in progress using the current data and exit the Menu Press the down arrow key to scroll to the next selection Karate Operations 243 Time of Day LCD Displa Action 000 0 00 y Press YES or the right arrow key to select the TL Time of Day submenu and show the first prompt on SELECT TOD Press to resume the game in progress using the current data and exit the Menu PENLI TIRE GF Press 1 or 2 to display the time of day in 12 hour default or 24 hour format 742 2 24 HOUR 5955 Press lt gt or the down arrow key to scroll to the next selection Enter the time of day in hours minutes and seconds using the selected format on the number pad and press ENTER 55 current setting Press ENTER or the down arrow key to scroll to the next selection OF DAY Press 1 or 2 to display the game clock default wi GAME TOD current setting
224. e number of full time outs remaining To accept the full time out and start the time out clock press YES Full time out decrements To decline the selection of a full time out press Full time out does not decrement Note The up and down arrow keys can also be used to select the full and partial time outs Press TIME OUT gt a second time to display the number of partial time outs remaining To accept the partial time out and start the time out clock press YES Partial time out decrements To decline the selection of a partial time out press Partial time out does not decrement Note The up and down arrow keys can also be used to select the full and partial time outs This message appears when there are no time outs left 152 Soccer Options Score 1 1 The home and guest SCORE 1 gt and SCORE 1 gt keys are used to increment and decrement the team score LCD Display TEAM SCORE 1 nnn NNN current setting Press the appropriate score key to increment or decrement the score for the home or guest team The LCD shows which key was pressed and the new value for the team score of the corresponding team Other Increment and Decrement Keys The home and guest SHOTS ON GOAL 1 1 gt lt SAVES 1 1 gt CORNER KICKS 1 1 gt lt FOULS 1 1 gt and PENALTY KICKS 1 1 gt keys are all edited in the same way Saves is used as an example LCD D
225. e out length To accept the partial time out length and press YES To decline the selection of the partial time out length press To change the partial time out length enter the new length in minutes and seconds on the number pad and press ENTER Press lt gt twice to clear changes and return to the game Notes Only the time outs configured in the EDIT SETTINGS function are displayed on the LCD and available for selection The up and down arrow keys can also be used to select the full and partial time outs Press HALF 1 gt to increment the half number A prompt showing period number will display briefly Soccer Operations 151 Time Out The home and guest TIME OUT keys are used to decrement the number of time outs remaining and start the time out clock The scoreboard indicator is turned on when the type of time out is selected full or partial The scoreboard indicator is turned off when the time out clock expires or is stopped Note 1 Only the types full or partial of time outs that were configured in the EDIT SETTINGS function are displayed on the LCD and available for selection Note 2 The up and down arrow keys can also be used to select the full and partial time outs LCD Display DUTS HORE FULL N N current setting TNE GuTS HOPE PARTIAL N N current setting TNE GUTS AOME GUTS Action Press TIME OUT gt to display th
226. e outs that were configured in the EDIT SETTINGS function are displayed on the LCD and available for selection Note 2 The up and down arrow keys can also be used to select the full and partial time outs LCD Display DUT HORE FULL N N current setting GUT HOnlE PARTIAL N N current setting TINE na nne GUTS Press TIME to display the number of full time outs remaining To accept the full time out and start the time out clock press YES Full time out decrements To decline the selection of a full time out press lt gt Full time out does not decrement Note The up and down arrow keys can also be used to select the full and partial time outs Press TIME a second time to display the number of partial time outs remaining To accept the partial time out and start the time out clock press YES Partial time out decrements To decline the selection of a partial time out press NO Partial time out does not decrement Note The up and down arrow keys can also be used to select the full and partial time outs This message appears when there are no time outs left Football Options 111 Score 1 2 3 6 1 The home and guest lt SCORE 1 gt lt SCORE 2 gt lt SCORE 3 gt and lt SCORE 6 gt keys are used to increment the team score and the lt SCORE 1 gt key is used to decrement the team score These keys will also
227. e player who scored the points and press lt ENTER gt Volleyball Operations 199 Time Out On Off LCD Display TIME DUTS EDIT Press EDIT TIME OUT gt to display the current time setting for full time outs FULL 17 55 11 55 minutes seconds Enter the correct time on the number pad and press lt ENTER gt TIRE DLIT EDIT Press TIME OUT gt a second time or the down arrow key to display the configured time for 101 PARTIAL partial time out length 17 56 minutes seconds Enter the correct time on the number pad and press ENTER 13 3 Menu The MENU key allows the user to select from a list of options specific for each sport The up and down arrow keys allow the user to scroll through the menu list Pressing a key other than YES the arrow keys and other allowed keys exits the Menu function The MENU function should be used at the beginning of each new game to edit the Home and Guest Rosters New Game When the LCD Display is as shown the following actions may be selected LCD Display FIENU PBIN Press YES to clear all of the program data for the last game played or the game in progress and begin NEU GANEP NEW GAME running the selected sport Press NO to resume the game in progress using the current data and exit the Menu Press the down arrow key to scroll to the next selection 200 Volleyball Operations New Co
228. e scoreboard Sometimes a sequence of keys must be pressed before a change is noticed on the scoreboard Keys that require entry of additional information are marked by a dot This additional information usually is a number followed by the ENTER key Keys with arrows activate an indicator possession bonus etc on the scoreboard The direction of the arrow selects the appropriate team home or guest Some keys have a 1 2 or 3 By pressing one of these keys once the corresponding field on the scoreboard such as team score or period increments increases by the amount printed on the key A key with a 1 decrements decreases by one and a key with a 1 increments increases by one On most inserts certain keys have been grouped together under the heading Home or Guest These keys are team keys and work the same for both teams They affect the statistics for that one team Keys not under one of these headings are game keys They are general keys for the progress of the game such as period or quarter Other keys have been blocked together to emphasize that these keys work together 22 Basic Operations 2 4 Start Up When the LCD Display is as shown the following actions may be selected The console performs a self test when it is x 95 5000 01 0 0 powered on During the self test a message displays the version of the standard software loaded in the console V version number and revision number
229. e the ui advantage timer RD TA gt G NN main clock Press the lt GREEN ADVANTAGE or advantage timer GUEST RED ADVANTAGES key to start the or H guest or home advantage timer for the competitor that has control of the match The competitor that has the net most advantage time is shown on the LCD display H or gt G The timer AD TM on the display counts up down depending on which competitor is in control last advantage key pressed and which competitor has the net most advantage time For example If the home competitor is the first to control the match press lt GREEN ADVANTAGES The display shows H and the timer AD TM counts up When the guest competitor gains control press GUEST RED gt The display continues to show H because home still has the net advantage but the timer AD TM counts down The timer continues to count down until the GREEN ADVANTAGES is pressed again or the timer reaches zero If zero is reached the display shows G which now has the net advantage and the timer counts up Press the STOP ADVANTAGE CLOCK key to stop the advantage timer when neither competitor is in control 216 Wrestling Operations Team Score 1 1 LCD Display TEAM SCORE i N current setting Match Score 1 2 3 1 Press lt SCORE 1 gt or lt SCORE 1 gt to increment or decrem
230. e with the default code settings Press NO to resume the game in progress using the current data and exit the Menu Press the down arrow key to scroll to the next selection Press YES to begin selection of a new code from the ENTER CODE prompt Press NO to resume the game in progress using the current data and exit the Menu Press the down arrow key to scroll to the next selection Event Counter 237 Diny Bright LCD Display RENU Press 0 through or use the arrow keys LEVEL 0 8 NING the intensity for the digits on the NN current level bright 3096 8096 10 5096 50 096 0 2096 1096 Press to resume the game in progress using the current data and exit the Menu Press the down arrow key lt gt to scroll to the next selection Note Dim levels pertain to outdoor LED products Indoor LED and incandescent products only support one level of dimming at 5096 Stop at Zero The following setting is only displayed when using Day and Time codes 371 and 372 LCD Display STOP AT ZERO Press YES to stop the console when zero days and zero time occurs UES5 UR NUP Default 10 Press NO to set the console to start counting time elapsed since the event occurs 238 Event Counter Section 16 Karate Operations Sport Insert 0G 96890 Red White Code 282 0G 98374 White Red Code 285 The
231. eat information If an external timer code is selected the Guest 2 and Guest 3 keys will be disabled and event heat information will be taken from the external timer When the value is set to SCORE the scoreboard will display scores for guests 2 and 3 on the scoreboard The scores will be obtained from the Guest 2 and Guest 3 keys on the keypad The current value is shown by the location of the asterisk Press the left or right arrow key to change the value to score or event heat respectively Continued on next page 186 Track Operations Continued from previous page LCD Display Action Notes If Event Heat is selected the Event Heat value will be updated automatically when an external timer code is used Use the SCORE setting if you do not want the values to be updated externally in an external timer code Switch Output The Sport 5000 series console has a switch that can be used to drive a number of different devices The switch can be configured to operate under different settings The default setting is 1 CLOCK 0 To display the switch setting that you want to select e Press the number 0 1 2 3 key as a shortcut or use the left and right arrow keys to scroll to the desired setting e Press YES to select the new setting e Press lt NO gt or the down arrow key to leave the switch setting and display the next prompt The possible settings for the switch output are as follows 0 DISABLE
232. ection can be used until a replacement can be ordered 15 1 General Event Counter Information Note The Sport 5000 uses Enhanced RTD with Venus 4600 7000 codes The Event Counter program is made up of six codes used to display information about external events The codes used for event counter are shown below Day and Time Event Countdown Code Venus 1500 RTD 371 Venus 4600 7000 Enhanced RTD 372 Time Base Counter Code Venus 1500 RTD 373 Venus 4600 7000 Enhanced RTD 374 External Input Counter Code Venus 1500 RTD 375 Venus 4600 7000 Enhanced RTD 376 RTD port settings are 19 200 Baud 8 Data and no parity for both Venus 1500 and Enhanced RTD types 15 2 Day and Time Event Countdown LCD Display 8 6 NNN If set to count down the number of days hours T minutes and seconds remaining until the event HAAS 5 Y occurs are shown on the main LCD screen 55 current value If set to count up the number of days hours 0896 NNN minutes and seconds elapsed since the event HHA 55 d occurred are shown on the main LCD screen Event Counter 233 Value Days Use the SET MAIN gt key to set the Time in addition to the number of days to be counted Press START to start the main clock If the console is set to count down the time value decrements to 00 00 00 and the day value decrements by one This continues until 0 days and 00 00 00 time occurs The console then begins counting up and counts the
233. ed auto increment of inning to baseball and the ability to turn the auto increment on off When the inning is incremented it also sets the current team score to 0 if blank and changes the at bat indicator Version 1 1 1 Release Date 10 May 2000 Corrected error in BB 2041 driver 2 driver table in basketball player foul points points x10 column 7 This error will only be found in release 1 1 0 Added scoreboard test program code 0002 Version 1 2 0 Release Date 01 August 2000 Added event counter codes 371 376 Added judo codes 281 and 284 Added karate codes 282 and 285 Added tae kwon do codes 283 and 286 Added multi purpose timer code 100 Added dedicated segment timer code 99 Added auto racing codes 301 333 336 401 433 995 Added a configurable warning time to segment timer program Added clock console codes in basketball 1000 and football 6000 Added shots on goal console code in hockey 4000 Introduction Fixed ball on function to exit when a key was pressed after an illegal key value e Fixed problem with hockey shots on goal and home player 1 penalty number e Fixed dimming problem causing scoreboard to blank when dim level was changed Added momentary relay closure setting for analog clock operation in soccer codes Added a RID heartbeat clock packet changed routine to update clock RTD once second when counting down Modified routines to accept a clear key press and blank scoreboard data
234. ed time for partial time out length HIL Iii 11 55 minutes seconds To accept the partial time out length press YES To decline the selection of the partial time out length press To change the partial time out length enter the new length in minutes and seconds on the number pad and press lt ENTER gt Press lt gt twice to clear changes and return to the game Blank Player Foul Blanks the digits of the Player Foul field of the scoreboard Period 1 LCD Display PERIDD 4 1 Press PERIOD 1 gt to increment the period number The full and partial time outs and team fouls are automatically reset at halftime n N current setting 80 Basketball Operations Time Out The home and guest TIME OUT keys are used to decrement the number of time outs remaining and start the time out clock The scoreboard indicator is turned on when the type of time out is selected full or partial The scoreboard indicator is turned off when the time out clock expires or is stopped Note 1 Only the types full or partial of time outs that were configured in the EDIT SETTINGS function are displayed on the LCD and available for selection Note 2 The up and down arrow keys can also be used to select the full and partial time outs LCD Display DUT HORE FUL N N current setting TNE PARTIAL N N current setting TINE GUT HOnlE GUTS Press lt TIME OUT g
235. ee pecie 185 Tutie of iet tuni mti ef eed dd 185 186 Gue st 2 and Guest 3 key function ane oett eee e eso ete 186 Switch Output 22 2 03 1 B p ATP Er Bien EDU 187 Default Settings noD E Bee oe SS 188 13 1 Volleyball Operations Volleyball KEYS mainin 5500 0 eee ethernet ter tr 190 Time Qut On Off ist e dt ete eee ege ete eme ec etel teo tees 190 190 Match Number 1 Games 1 191 ssec en Bio toc er ete M EE 192 d Lesen UE EB IRE 192 Aces Kills Blocks A DI S A 192 SEVE soa anni 193 In Game Out of er eee dee 193 Delete Player ie na RR recom eS 193 Table of Contents vii Individual Substitution 196 Mass 50 5 197 13 2 E cr 198 Match Number 1 Games 198 Tire O RNC E DRE PUE 198 I 199 Games Won Pl aec etie treo dene 199 Aces Kills Blocks and Dis reete te rre t Hee e eee ea ee e in 199 Tame Out On Off n tam betont Stab nr amt 200 13 3 mI oh RIDE ERE E 200 200 Bau edu e 201 Home Roster Guest
236. egment timer or to change the brightness of the scoreboard LCD Display RENU PRRIN ENTER Press YES to select the Display submenu and DISPLAY show the first prompt on the LCD 1 Press the down arrow key to scroll to the next selection Note The segment timer function is disabled while FIENU DISPLB S RUN the clock is running SEG TIMER S N Press YES to exit the sport code and run the segment timer program Press NO or the down arrow key to scroll to the next selection EXIT GARE This prompt confirms that the user wants to exit the ARE YOU SURE S N sport code and enter the segment timer The SEGMENT TIMER LL 2475 insert must be inserted to enter the Segment Timer settings Refer to Section 3 for more information on the segment timer Press YES to exit the sport code and run the segment timer program Press NO or the down arrow key to scroll to the next selection Continued on next page 242 Karate Operations Continued from previous page LCD Display BI ING LEVEL 0 4 NN current level bright C C3 Edit Settings Action Press 0 through 9 or use the arrow keys lt gt lt gt gt to select the intensity for the digits on the scoreboard Press to resume the game in progress using the current data and exit the Menu Press the down arrow key lt gt to scroll to th
237. elect the period time as the main clock setting will increment the current period number if the clock value was previously zero Press lt CLEAR gt twice to clear changes and return to the game Continued on next page Basic Operations 33 Continued from previous page LCD Display MAIN CLOCK EDIT BREAK 17 55 17 55 minutes seconds MAN CLOCK EDIT OT _ 10 55 17 55 minutes seconds Action Press SET MAIN CLOCK a third time or the down arrow key to display the configured time for break length To accept the break length press YES To decline the selection of the break length press To change the break length and set the main clock enter the new time in minutes and seconds on the number pad and press ENTER Press CLEAR twice to clear changes and return to the game Press SET MAIN CLOCK a fourth time or the down arrow key to display the configured time for overtime length To accept the overtime length press lt YES gt To decline the selection of the overtime length press lt gt To change the overtime length and set the main clock enter the new time in minutes and seconds on the number pad and press lt ENTER gt Press lt CLEAR gt twice to clear changes and return to the game Continued on next page 34 Basic Operations Continued from previous page LCD Display Action Press SET MAIN CLOCK a fifth time or
238. emove a sport insert pull on the tab that extends from the left side of the console The insert will easily slide out If an insert is lost or damaged a copy of the insert drawing located at the end of each section can be used until a replacement can be ordered Use the labels provided in Appendix B to attach the correct code number to each sport insert Write the code number in the following table and in the space provided in the section of this manual for that sport If you do not know the code number for your scoreboard refer to Appendix B in this manual If you do not know the model number of your scoreboard refer to the Installation and Maintenance manual provided with the scoreboard Sport Insert Number Number Code Basal Basketa ___ Bog _ 0G96892 Cricket 1061649 Event Counter 0G 58047 EE Continued on next page Basic Operations 21 Continued form previous page Judo 06 96891 06 98376 Karate 06 96890 06 9874 o Pitchand Speed __ lL 2488 Soccer 1855240 Strikeout 0048409 ooo Mekwnds 00968806938 eam Name NG ues uas 1 2 3 Sport Insert Operation Concepts A sport insert identifies the actions keys required in the normal course of operation for that specific sport In most cases pressing a key immediately changes th
239. ent the home or guest team score A prompt showing total score will display briefly Pressing a TEAM SCORE key will cause the team scores to show up on the LCD TM will show on the LCD to indicate this Pressing a MATCH SCORE key will cause the match scores to show on the LCD MAT will show up on the LCD to indicate this The home and guest MATCH SCORE 1 gt MATCH SCORE 2 gt and MATCH SCORE 3 gt keys are used to increment the team score and the MATCH SCORE 1 gt key is used to decrement the team score MATCH SCGRE 1 nnn NNN current setting Press the appropriate score key to increment or decrement the score for the home or guest team The LCD shows which key was pressed and the new value for the team score of the corresponding team Pressing a MATCH SCORES key will cause the match scores to show on the LCD MAT will show up on the LCD to indicate this Pressing a lt TEAM SCORE key will cause the team scores to show up on the LCD TM will show on the LCD to indicate this Wrestling Operations 217 Start Stop Injury Time LCD Display INJURY N NN AG TR NNN N gt 6 N NN injury timer N NN N advantage timer guest or home Reset Match LCD Display RESET SELECT The maximum allowed injury time is set for each competitor at the beginning of a match and reset to this time when the Reset Match function is performed
240. er and Guest Roster are entered in the same way Home Roster is used as an example LCD Display fENU ROSTER Press lt YES gt or the right or left arrow key to select the Home or Guest Roster submenu and show the Mar 7 SELECT HONE first prompt on the LCD Press to resume the game in progress using the current data and exit the Menu Press the down arrow key to scroll to the next selection The TEAM NAME LL 2441 insert must be inserted to enter the Team Name Message Center TNMC settings RRRRRRRRRRRRRR Boxers name The TNMC is updated after each selection is completed Use the COLUMNS ROWS and STROKE keys to select the WIDTH HEIGHT and FONT of the TNMC The defaults are 48 columns 8 rows and single stroke Enter up to fifteen 15 characters for the team name and press ENTER Reinsert the Boxing LL 2433 insert to continue 274 Boxing Operations Display Menu The DISPLAY MENU allows the user to start and edit the segment timer or to change the brightness of the scoreboard LCD Display ENTER Press YES to select the Display submenu and DISPLAY show the first prompt on the LCD 1 L Vict Press the down arrow key to scroll the next selection 59184 RUN Note The segment timer function is disabled while the clock is running SEG TIMER Y N d Press lt YES gt to exit the sp
241. ess PERIOD 1 gt to increment the period number n A prompt showing period number displays briefly N current setting Time Out The home and guest TIME OUT keys are used to decrement the number of time outs remaining and start the time out clock The scoreboard indicator is turned on when the type of time out is selected full or partial The scoreboard indicator is turned off when the time out clock expires or is stopped Note 1 Only the types full or partial of time outs that were configured in the EDIT SETTINGS function are displayed on the LCD and available for selection Note 2 The up and down arrow keys can also be used to select the full and partial time outs please refer to the table on the following page Water Polo Operations 295 LCD Display TIRE DUT HORE Press TIME OUT gt to display the number of full time N outs remaining N current setting To accept the full time out and start the time out clock press YES Full time out decrements To decline the selection of a full time out press lt NO gt Full time out does not decrement Note The up and down arrow keys can also be used to select the full and partial time outs DUT HORE Press TIME a second time to display the number of partial time outs remaining PARTIAL N current setting To accept the partial time out and start the time out clock press YES Partial time out decrements To decline the se
242. et the main clock to display tenths of a second Press NO to display whole seconds Enter the correct amount of time per period in minutes and seconds on the number pad and press ENTER For example 15 00 per quarter Note Pressing ENTER to select the period time as the main clock setting will increment the current period number if the clock value was previously zero Set the amount of time between periods Enter the correct amount of time for break length in minutes and seconds on the number pad and press ENTER For example 1 00 Continued on next page 124 Football Options Continued from previous page LCD Display CLOCK TIME Set the amount of time for the overtime periods OVERTIME 1 55 Enter the correct amount of time for overtime periods fif 55 current setting in minutes and seconds on the number pad and press ENTER For example 5 00 Play Clock The PLAY CLOCK setting is used by the remote play clock console Note 1 When RESET ON STOP is set to yes Y the STOP switch automatically resets the play clock using the RESET 1 time and the RESET button uses the RESET 2 time Note 2 When RESET ON STOP is set to no N the STOP switch does not reset the play clock and the RESET button uses the RESET 1 time LCD Display PLAY ELBCE TIRE Enter the correct amount of reset time in minutes and seconds on the number pad and press RESET 7 55 i p lt ENTER gt fi
243. exit the Menu Press 1 or 2 to display the time of day in 12 hour default or 24 hour format Press ENTER or the down arrow key to scroll to the next selection Enter the time of day in hours minutes and seconds using the selected format on the number pad and press lt ENTER gt Press ENTER or the down arrow key to scroll to the next selection Press 1 or 2 to display the game clock default or the time of day clock on the scoreboard Press the down arrow key to exit the Menu and return to the game Tae Kwon Do Operations 253 17 3 Edit The D G and K values are edited in the same way D is shown as an example LCD Display WHITE D EDT NN current setting 17 4 Settings When EDIT D 1 is pressed the current D value is displayed for editing The current value is shown in the n position on the LCD The user can edit the following settings when EDIT SETTINGS has been selected from the Main Menu Auto Manual Timing LCD Display BuTa l IRNURL current setting Switch Output Press the left or right arrow keys to select automatic or manual timing respectively In automatic timing mode the round length value will be loaded into the main clock and automatically started when the rest length expires In manual mode the console will wait for a lt START gt key press to start the round time The Sport 50
244. f 55 current setting For example 00 25 PLAY CLOCS TIRE Enter the correct amount of reset time in minutes pu and seconds on the number pad and press RESET 71 55 lt gt fif 55 current setting For example 00 40 PLAY CLOC Press YES to automatically reset the play clock when the lt STOP gt button on the remote play clock IN 2 RESET GN STOP control console is pressed Press to disable this feature Football Options 125 Time Outs Note 1 If a full or partial time out is not needed for the HOME or GUEST TIME OUT keys enter zero for the number of time outs Note 2 If a full or partial time out is not needed for TIME OUT ON OFF gt enter zero for the time Note 3 The number for each type of time out must be manually entered for an overtime period using the EDIT TIME OUT key sequence for each team LCD Display TIME DUTS nBBE Enter the number of full time outs per half on the DTI number pad and press ENTER The number of full FULL n time outs is automatically reset to this value at N current setting halftime TIME DUTS TIRE Enter the amount of time for a full time out in minutes aa and seconds on the number pad and press FULL 17 59 lt ENTER gt ffi sS current setting For example 1 00 DUT5 FBDE A warning horn can be configured to signal the end of a full partial time out While the time out clock is WARNING 7 55 du
245. f periods 96 Basketball Operations Main Clock Note 1 The settings entered for Main Clock are used with the SET MAIN CLOCK gt key Note 2 The period break and overtime lengths are used differently depending on the direction of the main clock For count down the main clock is set to the selected length decrements towards zero and stops at zero For count up the main clock is set to zero increments towards the selected length and stops when the selected length is reached CLDE amp haDE When the main clock is set to count down and tenths of a second is selected the main clock displays in TONTU ce IN TENTH SEL N tenths of a second remaining when the time is below N current setting one minute Press lt YES gt to set the main clock to display tenths of a second Press lt NO gt to display whole seconds AAN CLDE amp TIRE Enter the correct amount of time per period in minutes and seconds on the number pad and press PERIOD 17 55 ENTER 17 55 current setting For example 20 00 per half or 8 00 per quarter Note Pressing ENTER to select the period time as the main clock setting will increment the current period number if the clock value was previously zero FIGIN ELGCE TIRE Set the amount of time between periods BREAK _ 17 55 fif 55 current setting Enter the correct amount of time for break length in minutes and seconds on the number pad and press lt gt
246. fer to the table on the following page 190 Volleyball Operations LCD Display DUT HORE FULL N N current setting PARTIAL N N current setting na TINE OUTS Press lt TIME OUT gt to display the number of full time outs remaining To accept the full time out and start the time out clock press YES Full time out decrements To decline the selection of a full time out press Full time out does not decrement Note The up and down arrow keys can also be used to select the full and partial time outs Press TIME second time to display the number of partial time outs remaining To accept the partial time out and start the time out clock press YES Partial time out decrements To decline the selection of a partial time out press Partial time out does not decrement Note The up and down arrow keys can also be used to select the full and partial time outs This message appears when there are no time outs left Match Number 1 Games 1 The lt MATCH NUMBER 1 gt and lt GAMES 1 gt keys are both used to increment their respective totals lt GAME 1 gt is used as an example LCD Display GATE NO 1 n N current setting Press the appropriate key to increment statistics for the home or guest team The LCD shows which key was pressed and the new value for the corresponding team Vol
247. for 8 lane track timing Added configuration to soccer for display of TOL or penalty Changed hockey so penalty does not turn off opposite penalty Added a second segment for colon on penalty time to address 29 30 31 32 in code 4104 Added address 11 to codes 9105 9405 9205 Changed auto racing to fix lockup problem when odd numbered start position is set in variable position pylon Version 2 0 6 Release Date 20 November 2003 Changed segment timer so it sends the segment number out on RTD output Fixed wrestling code 3304 so the segment number will show on match score Added captions for PERIOD QUARTER GAME to codes 9105 9405 9205 amp 9605 Added advantage time to foul points on address 14 for code 3102 Added the ability to show at bat time on the AT BAT digits on a BA 3718 Added address 71 to code 7711 for soccer Set football default to auto horn off Fixed auto racing codes so the scoreboard does not stop updating Version 2 0 7 Release Date 30 March 2004 Added a mode for baseball on the SO 2008 Added team name captions for MS 2009 Fixed the test code for soccer so it will test the penalty TOL section Added flashing of a player fouls and points when they are received from the DSTI Added generic stats for basketball so DSTI can display three points shots If the weight classes are turned off in wrestling made the stat panels go blank 14 Introduction Fixed team fouls on stats panels for line 6 guest side did not s
248. ges to RTD output table Modified sport menus to have the display dim selection in the main menu after New Code Version 1 3 1 Release Date 10 January 2001 Changed auto racing to ignore any commas in alpha fields field separators Add power on caption control to address 23 24 25 in football to column 16 of each for code 6611 Change auto racing to default to show current lap in manual codes Change auto racing to display lap in race mode and display lap time in qualify mode Change test code to fix the problem of manual horn key causing the rotating column and row to stop Add output for TI 218 in basketball at address 2 e Fix wrestling adv time problem of switching adv indicator when adv time reaches the main clock period time setting Modify wrestling scoreboard test to display red and green on LCD instead of home and guest e Fix wrestling new game problem of not turning off the adv time clock so when the main clock is started the adv time starts counting down Correct the problem of the period end time not being saved on a loss of power and then resume game Version 1 4 0 Release Date 2 February 2001 e Fixed the scoreboard test program for auto racing boards to not blank the clock section e Added a scoreboard test function for MS 2001 when code 02 is entered without a previous sport code Introduction 7 e Added a new code 6402 for football on hockey 2024 boards Changed auto racing pylon scorebo
249. gt NNN current setting Enter the correct number on the number pad and press ENTER The LCD shows which key was pressed and the new value for the team score of the corresponding team Clear Penalties Press CLEAR ALL PENALTIES to delete all of the penalties for the home or guest team LCD Display HORE PLUR PEN Press lt YES gt to clear the penalties for all players the roster CLEAR ALL Y N Press to decline the selection and return to the game Delete Penalty Press DELETE PENALTY to delete a single penalty for the home or guest team LCD Display HORE DEL PENA Use the up and down arrow keys to scroll to the correct 1PNN PN NNN penalty and press lt gt NN current setting Press CLEAR to decline the selection and return to the game 298 Water Polo Operations 22 2 Edit The lt EDIT gt key allows the user to select and edit the following scoreboard fields Press lt EDIT gt and the key for the home or guest field to be edited Time Out Note 1 Only the time outs configured in the EDIT SETTINGS function are displayed on the LCD and available for selection Note 2 The up and down arrow keys can also be used to select the full and partial time outs LCD Display DUT HORE N current setting TINE GUT HOnlE PARTIAL N current setting Score Press EDIT TIME OUT gt for the home or guest team to display the
250. gt lt 2 gt or lt 3 gt to display Corner Kicks default Saves or Fouls on the scoreboard pee E current setting Time Outs Note 1 If a full or partial time out is not needed for the HOME or GUEST lt TIME OUT gt keys enter zero for the number of time outs Note 2 If a full or partial time out is not needed for TIME OUT ON OFF gt enter zero for the time Note 3 The number for each type of time out must be manually entered for an overtime period using the EDIT TIME OUT key sequence for each team please refer to the table on the following page Soccer Operations 161 LCD Display 075 0 FUL N N current setting THE GUTS THE FULL 1 55 ffi sS current setting THE 5 WARNING 07 55 fif 55 current setting THE 5 PARTIAL N N current setting GUTS THE PARTIAL 01 55 fif 55 current setting THE OUTS MGDE SHOW ON N current setting 1 Y Enter the number of full time outs on the number pad and press lt ENTER gt Enter the amount of time for a full time out in minutes and seconds on the number pad and press ENTER For example 1 00 A warning horn can be configured to signal the end of a full partial time out While the time out clock is counting down the horn will sound for one second when the warning time is reached Enter a zero for the time to disable the warning horn Enter the time in min
251. gt enter zero for the time LCD Display TIME DuTS nBBE Enter the number of full time outs on the number pad N and press lt ENTER gt LL 1 current setting TIME QUTS TIME Enter the amount of time for a full time out in minutes nmi nm and seconds on the number pad and press FULL 0 55 fif 55 current setting For example 0 30 BLIT5 FBDE A warning horn can be configured to signal the end i NINI mm cc of a full partial time out While the time out clock is WARNING 55 counting down the horn will sound for one second when the warning time is reached Enter a zero for the time to disable the warning horn 17 56 current setting Enter the time in minutes and seconds on the number pad and press ENTER TIME OUTS AODE Enter the number of partial time outs on the number PARTIJAI N and press ENTER 1 current setting TIME DuTS TIRE Enter the amount of time for a partial time out in mm ccs minutes and seconds on the number pad and press PARTIAL deco fif 55 current setting For example 00 20 TIME DUTS nBBE Press YES to display the time out time the LCD and the main clock digits of the scoreboard while the INJ IN SHOW ON time out clock is active N current setting Press to display the time out time on the LCD only Volleyball Operations 207 Team Stats UPDATE PLAYER UPDATE PLAYER al
252. h multiple fields and a scoreboard on each field 3 Multiple Controller w Multiple Broadcast Groups In a Multiple controller with Multiple Broadcast Split Court Operation system there are additional Sport Controllers that can control multiple scoreboards The broadcast group jumper is used to select broadcast group 1 2 3 or 4 By changing Sport settings to a Broadcast address a single All Sport Controller can control all scoreboards or specific groups of scoreboards defined by the broadcast group One example of this scenario is split court operation in basketball installations where scoreboards are used to score multiple games at once but can be grouped together to show one game if necessary Refer to the drawings listed on the previous page for more information The Sport Console will automatically detect when a radio transmitter is installed and will prompt the user for transmitter settings The Sport Console will show the current transmitter radio status on the LCD when a code is entered The following table describes broadcast group and channel settings Basic Operations 25 RADIO SETTINGS BLAST 9 CHAN The LCD will toggle these screens The LCD shows the current radio settings along with a prompt to accept or modify these values If the radio settings are correct press lt ENTER gt If these values are incorrect press lt CLEAR gt If CLEAR is pressed to modify the radio settings the
253. he ERROR key can also display the player s position when the Error Position setting is on ERROR POSITION ON lt current setting Auto Increment Pitches Press the left arrow key if the scoreboard can display the player position then press ENTER Press the right arrow key if the scoreboard cannot display the player position then press ENTER When the Auto Pitch Increment setting is on and the AT BAT indicator for the batting team is on the BALL COUNT 1 gt and STRIKE COUNT 1 gt keys automatically increment the Ball and Strike pitch count data of the team that is not at bat AT BAT indicator off AUTO INCREMENT PITCHES N N current setting Press YES to use the BALL COUNT 1 gt and STRIKE COUNT 1 gt keys to automatically increment the Ball and Strike pitch count data Press to use the PITCH COUNT BALLS 1 gt and PITCH COUNT STRIKES 1 gt keys to manually increment the Ball and Strike pitch count data Baseball Operations 59 Auto Increment Inning The OUT 1 gt key automatically increments the inning and resets the out number to zero when e The Auto Inning Increment setting is on e The Home AT BAT indicator is on e The current out number is 3 The lt OUT 1 gt key turns on the Home AT BAT indicator when e The Auto Inning Increment setting is on The Guest AT BAT indicator is on The current out number is 3 LCD Display
254. he Home or Guest PLAYER key has been pressed Refer to Subsection Player Delete Player The DELETE PLAYER key is only functional when the Home or Guest PLAYER key has been pressed Refer to Subsection Player 84 Basketball Operations Player Note If player stats are being received from DSTI the keys PLAYER IND SUB and MASS SUB will be disabled The LCD will display the messages shown below when these keys are pressed LCD Display STATS RECEIVED DISABLED EXIT STATS LCD Display HORE PLAYER NN current setting HOME PLAYER NN NOT FOUND ADDS 00 current settings HOME PLASER NN ROSTER FULL NN current setting The key disabled message will display for one second and then the lt EXIT STATS gt message will display and wait for a YES or NO key If the YES key is pressed then stats data will be saved in the console and the console will EXIT STATS mode until another stats packet is received This will allow the operator to enter player stats from the console if the DSTI feed is lost When the home or guest PLAYER key is pressed this prompt asks the jersey number of the player to be edited Enter the jersey number on the number pad and press ENTER If the player is not in the roster this prompt asks if the player should be added Press YES to add the player to the roster Press to decline the entry of the playe
255. he correct time on the number pad and press ENTER 300 Water Polo Operations 22 3 Menu The lt gt key allows the user to select from list of options specific for each sport The up and down arrow keys allow the user to scroll through the menu list Pressing a key other than YES the arrow keys and other allowed keys exits the Menu function The Menu function should be used at the beginning of each new game to edit the Home and Guest Rosters New Game LCD Display GALE New Code Press lt YES gt to clear all of the program data for the last game played or the game in progress and begin running the selected sport Press to resume the game in progress using the current data and exit the Menu Press the down arrow key to scroll to the next selection CODES Press lt YES gt to begin selection of a new code from the ENTER CODE prompt Press to resume the game in progress using the current data and exit the Menu Press the down arrow key to scroll to the next selection Water Polo Operations 301 Home Roster Guest Roster Home Roster and Guest Roster are entered in the same way Home Roster is used as an example LCD Display l ENU RUSTER SELECT HONE ARARARARAAAAA Press lt YES gt or the right or left arrow key to select the Home or Guest Roster subme
256. he number pad and press ENTER The home and guest team fouls stop incrementing at this number unless the 2 shot bonus is enabled Enter zero to disable this feature Enter the number of team fouls permitted before the 2 shot bonus applies on the number pad and press ENTER Enter zero to disable this feature This menu option allows for the controlled backlit captions to be turned ON OFF Press the 1 key to select ON and OFF for captions controlled by control 1 Press the 2 key to select ON and OFF for captions controlled by control 2 Basketball Operations 101 Select Team Foul Display LCD Display TESA FOULS This menu option allows the selection of showing SHOW DN STATS Y team fouls on line 6 of the player stats panel To accept display of team fouls press lt YES gt To decline display of team fouls press lt NO gt Score by Quarter LCD Display SCORE BY QUARTER This feature allows for scores to be recorded by X quarter This data is available on the RTD output X current setting Press YES to score by quarter or press to not score by quarter Note If this feature is enabled all scores are edited by quarter Use this function only when needed Switch Output The Sport 5000 series console has a switch that can be used to drive a number of different devices The switch can be configured to operate under different settings
257. his installation in the space Custom provided tem Gut NumberofPeios 4 i TenthofaSecond Yes Peiodlengh 800 BreakLength 1000 Overtime Length 500 Shot Clock Reset 045 Shot Clock Auto Blank Yes Full Time Outs Full Time Out Partial Time Outs Partial Time Out 20 Update Player Score Update Player Fouls Yes 1 on 1 Bonus 2 Shot Bonus nd Switch Output 1 Clock o 104 Basketball Operations Section 8 Football Operations Sport Insert LL 2437 The Sport Insert drawing is located at the end of this section The Team Name insert and Block Diagram drawings are located in Appendix A The Quick Reference is located in Appendix D Reference Drawings Insert Football eid hop crat P be E M a TE Red Drawing A 122652 Block Diagrams A S5000 3000 Outdoor Sports Drawing A 124690 Insert Team Drawing A 125290 Refer to the information in Section 2 to start up the console and use the sport insert Read Section 2 carefully to fully understand the following operation instructions If an insert is lost or damaged a copy of the insert drawing located at the end of this section can be used until a replacement can be ordered Use the labels provided in
258. hot clock horn Press lt gt to display the shot clock time at all times 98 Basketball Operations Time Outs Note 1 If a full or partial time out is not needed for the HOME or GUEST TIME gt keys enter zero for the number of time outs Note 2 If a full or partial time out is not needed for lt TIME OUT gt enter zero for the time Note 3 The number for each type of time out must be manually entered for an overtime period using the EDIT TIME OUT key sequence for each team LCD Display GUTS FIGDE Enter the number of full time outs on the number z ad and press ENTER FUL current setting TIAE BUTS TIRE Enter the amount of time for a full time out in m 6 minutes and seconds on the number pad and press FULL _ 18 55 fif 55 current setting For example 1 00 BUTS RODE A warning horn can be configured to signal the end of a full partial time out While the time out clock is counting down the horn will sound for one second when the warning time is reached Enter a zero for the time to disable the warning horn WARNING 11 55 fif 55 current setting Enter the time in minutes and seconds on the number pad and press ENTER Continued on next page Basketball Operations 99 Continued from previous page LCD Display Action TIRE DUTS ha8DE Enter the number of partial time outs on the numbe
259. hots on Goal SHOTS ON GOAL 1 gt and SHOTS ON GOAL 1 gt increment and decrement the team shots on goal Saves lt 5 5 1 gt and lt SAVES 1 gt increment and decrement the team goalie saves Penalty PENALTY turns on or off the penalty indicators for the selected team PLAYER PENALTY sets the player number and penalty time for the selected team MAJOR PENALTY MINOR PENALTY set the penalty length to the configured values DELETE PLAYER PENALTY deletes a player penalty time Each press scrolls through the list of player and penalty times for the selected team e CLEAR ALL PENALTIES deletes all player penalty times for the selected team Quick Reference 335 ENABLE PENALTY CLOCKS and DISABLE PENALTY CLOCKS control the automatic decrement of the penalty clocks with the main clock The current status is shown as an EN or DS in the bottom right corner of the LCD screen Edit Key Function e Press lt EDIT gt followed by any of the following keys to edit the respective value lt SCORE 1 gt lt SCORE 1 gt lt SHOTS ON GOAL 1 gt lt SHOTS ON GOAL 1 gt lt SAVES 1 gt lt SAVES 1 gt lt PERIOD 1 gt lt TIME OUT ON OFF gt lt TIME OUT gt 336 Quick Reference Sport 5000 Soccer Note Refer to Section 12 Soccer Operation for more detailed operating instructions Start Up Turnthe Power Switch ON Atthe Resume Game Y N prompt Press ENTER YES gt t
260. how on power up or resume game Added a key to basketball to clear team fouls Added the period text messages and period descriptions Added team name captions for FB 2002 for football soccer and lacrosse Added speed of pitch indicators for mild medium and hot levels Added circle K indicators to speed of pitch and also to promo display codes Added match elapsed time to wrestling and show it and time of day on reset of a match Added a code to basketball code 1301 to run the WR 2024 board Added a code to volleyball code 2301 to run the WR 2024 board Added a code to gymnastics code 0015 to run on the WR 2024 board Added a segment timer for home guest partial team fouls on relay driver at address 220 Added a code 4102 for handball lacrosse for counting three penalty times on basketball boards Fixed RTD text field for Guest Penalty from Possess to Penalty Version 2 0 8 Release Date 16 August 2004 Added address 14 to hockey codes for hockey boards and basketball codes for hockey boards Added a two second delay after stop of the blood injury time before it goes back to match time Added a new 6612 for four col digit on football Added a new address for football Address 18 for the FB 2007 Made a new code code 7702 for soccer to count over 99 minutes for European market Fixed basketball receive of generic stats from DSTI Added partial time outs display segments on address 23 and 25 in basketball Fixed cod
261. ically set to 1 and the To Go yards set to 10 Yards Rushing Press YARDS RUSHING to manually enter the number of rushing yards gained or lost on a play LCD Display RUSHING HOME Enter the number of rushing yards gained or lost on UBRDS a play and press ENTER NN current setting Press lt CLEAR gt twice to clear changes and return to the game RUSHING HOME Select gain or loss to add or subtract from total I 6HN 3 055 rushing yards Press 1 for a gain Press 3 for a loss BUSHING HONE A prompt showing total rushing yards displays TOTAL NNN NNN current setting 114 Football Options Yards Passing Press YARDS PASSING to manually enter the number of passing yards gained or lost on a play LCD Display PASSING AONE 58605 NN Y current setting PASSING AONE 3 L055 PASSING AONE 505 TOTAL NNN NNN current setting First Downs 1 LCD Display HOME i FIRST GOWNS NAN current setting Enter the number of passing yards gained or lost on a play and press lt ENTER gt Press CLEAR twice to clear changes and return to the game Select gain or loss to add or subtract from total passing yards Press 1 for a gain Press 3 for a loss A prompt showing total passing yards displays briefly Press lt FIRST DOWN 1 gt to manually increment the number of first downs A prompt showing total first downs displays br
262. iefly Football Options 115 8 2 Edit The lt EDIT gt key allows the user to select and edit the following scoreboard fields Press lt EDIT gt and the key for the home or guest field to be edited Time Out Note 1 Only the time outs configured in the EDIT SETTINGS function are displayed on the LCD and available for selection Note 2 The up and down arrow keys can also be used to select the full and partial time outs LCD Display N current setting TINE BUT HOnlE PARTIAL N current setting Score 1 2 3 6 1 LCD Display TEAM current setting Press EDIT TIME OUT gt for the home or guest team to display the current setting of full time outs remaining Enter the correct number of full time outs on the number pad and press lt ENTER gt Press lt EDIT gt TIME gt for the home or guest team a second time or the down arrow key to display the current setting of full time outs remaining Enter the correct number of partial time outs on the number pad and press lt ENTER gt Press EDIT and any of the lt SCORE gt keys for the home or guest team to display the current team score setting Enter the correct team score on the number pad and press lt ENTER gt 116 Football Options Quarter 1 LCD Display QUARTER EDIT Press lt EDIT gt lt QUARTER 1 gt to dis
263. ing IND SUB HGME SUB 04 SUB HOTIE SUB NOT SUB HGME NOT FOUND current setting When the home or guest lt INDIV SUB gt key is pressed this prompt asks the jersey number of the player entering and leaving the game Enter the jersey number of the player entering the game on the number pad and press lt ENTER gt Enter the jersey number of the player leaving the game on the number pad and press lt ENTER gt This message is displayed if no errors are found This message is displayed for the following reasons The player going into the game is already marked as in the game The player coming out of the game is not marked as in the game This message is displayed if the player going in or the player coming out of the game is not found in the roster Press YES to correct the jersey number Enter the correct jersey number and press ENTER Basketball Operations 87 Mass Substitution LCD Display MASS SUB H TIE PLAYER Y current setting 1955 SUB HOnE SUB 1955 SUB H TIE DUPLICATE NN current setting NOT FOUND ADOP PLAYER nn current setting After the home or guest MASS SUB key is pressed the LCD will display a message on the LCD asking for the first of five player numbers that are going into the game Enter the jersey number on the number pad and press ENTER for each of the five players Press CLEAR at any ti
264. ing is 1 CLOCK 0 To display the switch setting that you want to select Press the number 0 1 2 3 key as a shortcut or use the left and right arrow keys to scroll to the desired setting Press YES to select the new setting Press NO the down arrow key to leave the switch setting and display the next prompt The possible settings for the switch output are displayed on the following page 62 Baseball Operations 0 DISABLED SWITCH GUTPUT LD DISRBLEDP N current setting SWITCH 07 N current setting 2 CLOCK STOP SWITCH DUTPUT I e LLUCA STOPP N current setting 3 MAIN HORN SWITCH AAN HORNE N current setting Default Settings The switch remains open at all times and any external devices are disabled In count down mode the switch closes when the main clock reaches zero and remains closed until a nonzero value is entered In count up mode the switch closes when the main clock reaches the proper period break or overtime length and opens when any other value is entered The switch closes when the main clock is stopped and opens when the main clock is running External devices are disabled when the main clock is running The switch closes when the main horn sounds This could be when Auto Horn is enabled and the main clock reaches zero or when lt is pressed Write the settings for this installation in the space Cust
265. ing scores The LCD shows which key was pressed and the new value for the corresponding team 50 Baseball Operations 4 2 Hits Errors Left on Base The home and guest HITS 1 gt ERRORS 1 gt and LEFT ON BASE 1 gt keys are all used to increment their respective totals HITS 1 gt is used as an example HITS 7 Press the appropriate key to increment statistics for the home or guest team nn Y current setting The LCD shows which key was pressed and the new value for the corresponding team Pitch Count Foul Balls In Play The home and guest PITCH COUNT BALLS 1 gt PITCH COUNT STRIKES 1 gt lt FOUL BALLS 1 gt and IN PLAY 1 gt keys are all used to increment the pitch count data of the team that is not at bat lt FOUL BALLS 1 gt is used as an example FOUL BALLS Press the appropriate key to increment statistics for the pitcher s team H PITCHER NNN NNN current setting The LCD shows which key was pressed and the new value for the corresponding team Edit The lt EDIT gt key allows the user to select and edit the following scoreboard fields Press EDIT and the key for the home or guest field to be edited Inning 1 Note Do not use EDIT lt INNING 1 gt to edit the Score Inning Use EDIT RUNS 1 gt INNING EDIT Press lt EDIT gt lt INNING 1 gt to display the current setting nn current setting Enter the correct inning
266. ing the player penalty function LCD Display PENALTY TIME Enter the correct default time for a penalty in minutes and seconds on the number pad and press the SET fifisS icd ENTER key 10 55 current setting For example 0 25 The penalty time is used as the default when pressing the player penalty start function 308 Water Polo Operations Time Outs Note 1 If a full or partial time out is not needed for the HOME or GUEST TIME keys enter zero for the number of time outs Note 2 If a full or partial time out is not needed for TIME OUT ON OFF gt enter zero for the time Note3 The number for each type of time out must be manually entered for an overtime period using the EDIT TIME OUT key sequence for each team LCD Display TIRE DUIT5 FBDE Enter the number of full time outs on the number pad FULL N and press ENTER N current setting TIME QUTS TIME Enter the amount of time for a full time out in minutes and seconds on the number pad and press FULL 88 55 RTT lt ENTER gt fif 55 current setting For example 1 00 TIME DUTS RBDE Press lt YES gt to display the time out time on the LCD and the main clock digits of the scoreboard while the time out clock is active ON N N current setting Press to display the time out time on the LCD only Water Polo Operations 309 Switch Output The Sport 5000 series console has
267. ing with Hawkeye or Finish Lynx timers The Baud rate for the Hawkeye and Finish Lynx timers must be set to 9600 Baud Track Operations 177 If you do not know the code number to enter for your scoreboard refer to Appendix B in this manual If you do not know the model number of your scoreboard refer to the Installation and Maintenance manual provided with the scoreboard 12 1 Track Keys Reset LCD Display Action TIME 0 05 16 When lt gt is pressed the message Enter to Reset will appear on the bottom line of the LCD NTER RESET current setting Press ENTER to reset the main clock Note The lt gt function is disabled while the clock is running The RESET function is also disabled when external timer code is selected Lane LCD Display LONE Press LANE to set the value of the lane digits on the scoreboard N current setting LANE This message is displayed when an external timer code is selected Use the external timer to modify the value EXTERNAL THIER N current setting 178 Track Operations Place LCD Display N current setting PLRLE EXTERNAL THIER N current setting Home and Guest 1 Score Press PLACE to set the place of the runner in the lane specified on the scoreboard This message is displayed when an external timer code is selected Use the external timer to modify the value
268. ings for the switch output are as follows 0 DISABLED The switch remains open at all times and any GLITCH DUTPUT N external devices are disabled 0 0588 202 N current setting In count down mode the switch closes when the main clock reaches zero and remains closed until a nonzero value is entered SWITCH BUTPUTZN In count up mode the switch closes when the main N current setting clock reaches the proper period break or overtime length and opens when any other value is entered 2 CLOCK STOP The switch closes when the main clock is stopped and opens when the main clock is running External devices are disabled when the main clock is running SWITCH c LLULA STOPP N current setting 3 MAIN HORN 2 2 Mui 4 This could be when Auto Horn is enabled and the main I ITDI IT IN SWITCH DUTPUT PI clock reaches zero or when lt HORNs is pressed 3 fAIN HORNO N current setting Football Options 129 Default Settings Write the settings for this installation in the space Custom provided cst sess Tenthofa Second Period Length 800 To Break Length 1000 Overtime Length 500 Play Clock Reset 1 0 25 Play Clock Reset2 0 25 f O On Stop FuTmeOus FuTmeOu __ Jo TimeOut ooo
269. insert and Block Diagram drawings are located in Appendix A The Quick Reference is located in Appendix D Reference Drawings Block Diagrams A S5000 3000 BB VB amp WR 1 Drawing A 124686 Block Diagrams 55000 3000 BB VB 8 WR 3 Drawing A 124688 Insert nete Drawing 125055 Insert Team Drawing 125290 Block Diagrams A S5000 3000 BB 8 WR 2 Drawing A 125415 Refer to the information in Section 2 to start up the console and use the sport insert Read Section 2 carefully to fully understand the following operation instructions If an insert is lost or damaged a copy of the insert drawing located at the end of this section can be used until a replacement can be ordered Use the labels provided in Appendix B to attach the correct code number label to the sport insert in the appropriate location Write the code number in the space provided below Write the correct code number here If you do not know the code number to enter for your scoreboard refer to Appendix B in this manual If you do not know the model number of your scoreboard refer to the Installation and Maintenance manual provided with the scoreboard Volleyball Operations 189 13 1 Volleyball Keys
270. isk een eod edd edem deci pedes 280 Men s eet ete ete eet de quee 281 New er hp Geh ente t mee at a eee 281 Code anis detenta mbi 281 During 21e eie amaba 282 282 Section 21 211 Cricket ROY 283 Batsman Left Batsman ae AU dtes 284 ates etn BT taf etenim eni 284 Runs eiit ED ER EN IR maaan 284 Table of Contents en UENIRE E AN INN NETS 285 EX GAS HE 285 WACK ELS iC ce 285 WACK ets leno a raa ete e rct e ata cette rod eevee betes 285 Overs S EE tette eee oe buts 286 OyverS T RR Re RR Rae UN TENER INE NU V 286 Inming T Inning 42 ttai t i ete ded het bees 287 21 2 et 287 Runs 1 AAD pte E HU E ER e 287 Elo o 287 Wickets Ia eate Sis ele died he Ba SPI am 288 VETS sn e eror ect Mure C CN 288 21 3 vetet RR DEO Qni RR 288 e e e 288 289
271. isplay SAVES 7 HOME NNN current setting 10 2 Edit Press the appropriate key to increment or decrement the statistics for the home or guest team For example lt SAVES 1 1 gt The LCD shows which key was pressed and the new value for the corresponding team The lt EDIT gt key allows the user to select and edit the following scoreboard fields Press lt EDIT gt and the key for the home or guest field to be edited Half 1 LCD Display HALF EDIT N current setting Press EDIT HALF 1 gt to display the current quarter setting Enter the correct half number on the number pad and press ENTER The full time outs are reset Soccer Operations 153 Time Out On Off LCD Display DUTS EDIT FULL _ 88 55 18 55 minutes seconds TNE GUTS EDIT PARTIAL 17 55 17 55 minutes seconds Time Out Press lt EDIT gt TIME OUT gt to display the current time setting for full time outs Enter the correct time on the number pad and press ENTER Press TIME OUT ON OFF gt a second time or the down arrow key to display the configured time for partial time out length Enter the correct time on the number pad and press ENTER Note 1 Only the time outs configured in the EDIT SETTINGS function are displayed on the LCD and available for selection Note 2 The up and down arrow keys can also be used to select the full and partial time outs
272. ither 1 2 3 or 4 Every radio receiver will also accept data sent from the Master Broadcast channel This is selected when a transmitter console radio is set to Broadcast Group 0 BCAST 0 and Channel 0 The channel number and broadcast group set on the radio installed in each scoreboard can be verified by cycling power to the scoreboard Approximately seven seconds after power up the scoreboard will show the current channel in the scoreboard clock digits A CXX will first be shown where XX is the current radio channel number This will be followed by BXCY where X is the current broadcast group and Y is the current channel number within this broadcast group There are three different radio scenarios that can be accommodated 1 Single Controller System In a single controller system all radio receivers and all scoreboards receive signal from the same Sport console at all times The default channel and broadcast group settings on the receiver are not typically modified An example of this type of system is a typical high school football installation 2 Multiple Controller System w Single Broadcast Group In a multiple controller system with a single broadcast group there are additional Sport Controllers for controlling multiple scoreboards There is never a scenario where groups of scoreboards that were run by individual controllers need to be run by a single controller An example of this type of system is a softball complex wit
273. k reaches zero MENU DING LEVEL 0 8 Yn current level YONE bright 96 96 n u 80 C C ua Q Q 15 e amp CN CN Hoo 5 I Press 0 through 9 or use the arrow keys lt gt gt to select the intensity for the digits on the scoreboard Press to resume the game in progress using the current data and exit the Menu Press the down arrow key lt gt to scroll to the next selection Note Dim levels pertain to outdoor LED products Indoor LED and incandescent products only support one level of dimming at 5096 Segment Timer 45 Section 4 Baseball Operations Sport Insert LL 2438 The Sport Insert drawing is located at the end of this section The Team Name insert and Block Diagram drawings are located in Appendix A The Quick Reference is located in Appendix D Reference Drawings Insert Drawing A 125061 Irisert Team Name eite to ve b reves pud ver een vn a Drawing A 125290 Block Diagrams A S5000 3000 Outdoor Sports Drawing A 124690 Refer to the information in Section 2 to start up the console and how to use the sport insert Read Section 2 carefully to fully understand the following operation instructions If an insert is lost or damaged a copy of the insert drawings are located at the end of this
274. key Options LCD Display ABBR hnRnnnnnnnn Display Menu Continued from previous page The TEAM NAME LL 2441 insert must be inserted to enter the Team Name Message Center TNMC settings The is updated after each selection is completed Use the COLUMNS ROWS and STROKE keys to select the WIDTH HEIGHT and FONT of the TNMC The defaults are 48 columns 8 rows and single stroke Enter up to ten 10 characters for the team abbreviation and press lt ENTER gt Reinsert the HOCKEY LL 2436 insert to continue The DISPLAY MENU allows the user to start and edit the segment timer or to change the brightness of the scoreboard LCD Display MENG MAIN ENTER DISPLAY MENUS Press lt YES gt to select the Display submenu and show the first prompt on the LCD Press the down arrow key to scroll to the next selection Hockey Options 141 LCD Display l ENU BISPLRS RUN SEG TIMER S N EXIT DANE ARE SURE S N MENU BI iG LEVEL 0 9 NN NN current level bright 5096 8096 10 60 096 D 3096 D 10 Note The segment timer function is disabled while the clock is running Press YES to exit the sport code and run the segment timer program Press NO or the down arrow key to scroll to the next selection This prompt confirms that the user wants to exit the sport code and enter the segment timer The SEGMENT TI
275. keys is listed below CLEAR DISPLAY Frame 1 RUN PROMO 1 gt Frame 2 RUN PROMO 2 gt Frame 3 RUN PROMO 32 Frame 4 RUN PROMO 4 gt Frame 5 RUN PROMO 52 Frame 6 RUN PROMO 6 gt Frame 7 RUN PROMO 7 gt Frame 8 RUN PROMO 82 Frame 9 RUN PROMO 9 gt Frame 10 DISPLAY STRIKEOUTS gt Frame 11 the strikeout count example Ostrikeouts Frame 11 P 1strikeout Frame 12 2 strikeouts Frame 13 280 Strikeout Count 20 2 Menu The lt gt key allows the user to select from list of options specific for each sport The up and down arrow keys allow the user to scroll through the menu list Pressing a key other than YES the arrow keys and other allowed keys exits the Menu function New Game LCD Displa Press lt YES gt to clear all of the program data for the last game played or the game in progress and begin running the selected sport NEU GATE Press to resume the game in progress using the current data and exit the Menu Press the down arrow key to scroll to the next selection New Code LCD Dis
276. lection of a partial time out press lt gt Partial time out does not decrement Note The up and down arrow keys can also be used to select the full and partial time outs TIRE DUT HORE This message appears when there are no time outs left 0 GUTS 2 296 Water Polo Operations Player Penalty Start LCD Display HORE PLUR PEN Press PLAYER PENALTY START to start new penalty time for the home or guest team PLAYER Y current setting The penalty time will start to count immediately On the number pad enter the jersey number of the player with the penalty and press lt ENTER gt HORE PLYR PEN Enter the penalty number of this penalty and press PENALTY N penalty number Set Main Clock LCD Display Action CLOCK SET After the main clock has been stopped press SET MAIN CLOCKS to display the current time of the main clock CURR fifi55 T ffi S5 T minutes seconds To change the time enter the desired time on the sents Ob A Second number pad and press lt ENTER gt Press CLEAR twice to clear changes and return to the game Water Polo Operations 297 Score The home and guest SCORE 1 1 gt keys are used to increment and decrement their respective totals LCD Display TESA SCORE ENIT Press the appropriate key to increment or decrement HORE NNN the total for the home or guest team For example SCORE 1 1
277. left arrow key to exit the submenu and return to the Main menu RENU HDRE Enter the jersey number for that player from the official roster and press lt ENTER gt The next player is shown on the LCD Continue entering the jersey numbers for up to 15 players PLAYER NN NN current setting Press the CLEAR key to advance to the next option RENLI HahE This function clears all game statistics and should only WA PAIS be used before the start of a game CLEAR STATS Press lt YESs to clear the in game status fouls and points for all players in the home roster Press to decline the selection Press the down arrow key to scroll to the next selection Display Menu The DISPLAY MENU allows the user to start and edit the segment timer or to change the brightness of the scoreboard LCD Display RENU FGIN ENTER Press YES to select the Display submenu and show the first prompt on the LCD 01501895 MENUS Press the down arrow key to scroll to the next selection Continued on next page Basketball Operations 93 Continued from previous page LCD Display l iENU BISPLRS RUN SEG EXIT DANE ARE SURE S N MENU LEVEL 0 9 NN NN current level NGNE bright 9096 0 10 60 50 490 3096 2096 10 Action Note The segment timer function is disabled while the clock is running Press lt YES gt to exit the sp
278. leyball Operations 191 Score 1 1 The home and guest SCORE 1 gt and SCORE 1 gt keys are used to increment and decrement the team score LCD Display TEAM SCORE 1 Press the appropriate score key to increment or decrement the score for the home or guest team HONE NNN NNN current setting The LCD shows which key was pressed and the new value for the team score of the corresponding team Games Won 1 The home and guest keys are used to increment their respective totals LCD Display GARES WON 7 Press the lt GAMES WON 1 gt key to increment the number of games won by the home or guest team AONE NN current setting The LCD shows which key was pressed and the new value for the corresponding team Aces Kills Blocks and Digs The home and guest ACES 1 gt KILLS 1 gt BLOCKS 1 gt and DIGS 1 gt keys are all used to increment their respective totals lt ACES 1 gt is used as an example LCD Display ACES 7 Press the appropriate key to increment statistics for the home or guest team HORE NNN current setting The LCD shows which key was pressed and the new value for the corresponding team CES 7 If the program is configured to update the player 7 stats this prompt displays asking for a player cct 2 NN current setting Enter the jersey number of the player who made the play and press ENTER Continued on next page 1
279. licate jersey number found for the six players going into the game Press YES to correct the jersey number Enter the correct jersey number and press lt ENTER gt This message displays for each player not found in the roster Press YES to correct the jersey number Enter the correct jersey number and press lt ENTER gt Volleyball Operations 197 13 2 Edit The lt EDIT gt key allows the user to select and edit the following scoreboard fields Press lt EDIT gt and the key for the field to be edited Match Number 1 Games 1 The lt MATCH NUMBER 1 gt and lt GAMES 1 gt keys are edited in the same ways lt GAME 1 gt is used as an example LCD Display GANE NG EDIT N current setting Time Out Press lt EDIT gt and the appropriate statistic key to display the current setting Enter the correct number on the number pad and press lt ENTER gt Note 1 Only the time outs configured in the EDIT SETTINGS function are displayed on the LCD and available for selection Note 2 The up and down arrow keys can also be used to select the full and partial time outs LCD Display DUT HORE N current setting TINE BGUT HOnE PARTIAL Y current setting Press EDIT TIME OUT gt for the home or guest team to display the current setting of full time outs remaining Enter the correct number of full time outs on the number pad and press ENTER Pre
280. lid EE RHET 73 Clock Console iiec et terrere ie 73 5 E a 73 Timer Stop oe a Re e D RU ea UR Ree 73 Set Timer Times os e er e attt e eet 74 Set Reset eet teer e Ter Tete eeu vet e PvE 74 Set Reset Titne 2 RAN M Nn E 74 Timer Reset d end edere e 74 Write the correct code number TT Basketball Keys e ume hmi 76 Set Shot ee e rh eie eti eee e ede oath 78 Recall Shot Time tide de tuos teer e 79 Time Out On Off ee eee e E ree pov ce etu Eee 79 Blank Player 80 deaur teen o RERUM qu Ue 80 time OUT ceo ete eter Gre ses A C E ee 81 Scores tI 42 73 tee diee e qt 82 ROUSE K 83 84 Table of Contents iii In Game O t of Game Eee 84 Delete E ee tere eb RD HU ea RR Opens 84 PIA OE ete e a E e e RO ip RR Ave Re 85 Individual Substitution nectit 87 Mass SUbstIt tlOh s 88 7 1 Bitur e 89 e RO devenire
281. lly to fully understand the following operation instructions If an insert is lost or damaged a copy of the insert drawing located at the end of this section can be used until a replacement can be ordered Use the labels provided in Appendix B to attach the correct code number label to the sport insert in the appropriate location Write the code number in the space provided below Write the correct code number here If you do not know the code number to enter for your scoreboard refer to Appendix B in this manual If you do not know the model number of your scoreboard refer to the Installation and Maintenance manual provided with the scoreboard Wrestling Operations 213 14 1 Wrestling Keys Match Number 1 LCD Display MATCH Press MATCH 1 gt to increment the match number n N current setting A prompt showing match number displays briefly WEIGHT CLASS If weight classes are selected a prompt to select a BI NNN weight class will be shown on the LCD Use the arrow keys to select a weight class and press ENTER The NNN weight class weight class displays in the Match digits Period 1 PERIOD Press lt PERIOD 1 gt to increment the quarter number N 1 current setting prompt showing period number displays briefly The period time will be set to the configured period time if the current time is at zero There are 5 configured period times and the time will be se
282. lows the entry of a player number after the home or guest team aces kills blocks or digs are incremented or decremented This feature must be enabled for all player foul points panels LCD Display 57815 hDDE This feature must be enabled for all player foul UPDATE PLAYER Points Panels N current setting Press lt YES gt to allow entry of a player number after the home or guest team aces kills blocks or digs are incremented or decremented Press NO to prevent entry of a player number User Def 1 and User Def 2 User Def 1 and User Def 2 are used to define which statistics aces kills blocks or digs are displayed on the scoreboard Only two of the four statistics can be selected to display on the player foul points panels for the individual players in the game e User Def 1 displays the statistics in the Team Score digits User Def 2 displays the statistics in the Player Foul digits User Def 1 and User Def 2 are entered in the same way User Def 1 is used as an example Press the number 1 2 3 4 key as a shortcut or use the left and right arrow keys to scroll to the desired setting LCD Display USER 12 Press 1 or use the left and right arrow keys to scroll to ACES 1 ACES current setting Press YES to display ACES on the USER DEF 1 Team Score scoreboard USER DEF 1 Player Foul Press to decline the selection and return to the game Press the down a
283. lty function LCD Display PENALTI TINE MNOR AMSS fif 55 current setting PENALTI TINE MAJOR 17 55 fif 55 current setting Enter the correct default time for a minor penalty in minutes and seconds on the number pad and press lt ENTER gt For example 02 00 The minor penalty time is used as the default when first entering the player penalty function Enter the correct default time for a major penalty in minutes and seconds on the number pad and press lt ENTER gt For example 02 00 Hockey Options 145 Time Outs Note 1 If a full or partial time out is not needed for the HOME or GUEST TIME OUT keys enter zero for the number of time outs Note 2 If a full or partial time out is not needed for TIME OUT ON OFF gt enter zero for the time Note 3 The number for each type of time out must be manually entered for an overtime period using the EDIT TIME OUT key sequence for each team please refer to the menu on the following page LCD Display 0075 N current setting DUTS TIRE FULL mmss 17 56 current setting TNE 5 WARNING Pin 55 10 55 current setting 5 PARTIAL current setting THE BUTS TInIE PARTIAL 17 55 17 56 current setting Enter the number of full time outs on the number pad and press ENTER Enter the amount of time for a full time out in min
284. m a list of options specific for each sport The up and down arrow keys allow the user to scroll through the menu list Pressing a key other than YES the arrow keys and other allowed keys exits the Menu function The Menu function should be used at the beginning of each new game to edit the Home and Guest Rosters Soccer Operations 155 New Game LCD Display FiENU TIRIN NEW GATE New Code Press YES to clear all of the program data for the last game played or the game in progress and begin running the selected sport Press NO to resume the game in progress using the current data and exit the Menu Press the down arrow key to scroll to the next selection When the LCD Display is as shown the following actions may be selected FIENU PIRIY NEU CODE Home Roster Guest Roster Press YES to begin selection of a new code from the ENTER CODE prompt Press NO to resume the game in progress using the current data and exit the Menu Press the down arrow key to scroll to the next selection Home Roster and Guest Roster are entered in the same way Home Roster is used as an example LCD Display l ENU RUSTER SELECT HONE Press YES or the right or left arrow key to select the Home or Guest Roster submenu and show the first prompt on the LCD Press NO to resume the game in progress using the current data and exit the Menu Press the down arrow key to scroll to the
285. made the foul and press lt ENTER gt If the player is not in the roster this prompt asks if the player should be added Press YES to add the player to the roster and credit the foul to that player Press to decline the entry of the player number This message displays when the answer to the previous prompt is YES and the roster is full The player s number and the number of fouls display if the player was found in the game or correctly added to the roster Note If a player number is not entered the fouls will not be displayed Basketball Operations 83 Bonus Note Only the types of bonuses that were configured in the EDIT SETTINGS function are displayed on the LCD and available for selection LCD Display AONE BONUS LON 1 HOME BONUS 2 5107 BONUS OFF Possession LCD Display HOME POSSESSION n HORE POSSESSION OFF In Game Out of Game Press the home or guest BONUS key to turn on the 1 on 1 bonus indicator for that team Press the home or guest BONUS key a second time to turn on the 2 shot bonus indicator for that team Press the BONUS key a third time to turn off both indicators Press the home or guest POSS key to turn on the possession indicator for that team To turn off the possession indicator press the same POSS key a second time or press the opposite POSS key The IN GAME and OUT OF GAME keys are only functional when t
286. me or guest team to display the current setting of full time outs remaining Enter the correct number of full time outs on the number pad and press ENTER Press lt EDIT gt TIME OUT gt for the home or guest team a second time or the down arrow key to display the current setting of full time outs remaining Enter the correct number of partial time outs on the number pad and press ENTER Press lt EDIT gt and any of the SCORE keys for the home or guest team to display the current team score setting Enter the correct team score on the number pad and press ENTER Basketball Operations 89 Team Fouls 1 LCD Display TEAN FOULS EDIT HORE NN Y current setting Period 1 LCD Display N current setting Time Out On Off LCD Display DUTS EDIT FULL MASS 17 55 minutes seconds THE OUT EDIT PARTIAL 17 55 17 55 minutes seconds Press EDIT TEAM FOULS for the home or guest team to display the current team foul setting Enter the correct number of team fouls on the number pad and press lt ENTER gt Press EDIT lt PERIOD 1 gt for the home or guest team to display the period setting Enter the correct period number on the number pad and press ENTER Press EDIT TIME OUT gt to display the current time setting for full time outs Enter the correct time on the number pad and press ENTER
287. me to exit the Mass Substitution function When the home or guest MASS SUB key is pressed this prompt asks the jersey number of the first player entering the game Enter the jersey number of the each of the five players entering the game on the number pad and press ENTER This message is displayed if no errors are found This message displays for each duplicate jersey number found for the five players going into the game Press YES to correct the jersey number Enter the correct jersey number and press ENTER This message displays for each player not found in the roster Press YES to add the jersey number Press to ignore and select another jersey number Enter the correct jersey number and press ENTER 88 Basketball Operations 7 1 Edit The EDIT key allows the user to select and edit the following scoreboard fields Press EDIT and the key for the home or guest field to be edited Time Out Note 1 Only the time outs configured in the EDIT SETTINGS function are displayed on the LCD and available for selection Note 2 The up and down arrow keys can also be used to select the full and partial time outs LCD Display DUT HORE FUL N current setting TINE GUT HOnlE PARTIAL N current setting Score 1 2 3 1 LCD Display TEAM Y current setting Press EDIT TIME OUT gt for the ho
288. mer Press START RECOVERY TIME to start the recovery timer for the home or guest competitor The recovery timer counts down from the maximum allowed time until lt STOP RECOVERY TIME is pressed or 0 00 is reached Press the STOP RECOVERY TIME key to stop the recovery timer and return the period time to the main clock digits The lt EDIT gt key allows the user to select and edit the following scoreboard fields Press lt EDIT gt and the key for the home or guest field to be edited Home Advantage Guest Advantage LCD Display RD TP HOME 1 55 7 fif 55 1 minutes seconds tenths of a second Guest Advantage Press EDIT HOME ADVANTAGES to display the current advantage time for the home competitor Enter the advantage time for the home competitor on the number pad and press lt ENTER gt Press CLEAR twice to clear changes and return to the game When the LCD Display is as shown the following actions may be selected 220 Wrestling Operations LCD Display RD TP GUEST fi55 1 fif 55 1 minutes seconds tenths of a second Blood Time Press EDIT GUEST ADVANTAGE to display the current advantage time for the guest competitor Enter the advantage time for the guest competitor on the number pad and press ENTER Press CLEAR twice to clear changes and return to the game LCD Display BLOGO TI IE EDIT HOME fms55 17 55 current setting Injury Tim
289. mi Timer stops at this value by default 268 Judo Operations Medical Time LCD Display TIRE This function sets the configured time for a medical 0 60 exam time The time can be set up to 99 seconds Setting the time to 0 00 will disable the timing function of the medical exam key Switch Output The Sport 5000 series console has a switch that can be used to drive a number of different devices The switch can be configured to operate under different settings The default setting is 1 CLOCK 0 To display the switch setting that you want to select Press the number 0 1 2 3 key as a shortcut or use the left and right arrow keys to scroll to the desired setting Press YES to select the new setting Press NO or the down arrow key to leave the switch setting and display the next prompt please refer to the table on the following page Judo Operations 269 The possible settings for the switch output are as follows 0 DISABLED SWITCH LD DISRBLEDP N current setting The switch remains open at all times and any external devices are disabled In count down mode the switch closes when the main clock reaches zero and remains closed until a SWITCH 02 nonzero value is entered N current setting In count up mode the switch closes when the main clock reaches the proper period break or overtime length and opens when any other value i
290. nction The MENU function should be used at the beginning of each new game to edit the Home and Guest Rosters Track Operations 181 New Game LCD Display MENU MAIN NEW DANES LCD Display MENU NAIN NEW CODE Home Roster Guest Roster Press YES to clear all of the program data for the last game played or the game in progress and begin running the selected sport Press NO to resume the game in progress using the current data and exit the Menu Press the down arrow key to scroll to the next selection Press YES to begin selection of a new code from the ENTER CODE prompt Press NO to resume the game in progress using the current data and exit the Menu Press the down arrow key to scroll to the next selection Home Roster and Guest Roster are entered in the same way Home Roster is used as an example LCD Display 05 SELECT HONE Press YES or the right or left arrow key to select the Home or Guest Roster submenu and show the first prompt on the LCD Press NO to resume the game in progress using the current data and exit the Menu Press the down arrow key to scroll to the next selection Continued on next page 182 Track Operations Continued from previous page LCD Display Action HDRE TEBR The TEAM NAME LL 2441 insert must be nnnnnnnnnnnnn inserted to enter the Team Name Message Center TNMC settings
291. nd seconds on the number pad and press ENTER Press CLEAR twice to clear changes and return to the game Press SET PLAY gt a second time to display the configured time for overtime length To accept the play clock reset 1 length press YES To decline the selection of the play clock reset 1 length press To change the play clock reset 1 length and set the play clock enter the new time in minutes and seconds on the number pad and press ENTER Press CLEAR twice to clear changes and return to the game Continued on next page Football Options 107 Continued from previous page LCD Display Action PLAY CLDCE EDIT Press SET PLAY gt a second time to 25 display the configured time for overtime length RESET 11 55 HE j 10 55 minutes seconds To accept the play clock reset 2 length press lt YES gt To decline the selection of the play clock reset 2 length press To change the play clock reset 2 length and set the play clock enter the new time in minutes and seconds on the number pad and press ENTER Press CLEAR twice to clear changes and return to the game Recall Last Down The lt RECALL LAST DOWN key is used to re display the Ball On Down To Go and Possession values of the previous play if a new value has been incorrectly entered If Auto Calculate is off this function is disabled When the LCD Display is
292. next selection Continued on next page 156 Soccer Options Continued from previous page LCD Display NAME AGBR HRRRRRRRRR Display Menu The TEAM NAME LL 2441 insert must be inserted to enter the Team Name Message Center TNMC settings The TNMC is updated after each selection is completed Use the COLUMNS ROWS and STROKE keys to select the WIDTH HEIGHT and FONT of the TNMC The defaults are 48 columns 8 rows and single stroke Enter up to fifteen 15 characters for the team name and press ENTER Reinsert the SOCCER LL 2440 insert to continue The TEAM NAME LL 2441 insert must be inserted to enter the Team Name Message Center TNMC settings The TNMC is updated after each selection is completed Use the COLUMNS ROWS and STROKE keys to select the WIDTH HEIGHT and FONT of the TNMC The defaults are 48 columns 8 rows and single stroke Enter up to ten 10 characters for the team abbreviation and press lt ENTER gt Reinsert the SOCCER LL 2440 insert to continue The DISPLAY MENU allows the user to start and edit the segment timer or to change the brightness of the scoreboard LCD Display l iENU PIRIN ENTER DISPLAY MENUS Press lt YES gt to select the Display submenu and show the first prompt on the LCD Press the down arrow key to scroll to the next selection Soccer Operation
293. next selection Press CLEAR to leave the menu Press lt YES gt or the right arrow key to select the Time of Day submenu and show the first prompt on the LCD Press to resume the game in progress using the current data and exit the Menu Press 1 or 2 to display the time of day in 12 hour default or 24 hour format Press ENTER or the down arrow key to scroll to the next selection Enter the time of day in hours minutes and seconds using the selected format on the number pad and press ENTER Press ENTER or the down arrow key to scroll to the next selection Press 1 or 2 to display the game clock default or the time of day clock on the scoreboard Press the down arrow key to exit the Menu and return to the game 276 Boxing Operations 19 3 Edit Though EDIT is not disabled for this sport code the buttons available on the insert are able to edit the settings without the use of the EDIT button Therefore this manual lists no function for the EDIT button Boxing Operations 277 Section 20 Strikeout Count Sport Insert 0G 163409 Strikeout Count Code 5099 The Sport Insert drawing is located at the end of this section The Team Name insert and Block Diagram drawings are located in Appendix A Reference Drawings Insert Strikeout Count Code 5099 Drawing A 163409 Refer to the inf
294. ng a winner that was set to the wrong side Use the arrow keys to select or as the winner and press ENTER WEIGHT CLASS Enter the score for the winner and press lt ENTER gt GT NNN WIN Press lt ESC gt or MENU to exit from the weight class settings 226 Wrestling Operations Edit Settings LCD Display FiENU TIRIN EDIT SETTINGS Time of Day LCD Display lFiENU PIRIN SELECT BF DAS ie 2 24 HOUR GF DAS S5 55 current setting Press YES or the right or left arrow key to select the Settings submenu and show the first prompt on the LCD Refer to Section 14 4 Press NO to resume the game in progress using the current data and exit the Menu Press the down arrow key to scroll to the next selection Press YES or the right arrow key to select the Time of Day submenu and show the first prompt on the LCD Press NO to resume the game in progress using the current data and exit the Menu Press 1 or 2 to display the time of day in 12 hour default or 24 hour format Press ENTER or the down arrow key to scroll to the next selection Enter the time of day in hours minutes and seconds using the selected format on the number pad and press ENTER Press ENTER or the down arrow key to scroll to the next selection Continued on next page Wrestling Operations 2
295. ng the selected format on the number Hh n ss pad and press lt ENTER gt HH P1P1 55 current setting Press ENTER or the down arrow key to scroll to the next selection RENU TIFE OF DAY Press 1 or 2 to display the game clock TBHRE 2 700 default or the time of day clock on the scoreboard 2 current setting Press the down arrow key to exit the Menu and return to the game RENU TIRE DE DAY If 2 tod is selected this message will be displayed ION T TH BLANK GARE Press ENTER to blank all game data on the scoreboard except for the Time of Day digits Settings The user can edit the following settings when Edit Settings has been selected from the Main Menu Main Clock Note 1 The settings entered for Main Clock are used with SET MAIN gt key Note 2 The period break and overtime lengths are used differently depending on the direction of the main clock For count down the main clock is set to the selected length decrements towards zero and stops at zero For count up the main clock is set to zero increments towards the selected length and stops when the selected length is reached 58 Baseball Operations MAIN CEOCH TIPIE PERIOD 55 55 current setting Error Position Enter the correct amount of time per period in minutes and seconds on the number pad and press lt ENTER gt For example 02 00 00 per game On some scoreboards t
296. nnel 1 for the first controller and Channels 2 8 for all remaining controllers radio receivers must be set with a switch setting corresponding to the console controlling the scoreboard and a Broadcast 1 BCAST 1 jumper set If you suspect interference from a nearby Daktronics system press CLEAR at the RADIO SETTINGS prompt to change the channel number Typically all multiple controller systems will use channel 1 for the first controller All other controllers will use sequential channel settings 2 8 The following table describes broadcast group and channel settings RADIO SETTINGS The LCD shows the current radio settings along BCASTY CHAN with a prompt to accept or modify these values L If the radio settings are correct press lt ENTER gt IEEE If these values are incorrect press CLEAR ENTER ACCEPT CLEAR TO MODIFY If CLEAR is pressed to modify the radio settings The LCD will toggle the LCD at the left is shown allowing edit of the these screens channel or broadcast group setting To edit the broadcast setting use the number keys BLAST GROUP 1 to enter the desired broadcast group and press RADIO CHAN Gi ENTER to accept The bottom line shows default settings Broadcast Group Setting 1 Use this setting for all multiple controller with single broadcast group setups The asterisk will move to the channel setting Use the number keys to edit this value and press lt ENTER gt to
297. nstead of penalties Modified scoreboards output so the driver packets are made before sending to lighten the load on interrupt overhead Also made it so it only sends the data up to the point where the driver data has not changed Version 1 5 8 Release Date 03 December 2002 Corrected a problem that caused the broadcast blank data not to be sent on power up Corrected a problem with the team name message centers being sent the wrong amount of data on a refresh packet Corrected the problem with test code 0001 blank display and scoreboard address test so they are all now working correctly Version 2 0 0 Release Date 15 January 2003 Added Water Polo code 4498 Added address 17 to hockey codes 4401 4402 and to basketball codes 1401 1402 Added scores by quarter for basketball Added scores by quarter for football Made rushing and passing yards work with negative numbers Fixed the receive of MDP from clock console in football and hockey Removed period key from boxing Made colon for adv time in wrestling test code blank 12 Introduction Added shot clock test to water polo and hockey e Made increment of period in set time so it would blank the quarter score if scoring by quarter Added time outs left TOL to column 15 of the rushing passing stats boards in football Added segment E col 8 to the colon of address 22 for the multi purpose timer Added broadcast group and channel selection for the Gen IV radios Ver
298. nt the current out number Press OUT 1 gt to set the out value to 0 when the current value is 3 Notes Refer to Subsection Auto Increment Inning The OUT 1 gt key automatically increments the inning and resets the out number to zero when e The Auto Inning Increment setting is on e The home AT BAT indicator is on e The current out number is 3 The lt OUT 1 gt key turns on the home AT BAT indicator when The Auto Inning Increment setting is on e The guest AT BAT indicator is on e The current out number is Batter Average Clear Batter Average The lt BATTER gt and AVERAGE keys are used to display the uniform number and batting average of the player currently at bat Pressing the CLEAR BATTER AVERAGE key sets both batter and average to blank AT BHT When the lt BATTER gt key is pressed enter the number of the player and press lt ENTER gt NN current setting AVERAGE When the lt AVERAGE gt key is pressed enter the NNN batting average of the player and press lt ENTER gt cu The value will be filled with leading zeros when it is NNN current setting entered 48 Baseball Operations Ball Count Strike Count Clear Count The BALL COUNT 1 gt and STRIKE COUNT 1 gt keys increment the Ball and Strike digits Pressing the CLEAR COUNT key sets the both counts to zero When the Auto Pitch Increment setting is on the BALL COUNT 1 gt and STRIKE COUNT 1 gt keys au
299. nu and show the first prompt on the LCD Press lt NO gt to resume the game in progress using the current data and exit the Menu Press the down arrow key to scroll to the next selection The TEAM NAME LL 2441 insert must be inserted to enter the Team Name Message Center TNMC settings The is updated after each selection is completed Use the COLUMNS ROWS and STROKE keys to select the WIDTH HEIGHT and FONT of the TNMC The defaults are 48 columns 8 rows and single stroke Enter up to fifteen 15 characters for the team name and press ENTER Reinsert the HOCKEY LL 2436 insert to continue 302 Water Polo Operations Display Menu The DISPLAY MENU allows the user to start and edit the segment timer or to change the brightness of the scoreboard LCD Display RENLU FIBIN ENTER Press YES to select the Display submenu and DISPLAY show the first prompt on the LCD 1 1 Press the down arrow key to scroll to the next selection 1591 84 RUN Note The segment timer function is disabled while the clock is running SEG TIMER Y N Press YES to exit the sport code and run the segment timer program Press or the down arrow key to scroll to the next selection EXIT GAME GRE YOU SURE Y N This prompt confirms that the user wants to exit the sport code and enter the segment timer The SEGMENT TIMER LL 2475 insert must be inserted
300. number on the number pad and press lt ENTER gt Baseball Operations 51 Runs The way that Runs are edited is determined by the Score By Inning setting If Score By Inning is disabled only the team total can be edited If Score By Inning is enabled the total by inning can be edited and the team total is automatically updated TEAM RUNS EDIT When the Score By Inning setting is disabled nn Press lt EDIT gt and the appropriate RUNS 1 gt key to yN current setting display the current setting for the home or guest team Enter the correct number on the number pad and press ENTER EDIT HORE RUNS When Inning is enabled INNING 81 Nn Press the appropriate RUNS 1 gt key to display the NN current setting number of runs by inning for the home or guest team Use the up and down arrow keys to scroll to the inning to be edited and press ENTER Enter the correct number of runs on the number pad and press lt ENTER gt The game total is automatically updated The LCD shows which key was pressed and the new value for the corresponding team Hits Errors Left on Base The home and guest HITS 1 gt ERRORS 1 gt and LEFT ON BASE 1 gt keys are all edited in the same way HITS 1 gt is used as an example TEOM HITS EDIT Press lt EDIT gt and the appropriate statistic key to display the current setting HOME P 9 NN current setting Enter the correct number on the number pad
301. o Go values for verification Down lt DOWN 1 gt increments down number RECALL LAST DOWN only functions when the setting of Ball On Auto Calculate is yes It will recall the Ball On Down and Yards To Go values of the previous play Yards To Go YARDS TO gt edits the current setting First and 10 FIRST amp 10 gt sets the Down value to 1 and the Yards to go value to 10 for a first down Time Out first press of TIME OUT displays the number of full time outs for the selected team The second press displays the number of partial timeouts if applicable Press enter to take a time out for the selected team Quick Reference 333 The TIME OUT gt selects a full 1s press or partial 219 press time out and starts the time out clock e time out clock may be displayed on the main scoreboard using the Time Outs Show on Main setting in the Menu under Edit Settings Possession lt POSS gt turns the possession indicators on or off for the respective team e the setting of Ball On Auto Calculate is yes the console will prompt for the play direction to calculate down and yards to go values Press 1 or 3 to indicate the new play direction Play Clock Time SET PLAY CLOCK changes the current value of the play clock timer Pressing SET PLAY CLOCK a second or third time allows the reset values of the play clock timer to be edited Team Statistics YARDS
302. o resume the game in progress using the current data and exit the Menu Press 1 or 2 to display the time of day in 12 hour default or 24 hour format Press ENTER or the down arrow key to scroll to the next selection Enter the time of day in hours minutes and seconds using the selected format on the number pad and press ENTER Press ENTER or the down arrow key to scroll to the next selection Press 1 or 2 to display the game clock default or the time of day clock on the scoreboard Press the down arrow key to exit the Menu and return to the game Hockey Options 143 LCD Display BF DAS BLANA GAME DATAS 9 5 Settings If 2 tod is selected this message will be displayed Press ENTER to blank all game data on the scoreboard except for the Time of Day digits The following settings can be edited by the user when EDIT SETTINGS has been selected from the Main Menu Main Clock Note 1 The settings entered for Main Clock are used with the SET MAIN CLOCK key Note 2 The period break and overtime lengths are used differently depending on the direction of the main clock For count down the main clock is set to the selected length decrements towards zero and stops at zero For count up the main clock is set to zero increments towards the selected length and stops when the selected length is reached LCD Display ELGEA PIBBDE TENTH
303. o resume the game where last shut off Press lt Clear NO gt to enter a new sport code number Team Score lt SCORE 1 gt and lt SCORE 1 gt increment and decrement the team score Time Out e first press of lt TIME OUT displays the number of full time outs for the selected team The second press displays the number of partial timeouts if applicable Press enter to take a time out for the selected team The TIME OUT gt selects a full 1st press or partial 219 press time out and starts the time out clock time out clock may be displayed the main scoreboard depending on the Time Outs Show on Main setting in the Menu under Edit Settings Half lt HALF 1 gt increments the current half number Shots on Goal SHOTS ON GOAL 1 gt and SHOTS ON GOALf I increment and decrement the team shots on goal Saves lt SAVES 1 gt and lt SAVES 1 gt increment and decrement the team goalie saves Penalty Kicks PENALTY KICKS 1 gt and PENALTY KICKS 1 gt increment and decrement the team penalty kicks Corner Kicks CORNER KICKS 1 gt and CORNER KICKS 1 gt increment and decrement the team corner kicks Fouls Quick Reference 337 lt FOULS 1 gt and lt FOULS 1 gt increment and decrement the team fouls Edit Key Function e Press lt EDIT gt followed by any of the following keys to edit the respective value lt SCORE 1 gt lt 5 1 gt
304. o set side of field to left Press 3 or the right arrow to set side of field to right Enter the field position yard line of the ball and press lt gt If Auto Calculate is off DOWN and TO GO must also be manually updated Press CLEAR twice to clear changes and return to the game Press CLEAR and ENTER to blank the Ball On Down and To Go sections of the scoreboard If Auto Calculate is on the current settings for BALL ON DOWN and TO GO are displayed To accept the current settings press YES To decline the selection of the current settings press NO To change the current settings use the right and left arrow keys to scroll to BALL ON DOWN or TO GO Enter the correct value on the number pad and press lt ENTER gt Press CLEAR twice to clear changes and return to the game This prompt displays briefly if the TO GO value is zero If the number of yards to go is actually zero press the FIRST amp 10 gt key If a short distance remains enter the correct TO GO value and press ENTER Continued on next page Football Options 113 Continued from previous page LCD Display DALL ON NN ILLEGAL VALUE displays when the BALL ON LL value is greater than the CENTER FIELD value we gol ILLEGAL VALUE entered in the settings menu current setting Enter the correct field position yard line of the ball and press lt ENTER gt The down is automat
305. oat SEU AQ ARE LOCATED TOGETHER TRACK DUAL 9 1091 0228 OUTDOOR 0 1065 0027 INDOOR TIME S REFER TO SIGNAL CORD 0A 1065 0026 10 S TO SCOREBOARD 0 1065 0102 20 s0 FROM OMNISPORT 1166 0011 50 OR POWER TIME J6 RED SCOREBOARD S af OUTPUT 120V AC BLACK WHITE SCOREBOARD GREEN OUTPUT ORANGE SCOREBOARD O TO SCOREBOARD BLUE OUTPUT ALL SPORT 5000 SERIES CONSOLE DAKTRONICS INC BROOKINGS SD 57006 PRo ALL SPORT 5000 55000 TRACK W OMNISPORT TIMER ADDED TEXT CONCERNING THE POWER TIME DES BY DRAWN BY BRAVEK 06 DEC 99 6 MAR O1 DATE DESCRIPTION NONE 1 1 9 6 RO 4A 7 1 2 5 5 9 RING BLACK WIRE MAIN SCOREBOARD SIGNAL Ww TIP RED WIRE MAIN SCOREBOARD SIGNAL SLEEVE EMATIC MAIN 1 4 PHONE BLACK WIRE WHITE WIRE RING BLACK WIRE AUXILIARY SCOREBOARD SIGNAL TIP WHITE WIRE AUXILIARY SCOREBOARD SIGNAL SHUNT SLEEVE EMATIC AUXILIARY 1 4 o DAKTRONICS MAIN AUXILIARY X SCOREBOARDA Z 1196 0015 AUXIL
306. odes for basketball volleyball wrestling hockey and football Added 16 column caption on address 223 for Kemper Arena to codes 1103 2103 3103 4103 and 6103 e Fixed the judo medical timer so if set to time of 0 00 would disable the medical timer when the medical exam key is pressed Introduction Added to judo to show the score penalty and medical status on the second line of the LCD Added pitch count keys to pitch and speed code Version 1 4 4 Release Date 26 July 2001 Added alternative driver tables for reverse of white blue to judo karate tae kwon do at driver address 109 110 111 Change radio channel limit to 75 channels Added address 15 16 to football code 6611 Added the select frame response to DSTI to indicate sport for hockey soccer baseball and wrestling Version 1 5 0 Release Date 26 October 2001 Made hockey penalty times to shift up to the top position on the scoreboard Changed to allow adjustment of penalty times after setting the main clock Added 50 1624 address 13 14 to hockey code 4601 Add team name address 221 to code 8604 for track Moved the at bat for baseball on 1630 50 1830 from 5 6 to 3 4 Changed segment timer so it can count up Changed the displays for American Airlines to show full timeouts on the main scoreboard and full partial timeouts on the auxiliary displays Changed the main hockey console so it would keep the SOG Keys active after data is received from the SOG consol
307. om provided Period Length o0 J y Error Position Auto Increment Pitches Auto Increment Inning Score by Inning Baseball Operations 63 Section 5 Pitch and Speed Sport Insert LL 2482 The Sport Insert drawing is located at the end of this section The Quick Reference is located in Appendix D Reference Drawings Insert itte ro ee ete Lat bd egentes Drawing A 130895 Refer to the information in Section 2 to start up the console and use the sport insert Read Section 2 carefully to fully understand the following operation instructions If an insert is lost or damaged a copy of the insert drawing located at the end of this section can be used until a replacement can be ordered Use the labels provided to attach the correct code number label to the sport insert in the appropriate location Write the code number in the space provided below If you do not know the code number to enter for your scoreboard refer to Appendix B in this manual If you do not know the model number of your scoreboard refer to the scoreboard Installation and Maintenance manual provided with the scoreboard 5 1 General Pitch and Speed Information Note The pitch and speed program interfaces with the JUGS or STALKER radar gun to provide pitch and speed information The pitch type and speed can be displayed on a matrix display or the speed only may be displayed on a fixed digit display 5 2 Pitch and Speed Keys
308. ons 81 tete ate dei eia e ei 105 Time Out OO t oboe tec e ette E e e eee tee tese pee ieu hebes 105 Set Play e e e dee Reip eerie et te 106 Teast eer edades viet aes 108 Quarter tna Ito aeu 109 Yards Lr 109 109 Ball meta 110 cd er Nn ence de 110 Time Out MEME 110 SCOPE 273330 Lo eh eit Ae qa ani diu eda irm e die 112 POSSeSSIOII stets RA Co Le Se 112 Yards gps eret E ENERGIES 114 Xatds Passing sedie deme d ne tede i ree 115 eet eee eie Die 115 8 2 M 116 nO ERN RIDE VE 116 iv Table of Contents 8 3 8 4 Section 9 Score l 2 3 T eiua RR RETIRER EET 116 Quarter ee 117 Time O ut On OT sese e DS 117 Mlle aane unen monete nano 118 New Game copio minimam ite 118 EN 118 Home Roster Guest Roster 119 Display Menu oae de theme e ent 121 M
309. ormation in Section 2 to start up the console and use the sport insert Read Section 2 carefully to fully understand the following operation instructions If an insert is lost or damaged a copy of the insert drawing located at the end of this section can be used until a replacement can be ordered 20 1 Strikeout Keys Season Strikeouts LCD Display TOTAL EDIT SEASON STRIKEOUTS sets the value for the NNNM season total strikeouts Enter the value from the ER keypad and press lt ENTER gt current value Game Strikeouts LCD Display CUR VALUE EDIT GAME STRIKEOUTS sets the value for the current game strikeouts Enter the value from the keypad and press lt ENTER gt N NNN current value Strikeout Count 279 Strikeouts 1 1 LCD Displa CUR VALUE STRIKEOUTS 1 gt and lt STRIKEOUTS 1 NNI increment and decrement the strikeout count for the game and season by NN new value The selected frame for the game strikeout count is sent through the RTD port each time the key is pressed Display Control Keys The display control keys will send the selected frame command through the RTD port Pressing these keys will initiate the display of that frame on the Venus series matrix control system The frames will be sent as Enhanced RTD Fields and have the following protocols 19 200 baud 8 data bits no parity The frame number for each of the
310. ort code and run the segment timer program Press or the down arrow key to scroll to the next selection EXIT GAME This prompt confirms that the user wants to exit the BRE YOU SURE Y N sport code and enter the segment timer The SEGMENT TIMER LL 2475 insert must be inserted to enter the Segment Timer settings Refer to Section 2 for more information on the Segment Timer Press YES to exit the sport code and run the segment timer program Press or the down arrow key to scroll to the next selection RENU TIRE GE If 2 tod is selected this message will be displayed ION T Ti BLANK GAME DATAZ Press ENTER to blank all game data on the scoreboard except for the Time of Day digits Boxing Operations 275 Auto Time The Auto Time option allows the user to choose automatic time transitions If turned ON the time will automatically switch between round and rest time If OFF is selected this change must be done manually ON is the default and is recommended LCD Display AUTO TIME ON 1 0N e OFF yN new value Time of Day LCD Display IENU PIRIh SELECT TOD BF DAS Pie 2 24 HOUR GF DAS TOD 55 55 current setting GF DAS GAME 0 current setting Press lt 1 gt to turn ON the Auto Time selection Press lt 2 gt to turn OFF the Auto Time selection Press the down arrow to scroll to the
311. ort code and run the segment timer program Press or the down arrow key to scroll to the next selection This prompt confirms that the user wants to exit the sport code and enter the segment timer The SEGMENT TIMER LL 2475 insert must be inserted to enter the Segment Timer settings Refer to Section 3 for more information on the Segment Timer Press lt YES gt to exit the sport code and run the segment timer program Press or the down arrow key to scroll to the next selection Press 0 through or use the arrow keys lt gt to select the intensity for the digits on the scoreboard Press to resume the game in progress using the current data and exit the Menu Press the down arrow key lt gt to scroll to the next selection Note Dim levels pertain to outdoor LED products Indoor LED and incandescent products only support one level of dimming at 5096 Basketball Operations Edit Settings LCD Display MENU MAIN EDIT SETTINGS Time of Day LCD Display MENU NAIN SELECT 7002 GF DAS ie 2 24 HOUR GF DAS TOD 55 55 current setting Press YES or the right or left arrow key to select the Settings submenu and show the first prompt on the LCD Press NO to resume the game in progress using the current data and exit the Menu Press the down arrow key to scroll to the next selection
312. pla Action 20 PENU PIRIN Press lt YES gt to begin selection of a new code from the ENTER CODE prompt CODE Press to resume the game in progress using the current data and exit the Menu Press the down arrow key to scroll to the next selection Strikeout Count 281 Dimming LCD Displa Action ITIN PIN Press 0 through or use the arrow keys lt gt lt gt gt to select the intensity for the digits on the scoreboard I CUCI LEVEL 0 8 NN current level NONE bright lt 0 gt Press lt NO gt to resume the game in progress using 9096 lt 1 gt the current data and exit the Menu 9096 lt 2 gt 10 lt 3 gt Press the down arrow key lt gt to scroll to the next 50 lt 4 gt selection 096 5 4096 lt 6 gt Note levels pertain to outdoor incandescent 3096 lt 7 gt products Indoor LED products only support one level 096 lt 8 gt of dimming at 50 10 lt 9 gt 20 3 Edit Strikeouts 1 1 STRIKEDUTS When lt gt and lt STRIKEOUTS 1 gt or lt EDIT gt PIF IRI and lt STRIKEOUTS 1 gt is pressed the current value EDIT PH L of strikeouts for the game is displayed for editing NN current setting Enter the new value for strikeouts for that game and press lt ENTER gt This changes the value of strikeouts for the current game and adjusts the season strikeout totals Press CLEAR
313. play 97880 lt WAZAARI 1 gt lt WAZAARI 1 gt keys increment decrement the selected opponent s Wazaari value N N current value Wazaari values can be 1 2 or zero Chui LCD Display WHITE EHUI ON lt CHUI gt lights the corresponding penalty indicator BLUE YUKON and increments the opposing players Yuko by one 1 N new value Pressing lt CHUI gt a second time clears the penalty indicator and decrements the opposing players Yuko by one The LCD shows the current indicator status and the new Yuko value for the opposing player Note Any other penalties Keikoku or Shido for the selected player are cleared when a Chui penalty is assessed Corresponding Wazaari and Koka opponent values are decremented Yuko LCD Display 1 lt YUKO 1 gt and lt YUKO 1 gt keys increment or decrement the selected opponent s Yuko value n current value Yuko values can be 1 9 or zero 262 Judo Operations Shido LCD Display WHITE SHG ON BLUE KOKA N new value Koka LCD Display KOKA 1 n current value lt SHIDOs gt lights the corresponding penalty indicator and increments the opposing players Koka by one Pressing lt SHIDO gt a second time clears the penalty indicator and decrements the opposing players Koka by one The LCD shows the current indicator status and the new Koka value for the opposing player Note Any other penalties Keikok
314. play the current N quarter setting 1 N current setting Enter the correct quarter number on the number pad and press ENTER The full time outs may be reset Time Out On Off LCD Display TIME DUTS EDIT Press EDIT TIME OUT gt to display the Yn current time setting for full time outs FULL 55 10 55 minutes seconds Enter the correct time on the number pad and press ENTER DUT EDIT Press TIME OUT gt a second time or the down arrow key to display the configured time for 101 PARTIAL 11 55 partial time out length 17 55 minutes seconds Enter the correct time on the number pad and press lt ENTER gt Football Options 117 8 3 Menu The MENU key allows the user to select from a list of options specific for each sport The up and down arrow keys allow the user to scroll through the menu list Pressing a key other than YES the arrow keys and other allowed keys exits the Menu function The MENU function should be used at the beginning of each new game to edit the Home and Guest Rosters New Game LCD Display MENG MAIN GATE New Code LCD Display MENG MAIN CODES Press YES to clear all of the program data for the last game played or the game in progress and begin running the selected sport Press NO to resume the game in progress using the current data and exit the Menu Press the down arrow ke
315. play until a key is pressed The maximum allowed blood time is set for each competitor at the beginning of a match and reset to this time when the Reset Match function is performed When enabled the blood times are displayed in the main clock digits and the corresponding home or guest match score digits flash The main clock must be stopped to use the blood timer Press START BLOOD TIME to start the blood timer for the home or guest competitor The injury blood timer counts down from the maximum allowed time until lt STOP BLOOD TIME is pressed or 0 00 is reached The blood time is shown on the LCD display with H for home or G for guest Press the STOP BLOOD gt key to stop the blood timer and return the period time to the main clock digits A key press is required before the main clock digits return to period time This gives the coach time to see how much blood time remains Wrestling Operations 219 Start Stop Recovery Time LCD Display RECOVERY AG 6 recovery timer advantage timer p n 14 2 Edit The recovery time is set to the configured recovery time for each competitor when the START RECOVERY gt key is pressed When enabled the recovery times are displayed in the main clock digits and the corresponding home or guest match score digits flash The main clock must be stopped to use the recovery ti
316. poma eme 242 I UTD Em 243 Timne of Tay eta e RR be RU ERR 244 16 4 eta detenta hee aids hata ait 245 Main Clock ee eter ei be eie Ue P re 245 Switch Output sini ne OR et coeno 245 Table of Contents ix Section 17 171 Kwor do Key Si ea etta EAE ce i 247 Dcus EE E 247 nort n e 247 KI os eate E nivem Ie nie Rid Mates 248 248 e 248 Total er eei maa ite me e ideae e deu rd 248 W ight Cla88 5 UT ERREUR ERR 248 Round Length hem E 249 Rest Length oec Oh eo deae a mae deis 249 Round d E 249 17 2 hug e M 249 SRR ee alle aR olde atts 250 New Code eoe nr rm t e ls Soa Ene ete eR eR pens 250 Reset Round ERI RERUM 250 Reset Rest eee eret 251 Display Menu beate Er minime tede 251 Edit Settings i eee hne eda eo erroe a a ete cite Eri 253 Time of are d ra I abb 253 17 3 baton montent dona 254 DG f o deed eh ees 254 17 4 DOLE BS P 254 Auto Man Ee pr te 254 Switch Out
317. pressing lt EDIT gt lt SCORE 1 gt scrolls through the game scores for the selected team 342 Quick Reference Sport 5000 Wrestling Note Refer to Section 14 Wrestling Operation for more detailed operating instructions Start Up Turnthe Power Switch ON Atthe Resume Game Y N prompt Press ENTER YES gt to resume the game where last shut off or Press lt Clear NO gt to enter a new sport code number Team Score lt SCORE 1 gt and lt SCORE 1 gt increment decrement the team score MATCH SCORE 1 gt MATCH SCORE 2 gt MATCH SCORE 3 gt and MATCH SCORE 12 increment and decrement the match score Match Number MATCH NUMBER 1 gt increments the match number RESET MATCH resets the match score and sets match time to the configured Period length Period lt PERIOD 1 gt increments the period number Injury and Blood Time START INJURY TIME STOP INJURY TIME START BLOOD and STOP BLOOD TIME control the injury and blood time out timers e The Blood and Injury time can be displayed on the scoreboard using the Blood Injury Show Main setting in the Menu under Edit Settings Advantage Time HOME GREEN gt GUEST RED ADVANTAGE and STOP ADVANTAGE gt are used to control the advantage timer Press the team advantage key to set the clock to decrease the opposing team advantage time or increase the selected
318. pt The bottom line shows default settings Continued on next page 30 Basic Operations Continued from previous page LCD Display CAST GROUP RADIO CHAN 01 The bottom line shows default settings 2 6 Standard Keys Action Broadcas t Group Channel Setting Control Scoreboards 0 Scoreboards All in BCAST Group 1 Set to corresponding BCAST 1 Channel All in BCAST Group 2 Set to Corresponding BCAST 2 Channel All in BCAST Group 3 Set to corresponding BCAST 3 Channel All in BCAST Group 4 Set to corresponding BCAST 4 Channel The Quick Reference is located in Appendix C Start START is used to start the main clock The green LED on the START key is on while the main clock is running Stop STOP is used to stop the main clock The green LED on the START key is off while the main clock is stopped Basic Operations 31 Enter Yes The lt ENTER YES gt key has two functions e Completes an action The asterisk is a reminder that this key is to be pressed when asterisk appears on the LCD Serves as YES for input prompts Clear No lt CLEAR NO gt key has two functions e Clears the LCD of numerical information Serves as NO for input prompts Edit The EDIT key allows the user to select which field on the scoreboard to be edited such as team score After
319. put A ee awed 254 Default Settings 255 18 1 judo Competit rStatus se Red ede WR aA 257 18 2 ETE A A 258 White and Blue reete 258 Set Osaekomi ete rectc t 258 5 TEE Ee RT ER ee velle e e 259 ECT HU 259 Sect Lec ent Cie Xx nt 259 MIL E 260 Will hosted ao m ice ir ctetur 260 ln m 260 Medical mec ves 261 Keer OK Ue M 261 N 262 LED re ELE 262 eA E IUE 262 Dec m Ucet UM 263 cd unte aM I Antec EQ A RI 263 18 3 ENNIO E A E 264 264 x Table of Contents 18 4 18 5 Section 19 Mn ee eee e ah isthe enh adh b per teo rene e 264 PE 264 NewCode Eta 265 Display Mets ers
320. r number This message displays when the answer to the previous prompt is YES and the roster is full Continued on next page Basketball Operations 85 Continued from previous page LCD Display Action HOME PLASER NN 5 1 _F N P NN NN player number 545 in game 5 0 out of game number of points HOME PLASER NN DELETE PLAYER If the player is found the player s game status and statistics can be changed To change a player s statistics 1 Use the up and down arrow keys to select the player from the list 2 Use the left and right arrow keys to select the statistic to be changed 3 Enter the correct number for the selected statistic on the number pad and press lt ENTER gt To change a player s game status 1 Use the up and down arrow keys to select the player from the list 2 Press IN GAME or OUT 3 The 5 field on the display changes to show the player s current status Press CLEAR to exit the menu and return to the game To delete an incorrect player from the roster use the up and down arrow keys to select the player from the list and press DELETE PLAYER gt Press YES to remove the player from the roster Press or CLEAR to decline the deletion process and return to the game 86 Basketball Operations Individual Substitution LCD Display IND SUB HONE NA IN FOR NN current sett
321. r pad and press lt ENTER gt PARTIAL current setting TIRE DUTS TIRE Enter the amount of time for a partial time out in mmcc minutes and seconds on the number pad and press PARTIAL 1 55 UE fif 55 current setting For example 00 20 OUTS AGDE Press lt YES gt to display the time out time on the LCD and the main clock digits of the scoreboard IN SHOW GN MAINO N while the time out clock is active N current setting Press to display the time out time on the LCD only Team Score LCD Display SCORE P IBDE This feature must be enabled for all player foul UPDATE PLAYER points panels Press YES to allow entry of a player number after the home or guest team score are incremented or decremented Press to prevent entry of a player number 100 Basketball Operations Team Fouls LCD Display TEAM 5 UPDATE PLAYER TEAM 5 n 1 BONUS current setting TEAM 5 e 5HBT BONUS NN Y current setting Select Captions LCD Display SELECT CAPTIONS 1 lt 2 OFF This feature must be enabled for all player foul points panels Press lt YES gt to allow entry of a player number after the home or guest team fouls are incremented or decremented Press to prevent entry of a player number Enter the number of team fouls permitted before the 1 on 1 bonus applies on t
322. r OFF The amber LED on the HORN key is on when the Auto Horn feature is enabled The LED is off when the Auto Horn feature is disabled and the horn is in Manual mode LON 2 ON OFF current setting Manual Horn Press HORN to sound the main horn The horn sounds as long as the key is pressed The horn stops sounding when the key is released Remote Start Stop Controls Main Clock Control The remote Start Stop control box plugs into J4 on the back of the Sport 5000 console This unit has a rocker switch for Start Stop and a momentary button for horn The Start Stop switch starts and stops the main timer The horn button sounds the horn as long as the button is pressed 36 Basic Operations Shot Clock Control The remote shot clock control box plugs into J7 on the back of the Sport 5000 console This unit has a rocker switch for Start Stop and a momentary button for reset When the reset button is pressed the shot clock timer is changed to the reset value and stops the timer from decrementing The shot clock timer restarts when the reset button is released In independent mode the Start Stop switch starts and stops the shot clock timer when pushed but does not stop when the main clock is stopped When in synchronized mode the shot clock timer will stop and start with the main clock switches only if it is running in the beginning 2 8 General Multi Purpose Timer Information There is no insert for the
323. r is found the player s game status and statistics can be changed To change a player s statistics Use the up and down arrow keys to select the player from the list Use the left and right arrow keys to select the statistic to be changed The display shifts to show all of the statistic fields Enter the correct number for the selected statistic on the number pad and press ENTER To change a player s game status Use the up and down arrow keys to select the player from the list Press IN or OUT OF GAME The S field on the display changes to show the player s current status Press CLEAR to exit the menu and return to the game To delete an incorrect player from the roster use the up and down arrow keys to select the player from the list and press DELETE PLAYER Press YES to remove the player from the roster Press NO or CLEAR to decline the deletion process and return to the game Volleyball Operations 195 Individual Substitution LCD Display IND SUB HOME When the home or guest INDIV SUB gt key is pressed this prompt asks the jersey number of the IN FOR NN player entering and leaving the current setting Enter the jersey number of the player entering the game on the number pad and press ENTER Enter the jersey number of the player leaving the game the number pad and press ENTER IND SUB HORE This message is
324. r program Press NO or the down arrow key to scroll to the next selection EXIT GARE This prompt confirms that the user wants to exit the ARE YOU SURE S N sport code and enter the segment timer The SEGMENT TIMER LL 2475 insert must be inserted to enter the Segment Timer settings Refer to Section 3 for more information on the segment timer Press YES to exit the sport code and run the segment timer program Press NO or the down arrow key to scroll to the next selection Continued on next page Tennis Operations 171 Continued from previous page LCD Display PENU Press lt 0 gt through or use arrow keys lt gt to select the intensity for the digits on the LEVEL 0 9 NN scoreboard NN current level Press to resume the game in progress using the current data and exit the Menu Press the down arrow key lt gt to scroll to the next selection Note Dim levels pertain to outdoor LED products Indoor LED and incandescent products only support one level of dimming at 5096 Edit Settings LCD Display PENU PRIN Press YES or the right or left arrow key to select the Settings submenu and show the first prompt EDIT SETTINGS the LCD Refer to Section 11 4 Settings Press NO to resume the game in progress using the current data and exit the Menu Press the down arrow key to sc
325. r the down arrow key to scroll to the next selection RENU BIRPING Press 0 through or use the arrow keys lt gt LEVEL 0 9 NN lt gt gt to select the intensity for the digits on the scoreboard NN current level NONE bright 90 80 10 60 096 096 3096 96 10 Press lt NO gt to resume the game in progress using the current data and exit the Menu Press the down arrow key lt gt to scroll to the next selection Note Dim levels pertain to outdoor LED products Indoor LED and incandescent products only support one level of dimming at 5096 266 Judo Operations Edit Settings LCD Display EDIT SETTINGS Time of Day LCD Display lF iENU IRIN SELECT BF DAS ie 2 24 HOUR GF DAS TOD 55 55 current setting GF DAS GAME _ 2 700 current setting Press YES or the right or left arrow key to select the Settings submenu and show the first prompt on the LCD Press to resume the game in progress using the current data and exit the Menu Press the down arrow key to scroll to the next selection Press lt YES gt or the right arrow key to select the Time of Day submenu and show the first prompt on the LCD Press to resume the game in progress using the current data and exit the Menu Press 1 or 2 to display the time of day in 12
326. r to scroll through the menu list Pressing a key other than YES the arrow keys and other allowed keys exits the Menu function New Game LCD Display FIENU FIBIN Press YES to clear all of the program data for the last game played or the game in progress and begin NEW GARE 2 running the selected sport Press to resume the game in progress using the current data and exit the Menu Press the down arrow key to scroll to the next selection 272 Boxing Operations New Code LCD Display NEW CODE Dimming LCD Display MENG DIMMING LEVEL 0 9 NN NN current level 50 lt 5 gt 4096 6 3096 lt 7 gt 20 8 10 lt 9 gt Press YES to begin selection of a new code from the ENTER CODE prompt Press NO to resume the game in progress using the current data and exit the Menu Press the down arrow key to scroll to the next selection Press 0 through or use the arrow keys lt gt gt to select the intensity for the digits on the Scoreboard Press to resume the game in progress using the current data and exit the Menu Press the down arrow key to scroll to the next selection Note Dim levels pertain to outdoor LED products Indoor LED and incandescent products only support one level of dimming at 5096 Boxing Operations 273 Home Roster Guest Roster Home Rost
327. r when HORN is N current setting pressed 310 Water Polo Operations Default Settings Write the settings for this installation in the space Custo provided Yes Period Length __ 150 BreakLengh 1000 fJ Jo ___ Overtime Length 500 i Minor Penaty 025 1 FuTmeOus __ FulTmeOu __ 00 00 Partial Time Outs o f TimeOut ooo Switch Output Clock 0 Water Polo Operations 311 Appendix A Reference Drawings In this appendix the following drawings are filed in numerical order by drawing number Track Football SCBD w Finish Lynx in Press Box option 3 Track Football SCBD w Finish Lynx Track Football SCBD w Finish Lynx in Press Box option 2 Rear View A S 5010 Connector Assignments LAYOUT 8 COLUMN DRIVER lll Block Diagram A S 5000 3000 BB VB amp WR 1 Block Diagram A S 5000 3000 BB VB amp WR 3 Block Diagram A S 5000 3000 Hockey sse Block Diagram A S 5000 3000 Outdoor A S 5000 Track w OmniSport Schematic Dual 1 4 Phone J Box w Shunt Jack
328. rent level NONE bright lt 0 gt Press NO to resume the game in progress sb using the current data and exit the Menu 80 lt 2 gt ee lt 3 gt Press the down arrow key lt gt to scroll to the next acm lt gt selection 096 5 10 6 Note Dim levels pertain to outdoor LED products 3096 lt 7 gt Indoor LED and incandescent products only UI lt 8 gt support one level of dimming at 50 096 lt 9 gt Edit Settings FIENU FIBIN Press YES or the right or left arrow key to select a Da the Settings submenu and show the first prompt on EDIT SETTINGS 3 the LCD Refer to Section 4 4 Press to resume the game in progress using the current data and exit the Menu Press the down arrow key to scroll to the next selection Time of Day _ _ Press lt YES gt or the right arrow key t select the SELECT 7002 submenu and show the first prompt on Press to resume the game in progress using the current data and exit the Menu Continued on next page Baseball Operations 57 4 4 Continued from previous page LCD Display Action FENU TIRE DAY Press 1 or 2 to display the time of day in 12 3 hour default or 24 hour format 1 2 2 24 HOUR 2550 Press ENTER or the down arrow key to scroll to the next selection GE DAY Enter a ime E is duds seconds usi
329. rn to the game Edit The lt EDIT gt key allows the user to select and edit the following scoreboard fields Press lt EDIT gt and the key for the home or guest field to be edited Time Out Note 1 Only the time outs configured in the EDIT SETTINGS function are displayed on the LCD and available for selection please refer to the table on the following page Note 2 The up and down arrow keys can also be used to select the full and partial time outs Hockey Options 137 LCD Display DUT HORE N current setting TINE GUT HOnlE PARTIAL N current setting Press EDIT TIME OUT gt for the home or guest team to display the current setting of partial time outs remaining Enter the correct number of full time outs on the number pad and press lt ENTER gt Press EDIT TIME OUT gt for the home or guest team a second time or the down arrow key to display the current setting of full time outs remaining Enter the correct number of partial time outs on the number pad and press lt ENTER gt Score Shots on Goal and Saves The home and guest SCORE 1 1 gt SHOTS ON GOAL 1 1 gt and lt SAVES 1 1 gt keys are all edited in the same way Score is used as an example LCD Display TEAM nnn NNN current setting Period 1 LCD Display N current setting Press lt EDIT gt and the appropriate
330. roll to the next selection 172 Tennis Operations Time of Day LCD Display SELECT 7002 GF DAS ie 2 24 HOUR GF DAS TOD s5 55 current setting GF DAS GAME 2 00 current setting GF DAS BLANA GAME DATAS Press lt YES gt or the right arrow key to select the Time of Day submenu and show the first prompt on the LCD Press lt NO gt to resume the game in progress using the current data and exit the Menu Press lt 1 gt or lt 2 gt to display the time of day in 12 hour default or 24 hour format Press lt ENTER gt or the down arrow key to scroll to the next selection Enter the time of day in hours minutes and seconds using the selected format on the number pad and press ENTER Press ENTER or the down arrow key to scroll to the next selection Press 1 or 2 to display the game clock default or the time of day clock on the scoreboard Press the down arrow key to exit the Menu and return to the game If 2 tod is selected this message will be displayed Press ENTER to blank all game data on the scoreboard except for the Time of Day digits Tennis Operations 173 11 4 Settings The following settings can be edited by the user when EDIT SETTINGS has been selected from the Main Menu Main Clock Note 1 The settings entered for Main Clock are used with the SET MA
331. rrow key to scroll to the next selection Continued on next page 208 Volleyball Operations Continued from previous page LCD Display USER 1 2 KILL current setting USER 1 Team Score USER DEF 1 Player Foul USER 1 7 3 BLOCKS current setting N USER DEF 1 Team Score USER DEF 1 Player Foul USER 1 IN 4 08105 5ER DEF 1 Team Score USER DEF 1 Player Foul N current setting Action Press 2 or use the left and right arrow keys to scroll to KILLS Press YES to display KILLS on the scoreboard Press NO to decline the selection and return to the game Press the down arrow key to scroll to the next selection Press 3 or use the left and right arrow keys to scroll to BLOCKS Press YES to display BLOCKS on the scoreboard Press NO to decline the selection and return to the game Press the down arrow key to scroll to the next selection Press 4 or use the left and right arrow keys to scroll to DIGS Press YES to display DIGS on the scoreboard Press NO to decline the selection and return to the game Press the down arrow key to scroll to the next selection Volleyball Operations 209 Select Captions LCD Display SELECT CAPTIONS This menu option allows for the controlled backlit 041 gt captions to be turned ON OFF 1 Press 1 key to sele
332. rs in an inning LCD Display INNING SETTINGS Enter the number of OVERS to be set as the default for each inning OVERS Y current setting Press lt gt to accept the new value 290 Cricket Operations Time of Day LCD Display NENU NAIN SELECT TOD GF DAS ie 2 24 HOUR GF DAS TOD 55 55 current setting GF DAS GAME _ 2 700 current setting Press YES or the right arrow key to select the Time of Day submenu and show the first prompt on the LCD Press NO to resume the game in progress using the current data and exit the Menu Press 1 or 2 to display the time of day in 12 hour default or 24 hour format Press ENTER or the down arrow key to scroll to the next selection Enter the time of day in hours minutes and seconds using the selected format on the number pad and press lt ENTER gt Press lt gt or the down arrow key to scroll to the next selection Press 1 or 2 to display the game clock default or the time of day clock on the scoreboard Press the down arrow key to exit the Menu and return to the game Cricket Operations 291 Section 22 Water Polo Operations Sport Insert 0G 178439 The Sport Insert drawing is located at the end of this section The Team Name insert and Block Diagram drawings are located in Appendix A Reference Drawings
333. s Sport Insert LL 2483 The Sport Insert drawing is located at the end of this section The Team Name insert and Block Diagram drawings are located in Appendix A Reference Drawings Block Diagrams A S5000 3000 Outdoor Sports Drawing A 124690 Insert Team ette o one Drawing A 125290 lrisert Drawing 131274 Refer to the information in Section 2 to start up the console and use the sport insert Read Section 2 carefully to fully understand the following operation instructions If an insert is lost or damaged a copy of the insert drawing located at the end of this section can be used until a replacement can be ordered Use the labels provided in Appendix B to attach the correct code number label to the sport insert in the appropriate location Write the code number in the space provided below Write the correct code number here If you do not know the code number to enter for your scoreboard refer to Appendix B in this manual If you do not know the model number of your scoreboard refer to the Installation and Maintenance manual provided with the scoreboard 11 1 Tennis Keys Serve LCD Display SERVE SERVE turns the serve indicators on or off for N the respective player 1 Tennis Operations 165 Matches Won 1 LCD Display PATCHES WGN 1 Press MATCHES
334. s 157 LCD Display l iENU BISPLRS RUN SEG TIMER EXIT DANE ARE SURE S N MENU BI iG LEVEL 0 9 NN NN current level bright 9096 8096 10 0 50 4096 3096 D 10 Continued from previous page Note The segment timer function is disabled while the clock is running Press YES to exit the sport code and run the segment timer program Press NO or the down arrow key to scroll to the next selection This prompt confirms that the user wants to exit the sport code and enter the segment timer The SEGMENT TIMER LL 2475 insert must be inserted to enter the Segment Timer settings Refer to Section 3 for more information on the segment timer Press YES to exit the sport code and run the segment timer program Press NO or the down arrow key to scroll to the next selection Press 0 through 9 or use the arrow keys lt gt gt to select the intensity for the digits on the scoreboard Press to resume the game in progress using the current data and exit the Menu Press the down arrow key lt gt to scroll to the next selection Note Dim levels pertain to outdoor LED products Indoor LED and incandescent products only support one level of dimming at 5096 Soccer Options Settings LCD Display EDIT SETTINGS Time of Day LCD Display IENU IRIh SELECT 7002 GF DAS ie
335. s entered 2 CLOCK STOP E 4 2 e switch closes when the main clock is stoppe IIT N SWITCH GUTPUTSN and opens when the main clock is running External STOPP devices are disabled when the main clock is running N current setting Th h cl hen th h ds Th e switch closes when the main horn sounds This ITIN SWITCH DUTPUT could be when Auto Horn is enabled and the main 3 fIAIN HORNO clock reaches zero or when lt gt is pressed N CURRENT SETTING Default Settings Write the settings for this installation in the space Custom provided Main Clock Period 4 00 Length sWenowu meminm o mo we s oe 270 Judo Operations Section 19 Boxing Operations Sport Insert 06 96892 Boxing Code 0291 The Sport Insert drawing is located at the end of this section The Team Name insert and Block Diagram drawings are located in Appendix A Reference Drawings Insert Boxing Code 291 Drawing A 096892 Refer to the information in Section 2 to start up the console and use the sport insert Read Section 2 carefully to fully understand the following operation instructions If an insert is lost or damaged a copy of the insert drawing located at the end of this section can be used until a replacement can be ordered 19 1 Boxing Keys Set Round Time Set
336. s the left arrow key to shift all of the inning numbers and scores left one digit then press GHIFT lt BLANK lt ENTER gt current setting Press the right arrow key to blank all of the inning numbers and start a new set then press lt ENTER gt Display Innings Select the number of innings that the scoreboard can display Note The Display Innings setting is not displayed if the Score By Inning setting is not enabled DISPLAY INNINGS Enter the number of innings to be shown up to 12 and then press lt ENTER gt SIZE NN number up to 12 Baseball Operations 61 Display Time Select if Time or At Bat will be displayed on the scoreboard Note This applies only to BA 2001 and BA 2005 scoreboards ISPLOY TIME Y N Pressing lt YES gt will select Time lt gt current setting Pressing will select At Bat An asterisk will indicate which is selected Select Captions SELECT CAPTIONS This menu option allows for the controlled backlit captions to be turned ON OFF Hle 20FF 6 Press the 1 key to select ON and OFF for captions controlled by control 1 Press the 2 key to select ON and OFF for captions controlled by control 2 Switch Output The Sport 5000 series console has a switch that can be used to drive a number of different devices The switch can be configured to operate under different settings The default sett
337. scroll to the next selection Note Dim levels pertain to outdoor LED products Indoor LED and incandescent products only support one level of dimming at 5096 Radar Gun Type LCD Display RADAR GUN TYPE Press the left or right arrow keys to select the type of radar gun to interface with and press lt ENTER gt JUGS lt gt STALKER current setting 68 Pitch and Speed LCD Display STALKER GUN SPORTX PRO current setting Speed Adjust Coefficient LCD Display SPEED ADJUST NAAN current setting Angle Offset Coefficient 10 0 9848 15 0 9659 20 0 9397 25 0 9063 30 0 866 Select Speed LCD Display SELECT RANGE SPEED gt NN MPH current setting If the gun is a stalker type the next prompt will be to select which type of stalker gun is used Press the left or right arrow keys to select and press lt gt In some locations the radar gun is mounted at an angle offset from the direct line of the pitch resulting in a lower speed than actual If this is the case for your application enter the cosine of the angle between the pitcher catcher line and the radar gun The console will adjust the speed received accordingly Set the speed adjust coefficient to 0 if no speed adjustment is necessary Approximately every one hundredth from the coefficient will increase the speed by one mph Example 0 9848 95mph 0 9748 96mph
338. selection Press YES or the right arrow key to select the Time of Day submenu and show the first prompt on the LCD Press NO to resume the game in progress using the current data and exit the Menu Press 1 or 2 to display the time of day in 12 hour default or 24 hour format Press ENTER the down arrow key to scroll to the next selection Enter the time of day in hours minutes and seconds using the selected format on the number pad and press lt ENTER gt Press ENTER or the down arrow key to scroll to the next selection Continued on next page Track Operations 185 Continued from previous page OF DAY Press 1 or 2 to display the game clock GAME 2 current setting default or the time of day clock on the scoreboard Press the down arrow key to exit the Menu and return to the game FENU TIRE GF DAY If 2 tod is selected this message will be displayed ION T 2 BLANK GAME DATA Press lt gt to blank all game data on the scoreboard except for the Time of Day digits 12 4 Settings The following settings can be edited by the user when EDIT SETTINGS has been selected from the Main Menu Guest 2 and Guest 3 key function LCD Display GUEST 2 3 VALUE This setting determines the function of the Guest 2 and Guest 3 keys COREG EVINT AT When the value is set to EVNT HT the scoreboard will display event h
339. sion 2 0 1 Release Date 12 May 2003 Added checks in the verify configuration that checks to see that all clock precision settings are valid Added address 17 to 6402 for arena football Added address 17 to code 220 for tennis e Added a wrestling code to the custom codes for the Resch Center Added 2 digit time to address 61 columns 12 13 in code 5501 for baseball for the model BA 2012 e Fixed the radio channel select to work for Gen IV radios after exit from the production test Changed receive of DakStats information so there is not a scoreboard update done unless the information has changed from previous data Added address 223 for ply fl pts to 4401 and 4402 and also to volleyball e Fixed the shot clock when not set for blanking so it will count down when shot time is less than the game time e Added code 221 for tennis models TN 2010 and TN 2011 Version 2 0 2 Release Date 29 May 2003 Added period quarter game caption to custom codes 9102 9202 9302 9402 9602 Addedan option to rodeo code 8000 in scored events to have the horn still sound after the horn time period after the timer has been stopped e Added football mode to the MS 2009 and MS 2118 on address 71 72 73 Version 2 0 5 Release Date 25 August 2003 Added code 556 for C33 interface Introduction 13 Added code 399 for rowing controller Added weight class with H G points for win on player foul stat panels to wrestling Added code 8610
340. sport insert Read Section 2 carefully to fully understand the following operation instructions If an insert is lost or damaged a copy of the insert drawing located at the end of this section can be used until a replacement can be ordered 6 1 Clock Console Codes The clock console is used to keep clock and timer information for basketball and football codes The code numbers are listed below CODE 1000 Basketball Main Clock and Shot Clock 6000 Football Main Clock and Shot Clock 6 2 Clock Console Keys Timer Start TIMER START starts the Shot Clock or Play Clock timer Note This function may also be implemented with a remote start stop switch connected to J7 Timer Stop TIMER STOP stops the Shot Clock or Play Clock timer Note This function may also be implemented with a remote start stop switch connected to J7 Clock Console Operation 73 6 3 Set Timer Time LCD Display PLAY CLOC SET TIMER TIME sets the current time displayed on the shot clock or play clock timer CURR 11 55 17 55 current setting Set Reset Time 1 LCD Display PLAY CLOC SET RESET TIME 1 gt sets the current Reset 1 27 value for the shot clock or play clock timer RESET 1 17 55 17 56 current setting Set Reset Time 2 LCD Display PLAY CLOC SET RESET TIME 2 sets the current Reset 2 2 value for the shot clock or play clock timer RESET 2 11 55 17 55 current setting Timer Reset 1 TI
341. ss EDIT TIME OUT gt for the home or guest team a second time or the down arrow key to display the current setting of full time outs remaining Enter the correct number of partial time outs on the number pad and press lt ENTER gt 198 Volleyball Operations Score 1 1 LCD Display TEAM SCORE EDIT Press lt EDIT gt and either of the SCORE keys for the home or guest team to display the current team score setting NN NNN current setting Enter the correct team score on the number pad and press ENTER Games Won 1 LCD Display GANES WON EDIT Press EDIT GAMES WON 1 gt for the home or 7 uest team to display the current setting of games HDRE NN g gotg won N current setting Enter the correct number of games won on the number pad and press ENTER Aces Kills Blocks and Digs The home and guest ACES 1 gt KILLS 1 gt BLOCKS 1 gt and DIGS 1 gt keys are all edited in the same way lt ACES 1 gt is used as an example LCD Display CES EDIT Press EDIT and the appropriate statistic key to display the current setting HORE p YN current setting Enter the correct number on the number pad and press ENTER rcc IT If the program is configured to update the player ACES EDIT Inm f NINE stats this prompt displays asking for a player HOME PLAYER 9 current setting Enter the jersey number of th
342. t to display the number of full time outs remaining To accept the full time out and start the time out clock press lt YES gt Full time out decrements To decline the selection of a full time out press lt NO gt Full time out does not decrement Note The up and down arrow keys can also be used to select the full and partial time outs Press lt TIME OUT gt a second time to display the number of partial time outs remaining To accept the partial time out and start the time out clock press lt YES gt Partial time out decrements To decline the selection of a partial time out press lt gt Partial time out does not decrement Note The up and down arrow keys can also be used to select the full and partial time outs This message appears when there are no time outs left Basketball Operations 81 Score 1 2 3 1 The home and guest lt SCORE 1 gt lt SCORE 2 gt and lt SCORE 3 gt keys are used to increment the team score and the lt SCORE 1 gt key is used to decrement the team score LCD Display TEAM 5 0 1 nnn NNN current setting TEAM 5 0 1 AGNE PLAYER Y current setting HOME PLASER NN NOT FOUND ADOP current setting HOME PLASER NN ROSTER FULL current setting HOME PLASER POINTS NN current setting Press the appropriate score key to increment or decrement the score for the home or guest team The LC
343. t based on the current period number If the current time was set before the PERIOD 1 gt key is pressed the time will not be adjusted 214 Wrestling Operations Set Main Clock Period Times LCD Display MAIN CLOCK SET CURR 11 55 1 fif 55 1 minutes seconds tenths of a second NAIN CLOCK EDIT PERIOD Fifi 55 17 55 minutes seconds NAIN CLOCK EDIT fif 55 NAIN CLOCK EDIT PER 3 fin ss NAIN CLOCK EDIT PER fi 5s NAIN CLOCK EDIT PER 5 fi ss After the main clock has been stopped press SET MAIN CLOCK to display the current time of the main clock To change the time enter the desired time on the number pad and press ENTER Press lt CLEAR gt twice to clear changes and return to the game Press SET MAIN a second third fourth fifth or sixth time or the down arrow key to display the configured time for each clock period length To accept the displayed period length press lt YES gt To decline the selection of the period length press lt NO gt To change the period length and set the main clock enter the new time in minutes and seconds on the number pad and press lt ENTER gt Press lt CLEAR gt twice to clear changes and return to the game Wrestling Operations 215 Home Advantage Guest Advantage Stop Advantage Clock LCD Display TIME NNN The main clock must be running to us
344. t of quarter scores in football and basketball Locks up if a cold key is pressed when waiting for quarter entry Changed baseball to show time atbat pitch on time digits and show HE atbat pitch on the HE digits Added TSI interface code 558 to drag race timing codes 20 Introduction Section 2 Basic Operation 2 1 2 2 Console Operation The console face consists of a 2 line x 16 character liquid crystal display LED sport specific insert numeric keypad operation keys main clock keys and LEDs for status In most cases the top line of the LCD shows the main clock time direction the clock is counting and when the main horn is sounding Generally the bottom line of the LCD shows the HOME and GUEST team scores Throughout the manual the names or letters of keys on the keyboard are enclosed in arrows such as lt ENTER gt The standard fixed keys and functions on the right side of the console are explained in Section 2 6 All of the keys that pertain to a specific sport code insert are explained in detail in the section of the manual for that specific sport In addition Quick References and Menu Flowcharts for the Standard Keys and many of the individual sports are provided in Appendix D Sport Inserts Sports inserts are used to allow a single console to control multiple sports Select the proper insert from the chart below and slide it into the insert opening on the left side of the console until it stops To r
345. t the range of segments to be used Auto Stop AUTO STOP sets the console to stop at the end of each segment or at the end of the last segment Current Segment e CURRENT 5 1 gt increments the current segment value Reset RESET CURRENT SEGMENT sets the segment time to the current segment value and stops the clock RESET TO FIRST SEG sets the segment number and time to the value of the first segment This key is disabled while the clock is running Interval INTERVAL TIME sets the interval time DISPLAY INTERVAL sets the console to display interval time between segments Segment Time Editing SEG NO TIME allows the time for a specified segment to be edited Once the segment time is edited pressing the up or down arrow key scrolls through the segment times and allows any other segments to be edited COPY RANGE copies a time value to a range of segments Edit Key Function Press EDIT followed by CURRENT SEGMENT 1 to edit the current segment value 328 Quick Reference Sport 5000 Baseball Note Refer to Section 4 Baseball Operation for more detailed operating instructions Start Up Turnthe Power Switch ON Atthe Resume Game Y N prompt Press ENTER YES gt to resume the game where last shut off Press lt Clear NO gt to enter a new sport code number At Bat AT BAT turns the at bat indicators on or off Batter Number
346. tage Guest 2 220 Guest Advantage eth een estt eii ea ne eds 220 Blood Time 221 Injury n d ned od e n es etes RE 221 Match Number Period Team Score and Match 221 14 3 ditte beu eterne bor At RI 223 New Game ha ecd 223 New COod ates 223 Home Roster Guest 0004021010 224 Display pobre ARE m diro ea e e ee dees 225 viii Table of Contents Weight Clas 5 2 ei RE e E e eos p tof t 226 Edit Rein MERE 227 rt HG RR sean 227 14 4 erede tate 228 M n Clock eiat eonim b an eh redeo ades 228 Blood Inj ry Tine iu ete eei ae 229 Weight Class hr mr rot pe RR et o Pe 229 Select Captions ele obtemperare 230 Display Lanes for Weight Class niii iere et tice He tte 230 Display Team 8n grippe n Ape a lp eg anita 230 Switch Output ee tto aepo E eR np 231 15 1 General Event Counter Information esses entente 233 15 2 Day and Time Event Countdown sse 233 aie ne
347. terere te etui 39 Accessing Segment Timer diues etm etae ede 40 Accessing 2 Digit or 6 Digit Display Segment 40 segment limer Keys dt spud edet ns 41 Segment NO s osse reete ee CER 41 First Segment oen ens eis ea 41 Last Segment ioo deii re eoa ia ss eo t ee 42 Interyal og eee e DO 42 Display Br Da haven GE de v E 42 Copy Range o ure tto por nep nO p E OO Eee tp 43 43 Table of Contents i Reset Current Segment UE ERE PERPE ERE SPESE E ee ebore ges 43 Current Segment c pe te bere e rb HERD HUE eO 44 Settings 2 eet n y o EAE e RR EE 44 3 5 Editione RE etn 44 Current Segment OSA DR eee 44 3 6 44 New Gode 4s eo tonem uo oe ba ee tA be Ee 45 Wamins TIME a 45 DinVBright 3n eene bremen top E rente ep apa a 45 Write the correct code number here 47 41 Baseball Keys ia sie etii o ee neue mie emp 47 c E 47 Out Sates i REI 48 Batter Average Clear Batter Average
348. the next selection EXIT GARE This prompt confirms that the user wants to exit the BRE YOU SURE S N sport code and enter the segment timer The SEGMENT TIMER LL 2475 insert must be inserted to enter the Segment Timer settings Refer to Section 3 for more information on the segment timer Press YES to exit the sport code and run the segment timer program Press NO or the down arrow key to scroll to the next selection RENU DING Press 0 through 9 or use the arrow keys lt gt lt gt gt to select the intensity for the digits on the LEVEL 0 9 NN scoreboard NN current level Press lt NO gt to resume the game in progress using the current data and exit the Menu Press the down arrow key lt gt to scroll to the next selection Note Dim levels pertain to outdoor LED products Indoor LED and incandescent products only support one level of dimming at 5096 184 Track Operations Edit Settings LCD Display EDIT SETTINGS Time of Day LCD Display MENU NAIN SELECT TOD GF DAS ie 2 24 HOUR GF DAS TOD s5 55 current setting Press YES or the right or left arrow key to select the Settings submenu and show the first prompt on the LCD Refer to Section 12 4 Press NO to resume the game in progress using the current data and exit the Menu Press the down arrow key to scroll to the next
349. tnn ees foco 24 Single Controller Systems Channel Setting esee 28 Multiple Controller w Single Broadcast Group Channel Setting 29 Multiple Controller w Multiple Broadcast Systems Channel Setting 30 Standard Keys hav sti e tede epe potefl 31 Nic e 31 SLOP mp 31 i deo rne arn 32 32 M 32 siete pA deed Oed pe 32 Set Mam Clock tete E rec teet tere i m ete eque tesi Todes 33 Count EE ERE TR T a aec I ORO eed 36 Auto m 36 te a tette b e D m e ERE Pe Tere 36 Remote Start Stop Controls din beg Re tete pao a dreht 36 Main Clock Control rent ec ag pee D 36 Shot Clock Control sor e peo bra Th ng RR 37 General Multi Purpose Timer 2 37 Standard Keys a cipe eene eva telles 37 Accessing the Multi Purpose Timer 37 Accessing the Segment T mer 3 ope e ean tpi n ppt 38 Segment Immer OVetVIeW atto
350. to edit each segment s time Select the segment to be edited and enter the time desired Follow the directions below to accomplish this SEGMENT XX EDIT segment number SEGMENT RE EDIT segment number NN NN segment time First Segment Press SEGMENT TIME to set individual segment times Enter the segment to be edited with the keypad and press ENTER Enter the time for the segment with the keypad Press ENTER to accept the time and move to the next segment time Press ENTER again to exit the function Press the up or down arrow keys to move to the previous or next segment This key sets the first segment in a range of segments to run when START is pressed FIRST SEGMENT nn Y current first segment Press FIRST gt and enter the segment to be set as the last segment Press ENTER to accept the time and exit the function The console will be reset to the segment selected here when the RESET TO FIRST gt key is pressed Segment Timer 41 Last Segment This key sets the last segment in a range of segments to run when START is pressed LAST SEGMENT nn current last segment Interval Time Press LAST SEGMENT and enter the segment to be set as the first segment Press ENTER to accept the time and exit the function After the segment set as the last segment is completed the console will automaticall
351. to enter the Segment Timer settings Refer to Section 3 for more information on the segment timer Press lt YES gt to exit the sport code and run the segment timer program Press lt NO gt or the down arrow key to scroll to the next selection Continued on next page Water Polo Operations 303 Continued from previous page LCD Display MENG LEVEL 0 9 NN NN current level FiENU PIRIN SETTINGS Action Press 0 through or use the arrow keys lt gt gt to select the intensity for the digits on the Scoreboard Press to resume the game in progress using the current data and exit the Menu Press the down arrow key lt gt to scroll to the next selection Note Dim levels pertain to outdoor LED products Indoor LED and incandescent products only support one level of dimming at 50 Press YES or the right or left arrow key to select the settings submenu and show the first prompt on the LCD Press to resume the game in progress using the current data and exit the Menu Press the down arrow key to scroll to the next selection 304 Water Polo Operations Time of Day LCD Display NENU NAIN SELECT TOD GF DAS ie 2 24 HOUR GF DAS TOD 55 55 current setting GF DAS GAME _ 2 700 current setting BF DAS BLANA GATE DAT
352. tomatically increment the ball and strike pitch count data of the team that is not at bat AT BAT indicator off If the Ball Count value is 4 when BALL COUNT 1 gt is pressed the value is blanked out Press BALL COUNT 1 gt a second time to set the value to zero If the Strike Count value is 3 when STRIKE COUNT 1 gt is pressed the value is blanked out Press STRIKE COUNT 1 gt a second time to set the value to zero Ball and strike pitch count data is not incremented when the BALL COUNT 1 gt and STRIKE COUNT 1 gt values are incremented to blank or zero Hit Error Clear Hit Error The HIT and ERROR keys are used to turn on the Hit or Error indicator or digits On some scoreboards the ERROR key can also display the player s position when the Error Position setting is on Pressing the CLEAR gt key turns off the Hit and Error indicators and clears the digits ERROR is used for an example Press the lt HIT gt or ERROR key to turn on the Hit or Error indicator or digits ERROR This display appears briefly ERROR When the lt ERROR gt key is pressed enter the position POSITION N number of the player and press ENTER 1 This prompt only appears when the Error Position in Edit Settings is on Press the CLEAR HIT ERROR key to turn off the Hit and Error indicators and clear the digits ERROR OFF This display appears briefly Baseball
353. u or Chui for the selected player are cleared when a Shido penalty is assessed Corresponding Wazaari and Yuko opponent values are decremented lt KOKA 1 gt and lt 1 gt keys increment or decrement the selected opponent s Koka value Koka values can be 1 9 or zero Judo Operations 263 18 3 Edit Yuko Koka The Yuko and Koka values are edited in the same way Yuko is shown as an example LCD Display WHITE EDT N current setting WHITE MEDICAL EDT N current setting 18 4 Menu When lt EDIT gt lt YUKO 1 is pressed the current yuko value is displayed for editing The current value is shown in the n position on the LCD When EDIT MEDICAL is pressed the current medical value is displayed for editing Enter the desired value and press lt ENTER gt The current value is shown in the n position on the LCD The MENU key allows the user to select from a list of options specific for each sport The up and down arrow keys allow the user to scroll through the menu list Pressing a key other than lt YES gt the arrow keys and other allowed keys exit the Menu function New Game LCD Display GANEP Press lt YES gt to clear all of the program data for the last game played or the game in progress and begin running the selected sport Press to resume the game in progress using the current data and exit the Menu Press
354. ull time outs for the selected team The second press displays the number of partial timeouts if applicable Press enter to take a time out for the selected team The TIME OUT ON OFF selects a full 1 press or partial 2 4 press time out and starts time out clock time out clock may be displayed the main scoreboard depending on the Time Outs Show on Main setting in the Menu under Edit Settings Quick Reference 341 Player Roster Keys PLAYER selects the player number for statistics edit Pressing IN GAME or OUT OF GAME within the player statistics edit screen changes the status of the player selected Press the left and right arrow keys to edit the aces kills blocks and digs for the selected player Press the up or down arrow keys to move to a different player DELETE PLAYER deletes the selected player from the roster Player Substitution INDIV SUB substitutes a player currently out of the game for a player who is in the game e MASS SUB substitutes six players who are currently out of the game for all of the in game players Edit Key Function Press EDIT followed by any of the following keys to edit the respective value lt SCORE 1 gt lt SCORE 1 gt lt ACES 1 gt lt BLOCKS 1 gt lt KILLS 1 gt lt DIGS 1 gt TIME lt TIME OUT ON OFF gt lt GAMES WON 1 gt lt MATCH NUMBER 1 gt lt GAME 1 gt Pressing the up or down arrow keys after
355. ulti function timing system and has multiple purposes The operation of the segment timer is determined by ninety nine segments of pre programmed length The segment timer will count down starting at the segment number that is set as First Segment When the first segment is completed the Segment Timer will count the preset Interval Time and proceed with the next segment The timer will continue counting segments until the segment number that is set as Last Segment is complete It then will reset to the segment saved as the First Segment and will either begin counting down or wait for the START key to be pressed depending on the AUTO STOP setting Refer to Subsection Auto Stop in this section to set the segment stopping feature The first and last segment values can be used to set up specific practice sessions For example the practice session for one sport could be programmed for five minute segments on segments 1 10 while another might use 10 minute segments on 11 20 Set the first segment and last segment values to the desired segment numbers for the session and the console will count down each of the segments in order It may also be set to either stop on the last segment or loop back to first segment segments again based on the lt AUTO STOP setting The segments values will be saved when the console is turned off and will be the same values regardless of the sport that was used to access the segment timer Segment Timer 39 3 2 A
356. urable Added a fixed width font conversion for auto racing in a new code 334 Added code 5099 for the strikeout count controller Version 1 5 3 Release Date 10 April 2002 Made rodeo timer able to edit now up time in timed events mode without adjusting each of the individual timers Corrected 7 point scoring setting in rodeo at power up setting was opposite of what it said Change the scoreboard ON OFF Key function in rodeo so the scoreboard automatically turns back on at the start of the next competitor or at reset Added arena football code 9601 to American Airlines 10 Introduction Added full and partial timeouts to BB 2046 Switched SOG and SAVES position on the BB 2046 as requested by scoreboard design Resume game does not restore TOD clock correctly in hockey Made all sports go to game clock on a new game or resume Added code 555 for Compulink interface for drag racing displays Version 1 5 4 Release Date 2 May 2002 Made the player number entry for fouls and points in basketball skip past the timer delay if a key is pressed before it expires Adjust the dimming levels to add dim levels of 1 9 Added codes for Resch Center Add new promo keys for the strikeout console used at Shea Stadium Added code 5599 for the sport of cricket Added sending of code number model and version number for TrueTime support It was added to the multidrop and RTD outputs Made boxing not count a time of 0 in the interval time
357. utes and seconds using the selected format on the number pad and press ENTER Press ENTER or the down arrow key to scroll to the next selection Press 1 or 2 to display the game clock default or the time of day clock on the scoreboard Press the down arrow key to exit the Menu and return to the game If 2 tod is selected this message will be displayed Press ENTER to blank all game data on the scoreboard except for the Time of Day digits Football Options 123 8 4 Settings The user can edit the following settings when EDIT SETTINGS has been selected from the Main Menu Main Clock Note 1 The settings entered for Main Clock are used with the SET MAIN gt key Note 2 The period break and overtime lengths are used differently depending on the direction of the main clock For count down the main clock is set to the selected length decrements towards zero and stops at zero For count up the main clock is set to zero increments towards the selected length and stops when the selected length is reached LCD Display CLOCK MODE TENTH SECONDS N N current setting MAIN CLOCA Tie PERIOD 11 55 11 55 current setting MAIN CEOCH TIPIE BREAK _ 17 55 fif 55 current setting When the main clock is set to count down and tenths of a second is selected the main clock displays in tenths of a second remaining when the time is below one minute Press YES to s
358. utes and seconds on the number pad and press lt gt For example 1 00 A warning horn can be configured to signal the end of a full partial time out While the time out clock is counting down the horn will sound for one second when the warning time is reached Enter a zero for the time to disable the warning horn Enter the time in minutes and seconds on the number pad and press ENTER Enter the number of partial time outs on the number pad and press ENTER Enter the amount of time for a partial time out in minutes and seconds on the number pad and press lt ENTER gt For example 00 20 Continued on next page 146 Hockey Options Continued from previous page LCD Display Action TIME BUTS RBDE Press YES to display the time out time on the LCD and the main clock digits of the scoreboard while the time out clock is active SHOW ON N current setting Press to display the time out time on the LCD only Select Captions LCD Display SELECT CAPTIONS This menu option allows for the controlled backlit lt gt 2 captions to be turned ON OFF I Press the lt 1 gt key to select ON and OFF for captions controlled by control 1 Press the lt 2 gt key to select ON and OFF for captions controlled by control 2 Switch Output The All Sport 5000 series console has a switch that can be used to drive a number of different devi
359. utes and seconds on the number pad and press ENTER Enter the number of partial time outs on the number pad and press ENTER Enter the amount of time for a partial time out in minutes and seconds on the number pad and press ENTER For example 00 20 Press YES to display the time out time on the LCD and the main clock digits of the scoreboard while the time out clock is active Press to display the time out time on the LCD only 162 Soccer Options Display Penalty TOL LCD Display ISPLAY RODE This selection allows the operator to decide whether or ERAT not to display the penalty or TOL on the penalty digits PENALTI TOL The asterisk sign indicates current selection Use the right or left arrow keys gt or any number key to change the selection and then press ENTER Switch Output The Sport 5000 series console has a switch that can be used to drive a number of different devices The switch can be configured to operate under different settings The default setting is 1 CLOCK 0 To display the switch setting that you want to select Press the number 0 1 2 3 key as a shortcut or use the left and right arrow keys to scroll to the desired setting Press YES to select the new setting Press NO or the down arrow key to leave the switch setting and display the next prompt please refer to table on the following page Soccer Operations 163
360. values are edited in the same way D is shown as an example LCD Display WHITE D When lt EDIT gt lt D 1 gt is pressed the current D value is displayed for editing EDT N current setting The current value is shown in the N position on the LCD 240 Karate Operations 16 3 Menu The MENU key allows the user to select from a list of options specific for each sport The up and down arrow keys allow the user to scroll through the menu list Pressing a key other than lt 5 gt the arrow keys and other allowed keys exit the Menu function New Game When the LCD Display is as shown the following actions may be selected LCD Display FIENU FBIN Press YES to clear all of the program data for the last game played or the game in progress and begin 7 GAME running the selected sport Press lt NO gt to resume the game in progress using the current data and exit the Menu Press the down arrow key to scroll to the next selection New Code When the LCD Display is as shown the following actions may be selected LCD Display RIENU FIRIN Press YES to begin selection of a new code from the ENTER CODE prompt Press NO to resume the game in progress using the current data and exit the Menu Press the down arrow key to scroll to the next selection Karate Operations 241 Display Menu The DISPLAY MENU allows the user to start and edit the s
361. went to 1 Version 2 2 1 Release Date 23 May 2007 Changed the way speed pitch data is read There was a problem if radar guns were switched that the next speed would be missed Fixed the half TNMC caption in soccer codes it was not correctly positioned e Added address 19 for the new FB 2018 and 50 2018 boards to football soccer hockey baseball and track e Added pitch count output to address 3 and to digits on address 64 65 67 Version 2 2 2 Release Date 21 June 2007 e Fixed the scoreboard test for baseball HE digits after pitch count was added to these digits in the last version e Added custom codes for Madison Square Garden 9112 9412 9901 e Added a selection for showing laps to go in the autorace code 333 e Added an output addr 10 for 6 digit time displays in autoracing Added an alt seg to football basketball and hockey for the segment to show on shot play clock digits e Changed autorace function getDatCarNum to set the car blank if it gets a space or something other than a number Version 2 2 3 Release Date 23 Aug 2007 e Fixed so the code model and version number sent when a new code or resume code is done e Fixed wrestling weight classes in position 1 and 2 to display correctly when set for 5 line display and when selected for showing lines 13 and 14 e Added code for Australian football and cricket Code 6699 FB and 5699 CR Introduction 19 Fixed a bug in edi
362. with the codes 3401 and 3402 Added a code for field hockey that would do 3 penalty timers for H 2104 on code 4603 4703 Corrected the message in baseball menu from error position on off to position Added a period text description code for two console operation in basketball and football Added two new driver addresses with three penalty timers in water polo Fixed problem in wrestling with Reset Match key any cold key would lock it up for several key strokes Changed to add the weight class scores to get the total team score for the meet if using weight classes 16 Introduction e Added player names to volleyball and penalty times to hockey handball for the European board codes 9200 and 9400 Added code 9409 for handball with three penalty times Added display codes D7 and D8 to compulink interface code 555 for left and right KPH Version 2 1 1 Release Date 10 March 2005 e Added code for running wrestling on a hockey and basketball board combo H 2104 BB 2124 with the codes 3401 and 3402 e Added error x10 digits for home and guest to baseball on address 68 and 69 e Changed water polo so the horn command bit will be sent with the shot clock horn e Added address 23 24 25 26 to codes 1401 4401 3401 2401 and 6402 e Added extra addresses to volleyball football and soccer for All Sport Version 2 1 2 Release Date 15 May 2005 e Added PLY FL PTS captions addr 223 to the codes 9100 9200 of basketball and
363. y RENU PRIN Press YES reset the main clock to the RESET ROUND configured round length value I 1 Note This function is disabled when the clock is running Press the down arrow key to scroll to the next selection 250 Tae Kwon Do Operations Reset Rest LCD Display RENU PRIN Press YES reset the main clock to the configured rest length value RESET Note This function is disabled when the clock is running Press the down arrow key to scroll to the next selection Display Menu The DISPLAY MENU allows the user to start and edit the segment timer or to change the brightness of the scoreboard LCD Display FIENU FIBIN ENTER Press YES to select the Display submenu show the first prompt on the LCD ISPLAY MENUS Press the down arrow key to scroll to the next selection Continued on next page Tae Kwon Do Operations 251 Continued from previous page LCD Display Action RENL BISPLSS RUN Note The segment timer function is disabled SEG TIMER Y N while the clock is running 1 Press YES to exit the sport code and run the segment timer program Press or the down arrow key to scroll to the next selection EXIT GAME This prompt confirms that the user wants to exit BRE YOU SURE Y N the sport code and enter the segment timer The SEGMENT TIMER LL 2475 insert must be inserted to enter the Segment Timer settings Refer to Section
364. y range is copied set the menu will be exited xx starting segment value ending segment value Once completed all segments from to yy inclusive will be set to the value specified by nn nn Auto Stop This key is the auto stop function of the console Note To set the console to stop after the last segment in the series is completed the auto stop at each segment setting must be set to NO AUTO STOP AT Press AUTO STOP to enter this menu Press YES to the console to stop after each EACH SEG 5 1 segment is completed Press lt START gt to proceed current setting with the next segment Press NO to set the console to automatically begin the next segment when each segment is completed The console will prompt for the auto stop at last segment setting AUTO STGP Press YES to set the console to stop when the LAST SEG S9 N last segment has been completed Press lt NO gt to set the console to start over at the first segment when the last segment is completed current setting Reset to First Press lt RESET TO FIRST gt to reset the segment number to the segment set as the first segment Refer to Subsection First Segment Note The reset to first function is disabled while the clock is running Reset Current Segment Press RESET CURRENT SEGMENT to reset the segment time to the value specified by the current segment The segment number will remain at the current value
365. y reset to the segment saved as the first segment The interval time is the time between each segment The interval time can be displayed on the Guest Scoreboard digits using the DISPLAY INTERVAL key LCD Display INTERVAL nn NM Y current setting Display Interval Press INTERVAL TIME to display the current value of interval time on the bottom line of the LCD Edit the value of the interval time and press lt ENTER gt This setting determines whether the interval count will be displayed on the scoreboard ISPLRS INTERVAL 525 current setting Press YES to display the interval time on the scoreboard Press NO to disable interval time display The interval time will be displayed only on the console if NO is selected Notes Regardless of this setting the value saved in interval time will be counted down between segments Set the interval time to zero if no interval between segments is desired When the interval time is being displayed the segment number on the scoreboard flashes to indicate that the time displayed is interval time 42 Baseball Operations Copy Range This key sets a range of segments to a specific value COPY NN NN Press COPY RANGE and enter the time SEG XX TU 99 segment value to be desired Press ENTER to move to the next field The asterisk denotes which field is currently being edited When the last segment in the cop
366. y to scroll to the next selection Press YES to begin selection of a new code from the ENTER CODE prompt Press NO to resume the game in progress using the current data and exit the Menu Press the down arrow key to scroll to the next selection 118 Football Options Home Roster Guest Roster Home Roster and Guest Roster are entered in the same way Home Roster is used as an example FENU RDSTER Press YES or the right or left arrow key to select the Home or Guest Roster submenu and show the SELELT HONE first prompt on the LCD Press NO to resume the game in progress using the current data and exit the Menu Press the down arrow key to scroll to the next selection HDRE TEBh NAME The TEAM NAME LL 2441 insert must be installed to enter the Team Name Message RRRRRRRRRRRRR Center TNMC settings The is updated after each selection is completed Use the COLUMNS ROWS and STROKE keys to select the WIDTH HEIGHT and FONT of the TNMC The defaults are 48 columns 8 rows and single stroke Enter up to fifteen 15 characters for the team name and press ENTER Reinsert the FOOTBALL LL 2437 insert to continue Football Options 119 HBhE TERR 8882 The TEAM NAME LL 2441 insert must be installed to enter the Team Name Message RRRRRRRRRR Center TNMC settings The TNMC is updated after each selection is completed Use the COLUMNS ROWS and S
367. yed Note The segment timer function is disabled while the clock is running FIENU FIBIN ENTER Press YES to enter the display menu DISPLAY MENU Press lt YES gt to exit the sport code and run the segment timer program DISPLAY RUN SEG TIMER Y N The console will prompt the user to press lt YES gt a second time to enter the segment timer to avoid accidental exit from the sport program EXIT GANE BRE YOU SURE Y N Refer to Section 3 for more information on the segment timer 38 Basic Operations Section 3 Segment Timer Sport Insert LL 2475 Code 100 is for the dedicated Segment Timer The Sport Insert drawing is located at the end of this section The Quick Reference is located in Appendix D Reference Drawings Insert Segment Drawing A 129357 Refer to the information in Section 2 to start up the console and use the sport insert Read Section 2 carefully to fully understand the following operation instructions If an insert is lost or damaged a copy of the insert drawing located at the end of this section can be used until a replacement can be ordered If you do not know the code number to enter for your scoreboard refer to Appendix B in this manual If you do not know the model number of your scoreboard refer to the scoreboard Installation and Maintenance manual provided with the scoreboard 3 1 Segment Timer Overview The segment timer is a m

Maytag CWE5800ACS Oven User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents